All educator editions

Grades 6–8 educator edition

20 cases, 363 student pages. Each sheet shows a student page with sample answers and notes for you. Student pages have the same page numbers in both books.

Open the student editionDownload the educator edition, PDF, 9 MB

No, Pero Why?

Educator edition

Grades 6–8

Grades 6–8 classrooms, advisory periods and after-school groups, and older learners who need more scaffolding.

20 cases

How to use this educator editionGrades 6–8 educator edition

  1. The student page, reduced, with the same page number as in the student edition.
  2. Sample answers are blue, italic and start with a key symbol.
  3. The educator column names the case, the page and this edition.
  4. Blocks for this page, always in the same order.

How to use this educator edition

Each sheet shows one student page on the left and notes for you on the right. Student pages keep their page numbers in this book. Each case starts with a Case plan sheet.

The educator column

  • Pacing Minutes for the full chapter, and what to cut when you have one period.

  • Say this Prompts to read aloud, with a note on how to use each one.

  • Stop and think On reading passage pages: the passage questions and where each one falls.

  • Watch for A likely misconception, what it sounds like and what to do next.

  • Support Scaffolds, sentence frames and English and Spanish cognates.

  • Stretch A harder question or extension for students who are ready.

  • Heat check How likely the page is to start a hard conversation, and how to cool it down.

  • Standards The standards the task practices, on the task page.

  • Answer key Answers that are not printed on the student page.

Answers

A sample answer Each answer is a complete response a strong student could write. Your students’ wording will differ.

Heat check

  • Low: most students can discuss this without personal stakes.
  • Medium: the talk can turn personal. Use the cool-down.
  • High: plan the cool-down before class.
T2

Plan the courseGrades 6–8 educator edition

Plan the course

CaseTaskStudents makeFull chapter, minOne period, minCode of ethics
1 Is the screening canceled?Talk it through, then write a three-sentence group-chat update telling friends whether to come on Friday and which door to use.Group-chat message, 3–4 sentences9045SPJ Code of Ethics
2 Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Redesign Dec’s practice sheet so it still checks circuit understanding, then explain your changes to a partner.Annotated sketch plus 3–5 sentence explanation8045CEC Ethical Principles and Practice Standards
3 What should a group do after a public mistake?Fix Gia’s apology using a four-line template, then read it aloud as Anika would hear it.Four-sentence correction7945PRSA Code of Ethics
4 Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Make a people map of who uses the room, then write a short note to the board asking one budget question and one access question.People map plus a 4–6 sentence note7645ASPA Code of Ethics
5 Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Label a practice pay statement and explain to a partner where the money went.Labeled statement plus 3–4 sentence explanation6945PayrollOrg Code of Ethics
6 What can your family see in your college records?Make a “my records, my family” card explaining who holds FERPA rights for a middle-school student and what changes at 18.Illustrated card, 4–6 sentences6945AACRAO Ethics and Practice
7 Did one complaint get the novel banned?Draw the steps of a book review and write a message correcting the group chat.Flowchart plus 3–4 sentence message6945ALA Code of Ethics
T3

Plan the course, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Plan the course, continued

CaseTaskStudents makeFull chapter, minOne period, minCode of ethics
8 Is it a recommendation or an ad?Add a clear disclosure to Gia’s review script and explain where you put it and why.Storyboard plus 3–4 sentence explanation8645FTC Endorsement Guides (16 CFR Part 255)
9 What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Match offices on a sample ballot to the everyday things they decide, then make a poster for families about finding their own ballot.Matching sheet plus a poster8645SPJ Code of Ethics
10 Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Map Sami’s trip from home to the workshop and mark each place something could go wrong.Annotated map plus 3–4 sentences8445ASPA Code of Ethics
11 Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Make a side-by-side chart of Jordy’s and Gia’s work, then write one question Jordy could ask.Chart plus a one-sentence question7145SHRM Code of Ethics
12 When can a school limit what students say?Make a two-column chart comparing the Tinker armbands with Anika’s wear-blue plan, then explain one way they’re alike and one way they’re different.Chart plus 3–5 sentences7645ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct
13 Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Make a materials sheet for the next Common Room screening and pick one change to try.Materials sheet plus 3–4 sentences7345FTC Green Guides (16 CFR Part 260)
T4

Plan the course, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Plan the course, continued

CaseTaskStudents makeFull chapter, minOne period, minCode of ethics
14 Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Make a rights log for the crew’s short film and suggest a way to use music they’re allowed to use.Rights log plus 3–4 sentences8745AIGA Standards of Professional Practice
15 Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Sort the internship’s daily tasks into “learning” and “working,” then tell a partner whether it looks more like school or a job.Sorted chart plus 3–4 sentences8745NACE Principles for Ethical Professional Practice
16 Who wrote the new building rule?Rewrite the building notice so every resident knows who wrote it, what changed, when and who to ask.Rewritten notice, 60–90 words8745ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct
17 How should the crew give out ten free seats?Hold a small-group discussion, then write a short note to the thirty students explaining how the ten seats will be given out.Note, 4–6 sentences8945The Belmont Report
18 Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Make a source card for the district budget and write one question the theater crew could bring to the school board.Source card plus a 2–3 sentence question7945ASPA Code of Ethics
19 What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Write and practice a 60-second comment for the parks committee about the court hours.60-second comment (about 130 words)7245ASPA Code of Ethics
T5

Plan the course, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Plan the course, continued

CaseTaskStudents makeFull chapter, minOne period, minCode of ethics
20 Can the crew post this image as true?With a partner, fill an image-check card and write two sentences telling friends whether to trust the courtyard picture.Completed card plus 2–3 sentences6745RTDNA Code of Ethics
T6

Standards in this editionGrades 6–8 educator edition

Standards in this edition

Common Core codes come from our standards map for this grade band. Each code links to its official page.

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

RI.6.7 Combine information from words, images and numbers to build a clear understanding of a topic. Lessons 2 and 4

RI.6.8 Follow an argument in a text and tell which claims are backed by reasons and evidence and which are not. Lessons 1, 3 and 4

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

RI.7.8 Trace an argument in a text and judge whether its reasons and evidence are sound and sufficient. Lessons 1, 2, 3 and 4

RI.7.9 Analyze how two authors writing on the same topic present key information differently through the evidence or interpretations they choose. Lessons 1, 3 and 4

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

RI.8.7 Weigh the strengths and weaknesses of presenting a topic in print, video or other media. Lesson 2

RI.8.8 Break down an argument, judge whether its reasoning and evidence hold up and spot evidence that does not belong. Lessons 1, 3 and 4

RI.8.9 Find where two texts on the same topic disagree, on facts or on interpretation. Lessons 1 and 3

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

W.6.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence. Lessons 13, 14, 17 and 19

W.6.1.a Open with your claim, then lay out the reasons and evidence in a clear order. Lesson 4

W.6.1.b Support a claim with clear reasons and relevant evidence from credible sources. Lessons 1, 2, 3 and 4

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information. Lessons 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 18 and 20

T7

Standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Standards in this edition, continued

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting. Lessons 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

W.7.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence. Lessons 13, 14, 17 and 19

W.7.1.a State your claim, recognize opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order. Lessons 1, 2, 3 and 4

W.7.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources. Lessons 1, 2, 3 and 4

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information. Lessons 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 18 and 20

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience. Lessons 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

W.8.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence. Lessons 13, 14, 17 and 19

W.8.1.a State your claim, show how it differs from opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order. Lessons 1, 2, 3 and 4

W.8.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources. Lessons 1, 2, 3 and 4

W.8.1.c Use words and phrases that show how claims, counterclaims, reasons and evidence connect. Lessons 1, 2, 3 and 4

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information. Lessons 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 18 and 20

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience. Lessons 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20

D1.5.6-8 C3 Framework. Decide which kinds of sources will help answer a question, considering the points of view they represent. Lesson 1

D2.Civ.1.6-8 C3 Framework. Tell apart the powers and responsibilities of citizens, political parties, interest groups and the media. Lesson 8

D2.Civ.10.6-8 C3 Framework. Explain how personal interests, civic virtues and democratic principles matter when people address public problems. Lesson 17

D2.Civ.11.6-8 C3 Framework. Compare how classrooms, schools, civil society and governments make decisions, and what each process is meant to do. Lesson 7

D2.Civ.12.6-8 C3 Framework. Judge specific rules and laws, actual or proposed, as ways to address public problems. Lesson 2

D2.Civ.13.6-8 C3 Framework. Analyze the purposes, carrying out and effects of public policies in different settings. Lessons 5 and 13

D2.Civ.2.6-8 C3 Framework. Explain the roles citizens play, such as voters, jurors, taxpayers, petitioners and protesters. Lessons 9 and 19

D2.Civ.3.6-8 C3 Framework. Examine where constitutions, laws and treaties come from, what they are for and what effects they have. Lesson 6

D2.Civ.4.6-8 C3 Framework. Explain the powers and limits of the branches of government, public officials and agencies at different levels. Lessons 10 and 18

D2.Civ.6.6-8 C3 Framework. Describe how political, civil and economic organizations shape people’s lives. Lesson 4

D2.Civ.7.6-8 C3 Framework. Apply civic virtues and democratic principles at school and in the community. Lessons 3 and 17

D2.Civ.8.6-8 C3 Framework. Analyze the ideas in the founding documents of the United States and how they shape the political system. Lesson 12

T8

Standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Standards in this edition, continued

D3.1.6-8 C3 Framework. Gather information from several sources, using origin, authority, structure, context and corroboration to choose them. Lessons 1 and 20

D4.7.6-8 C3 Framework. Assess what you and others can do about local, regional and global problems, considering strategies and likely outcomes. Lessons 10 and 13

D4.8.6-8 C3 Framework. Use deliberative and democratic procedures to make decisions and act at school and in the community. Lesson 4

T9

Professional standards in this editionGrades 6–8 educator edition

Professional standards in this edition

A code of ethics is a standard a profession sets for its own members. Codes for journalists and public relations are voluntary. The rules of professional conduct for lawyers are adopted in each state and can lead to discipline. The FTC guides are law-related guidance, not ethics codes.

SPJ Code of Ethics, Society of Professional Journalists (SPJ). Professional code.

Revised September 6, 2014, at SPJ's National Convention in Nashville, Tennessee.

Who it binds: No one is legally bound. SPJ calls the code “not a set of rules” and says it is not legally enforceable under the First Amendment. SPJ encourages its use “by all people in all media.”

Seek Truth and Report It: Lessons 1, 9, 18 and 20

Minimize Harm: Lesson 19

spj.org/spj-code-of-ethics

RTDNA Code of Ethics, Radio Television Digital News Association (RTDNA). Professional code.

Revised code adopted June 11, 2015.

Who it binds: Journalists in broadcast and digital news, as guidance. RTDNA says the code “does not dictate what journalists should do in every ethical predicament.” It is not a law.

Truth and accuracy above all: Lessons 1 and 20

Independence and transparency: Lessons 3 and 14

Opening statement (before the guiding principles): Lesson 9

rtdna.org/ethics

T10

Professional standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Professional standards in this edition, continued

PRSSA Ethical Principles for PR Students & Professionals (professional values and member pledge), Public Relations Student Society of America (PRSSA), the student organization of PRSA. Professional code.

No date shown on the page.

Who it binds: PRSSA student members. PRSSA asks members to follow its Code of Ethics and Conduct and encourages chapters to have members sign the pledge when they join. PRSSA lists the same six professional values as PRSA and says it “models its ethics guidelines after those of its parent organization, PRSA.” It does not say it adopts the PRSA Code word for word. The pledge says members who violate it may be barred from PRSA membership.

PRSSA Code of Ethics and Conduct (member pledge): Lesson 1

prsa.org/prssa/about-prssa/ethical-principles

CEC Ethical Principles and Practice Standards, Council for Exceptional Children (CEC). Professional code.

No adoption date shown on the page.

Who it binds: Special education professionals, who CEC says “are guided by” these principles and standards. It is not a law; IDEA and Section 504 are the laws.

Special Education Standards for Professional Practice: Teaching and Assessment: Lesson 2

Special Education Professional Ethical Principles: Lesson 2

exceptionalchildren.org/standards/ethical-principles-and-practice-standards

T11

Professional standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Professional standards in this edition, continued

Code of Ethics of the Education Profession, National Education Association (NEA). Professional code.

Adopted by the 1975 NEA Representative Assembly. NEA's web page, titled “Code of Ethics for Educators,” was published September 14, 2020.

Who it binds: Educators, including education support professionals. NEA says the code states “the aspiration of all educators” and that only NEA and its affiliates set remedies for violations. It is not a state licensing rule or a law.

Principle I: Commitment to the Student, item 8: Lesson 2

Principle I: Commitment to the Student, item 2: Lesson 7

nea.org/resource-library/code-ethics-educators

PRSA Code of Ethics, Public Relations Society of America (PRSA). Professional code.

First developed in 1950. The current code was adopted by PRSA members in October 2000, according to PRSA's Board of Ethics and Professional Standards handbook. The page shows no later revision date.

Who it binds: PRSA members. PRSA says the code “applies to PRSA members.” It is voluntary: PRSA says it has no legislative or government power to enforce it, though its board can bar or expel members sanctioned by a government agency or convicted in court for conduct that breaks the code.

Free Flow of Information: Lessons 3 and 8

Disclosure of Information: Lessons 12 and 20

Competition: Lesson 14

prsa.org/professional-development/prsa-resources/ethics

T12

Professional standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Professional standards in this edition, continued

Credo for Ethical Communication, National Communication Association (NCA). Professional code.

Approved by the NCA Legislative Council in 1999; reaffirmed in 2011; reaffirmed with edits in 2017 and 2024.

Who it binds: NCA members, who “endorse and are committed to practicing” its nine principles. It is a statement of values with no enforcement process.

“We accept responsibility for the short- and long-term consequences of our own communication…” (one of nine unnumbered principles): Lesson 3

“We advocate sharing information, opinions, and feelings…” (one of nine unnumbered principles): Lessons 6 and 9

“We strive to understand and respect other communicators' intent…” (one of nine unnumbered principles): Lessons 7 and 16

“We advocate truthfulness, accuracy, honesty, and reason…” (one of nine unnumbered principles): Lesson 18

“We endorse freedom of expression, diversity of perspective, and acknowledgement of dissent…” (one of nine unnumbered principles): Lesson 19

natcom.org/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/Credo-for-Ethical-Communication-Revised-Clean-2024.pdf

ASPA Code of Ethics, American Society for Public Administration (ASPA). Professional code.

Revised 2013. ASPA has promoted ethical standards for public servants since 1984.

Who it binds: ASPA members, who “may be sanctioned” for failing to uphold it. ASPA also aims to raise awareness among “all those who work in public service in all sectors.”

5. Fully Inform and Advise.: Lessons 4 and 18

3. Promote democratic participation.: Lessons 4, 10 and 19

4. Strengthen social equity.: Lesson 17

aspanet.org/ASPA/Code-of-Ethics/ASPA/Code-of-Ethics/Code-of-Ethics.aspx

ALA Code of Ethics, American Library Association (ALA). Professional code.

Adopted in 1939; amended June 30, 1981; June 28, 1995; January 22, 2008; and June 29, 2021.

Who it binds: Librarians, library trustees and library staff, as a framework. ALA says the principles “cannot and do not dictate conduct to cover particular situations.”

Principle 1 (of 9): Lesson 4

Principle 2 (of 9): Lesson 7

ala.org/tools/ethics

T13

Professional standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Professional standards in this edition, continued

PayrollOrg Code of Ethics, PayrollOrg. Professional code.

No date shown on the document.

Who it binds: Payroll professionals who belong to PayrollOrg. It is not a law; tax and wage laws are separate.

Item 2: Lesson 5

Item 5: Lesson 5

info.payroll.org/pdfs/members/PAYO-code-of-ethics.pdf

IABC Code of Ethics for Professional Communicators, International Association of Business Communicators (IABC). Professional code.

No date shown on the page.

Who it binds: IABC members, who must agree to the code when they apply and renew. IABC can end the membership of anyone found to have violated it.

“I communicate accurate information”: Lesson 5

“I protect confidential information”: Lesson 11

“I do not guarantee results”: Lesson 13

iabc.com/about/what-we-do/standards/code-of-ethics

AACRAO Ethics and Practice, American Association of Collegiate Registrars and Admissions Officers (AACRAO). Professional code.

Adopted by the AACRAO Board on December 3, 2009; amended March 31, 2010; ratified by members April 23, 2010; reviewed without changes in 2016 and 2019.

Who it binds: AACRAO members, such as college registrars and admissions officers. It is not a law; FERPA is the federal law on education records.

Standards of professional practice: Lesson 6

Principles of professional ethics: Lesson 6

aacrao.org/resource/ethics-and-practice

FTC Endorsement Guides (16 CFR Part 255), Federal Trade Commission (FTC). Law or regulation.

Current text as revised July 26, 2023 (88 FR 48102), read on the eCFR.

Who it binds: Advertisers, endorsers (including influencers and reviewers) and intermediaries such as PR firms, under Section 5 of the FTC Act. The Guides are the FTC's “administrative interpretations” of that law. They are law-related guidance, not an ethics code.

§ 255.5 Disclosure of material connections: Lesson 8

§ 255.0 Purpose and definitions, paragraph (f): Lesson 8

ecfr.gov/current/title-16/chapter-I/subchapter-B/part-255

T14

Professional standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Professional standards in this edition, continued

NPPA Code of Ethics for Visual Journalists, National Press Photographers Association (NPPA). Professional code.

No revision date shown on the page.

Who it binds: Visual journalists (news photographers and video journalists) and the people who manage visual news. The code says they “are accountable for upholding” its ten standards. It is not a law.

Code of Ethics, standard 3: Lesson 10

nppa.org/resources/code-ethics

ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct, American Bar Association (ABA), Center for Professional Responsibility. Professional code.

Adopted by the ABA House of Delegates in 1983 and amended since.

Who it binds: Lawyers. The ABA writes the Model Rules as a model. Each state adopts its own rules of professional conduct, most based on this model, and those rules bind the lawyers it licenses. Lawyers can be disciplined for breaking them. The rules do not bind people who are not lawyers.

Rule 3.1 Meritorious Claims and Contentions: Lessons 10 and 16

Rule 2.1 Advisor: Lesson 12

Rule 4.1 Truthfulness in Statements to Others: Lesson 15

Rule 4.3 Dealing with Unrepresented Person: Lesson 15

americanbar.org/groups/professional_responsibility/publications/model_rules_of_professional_conduct

T15

Professional standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Professional standards in this edition, continued

SHRM Code of Ethics, Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM). Professional code.

As amended April 24, 2023.

Who it binds: SHRM members (human resources professionals). SHRM's bylaws set disciplinary procedures for violations.

Fairness and Justice: Lesson 11

Use of Information: Lesson 11

shrm.org/legal/bylaws-and-code-of-ethics/code-of-ethics

AIGA Standards of Professional Practice, AIGA, the professional association for design. Professional code.

Text read in AIGA's Design Business + Ethics (2009 edition). AIGA's current web page for the standards could not be opened.

Who it binds: AIGA members. AIGA says the standards “represent the distinction of an AIGA member in the practice of design.”

The designer’s responsibility to the public: Lesson 12

The designer’s responsibility to society and the environment: Lesson 13

The designer’s responsibility to other designers: Lesson 14

aiga.org/resources/aiga-standards-of-professional-practice

FTC Green Guides (16 CFR Part 260), Federal Trade Commission (FTC). Law or regulation.

October 11, 2012 (77 FR 62124), current text read on the eCFR.

Who it binds: Marketers who make environmental claims, such as calling a product “recyclable.” The Guides say they “do not operate to bind the FTC or the public,” but the FTC can act under Section 5 of the FTC Act against claims that are deceptive. They are law-related guidance, not an ethics code.

§ 260.12 Recyclable claims: Lesson 13

ecfr.gov/current/title-16/chapter-I/subchapter-B/part-260

NACE Principles for Ethical Professional Practice, National Association of Colleges and Employers (NACE). Professional code.

Approved by the NACE Board of Directors in 2017; updated 2025.

Who it binds: NACE members: college career-services staff and employers' recruiting staff, who “are expected to use the Principles.”

4. Comply with laws: Lesson 15

naceweb.org/career-development/organizational-structure/principles-for-ethical-professional-practice

T16

Professional standards in this edition, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Professional standards in this edition, continued

The Belmont Report, National Commission for the Protection of Human Subjects of Biomedical and Behavioral Research; published by the U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare. Research ethics.

Published in the Federal Register on April 18, 1979 (44 FR 23192).

Who it binds: Researchers who study people. It is a statement of ethical principles for research with human subjects. It is not a membership code, and by itself it is not a law.

B. Basic Ethical Principles: 3. Justice: Lesson 17

C. Applications: 1. Informed Consent: Lesson 17

govinfo.gov/content/pkg/FR-1979-04-18/pdf/FR-1979-04-18.pdf

T17

Access, language and discussionGrades 6–8 educator edition

Access, language and discussion

Supports in this edition

  • Vocabulary: Pre-teach three or four case concepts with their plain definitions and Spanish terms, and keep the word cards visible throughout.
  • Read aloud: Read every source aloud at least once and offer a recording for replay; keep each reading segment short.
  • Bilingual planning: Plan for multilingual learners with the case glossary and the case page’s Spanish explanation, allow first drafts in any language and pair students who share a language. Never ask a student to disclose a disability, immigration status, family finances or private records to take part.
  • Oral rehearsal: Let students talk before writing every time, using partner rehearsal with the route’s sentence frames.
  • Other ways to respond: Offer the route’s oral, visual and written options as equal choices, and allow dictation, sentence strips or a labeled sketch.

Cognates

The terms and evidence sheets list English and Spanish cognates in the Support block, such as context (contexto). Point them out before reading. A fluent Spanish reader checks every list before release.

Heat check

Every sheet rates how likely the page is to start a hard conversation.

  • Low: most students can discuss it without personal stakes.
  • Medium: use the cool-down if talk turns personal.
  • High: plan the cool-down before class.

No one has to share

No student needs to share private experiences, create a social media account or post publicly. Students can answer every question with the evidence on the page.

T18
How this book worksGrades 6–8 student edition

How this book works

Each case is a short chapter. The pages follow the same order in every case, so you learn the layout once.

  1. What happened Read the story and the question you will answer.

  2. Key terms Learn the words the case needs, each with its Spanish word.

  3. Reading passage Read a longer passage about the case. Stop and think at each question.

  4. Look at the evidence Read each document. Write what it shows and what it leaves out.

  5. Key idea and In the news Read the idea behind the case, a code of ethics and two real news stories.

  6. Sort the evidence Decide which evidence supports each claim and whose view is missing.

  7. Practice Choose the best response and fix two phrases in a student’s draft.

  8. Your task Follow the numbered steps, plan in the boxes and write your draft.

  9. Check your work Answer yes-or-no questions and mark your level in the rubric.

  10. Questions to discuss Write short answers, then finish My take.

  11. Talk about this case at home Take home a page of questions for your family.

Labels on the page

Evidence AGroup-chat post

A document from the case. Read it closely and compare it with the other documents.

Real sourcePublisherDate

A real news story, code or study. Scan its code to read the original.

Directions on each page

On your ownA short direction under a heading tells you what to do if you work without a teacher, and about how long it takes.

When a page continues

Some sections run onto a second page. Its heading says “continued,” and it keeps the next page number.

Filling in this book

  • Fill it in on paper or in a PDF app. Save a copy before you type.
  • What you type stays on your device. Nothing is sent to us.
  • Do not write private information about yourself or other people.
1
ContentsGrades 6–8 student edition

Contents

  1. 1 Is the screening canceled?3
  2. 2 Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?20
  3. 3 What should a group do after a public mistake?38
  4. 4 Who gets a say when a shared room changes?55
  5. 5 Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?72
  6. 6 What can your family see in your college records?89
  7. 7 Did one complaint get the novel banned?107
  8. 8 Is it a recommendation or an ad?125
  9. 9 What is on your ballot, and where do you check?142
  10. 10 Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?160
  11. 11 Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?177
  12. 12 When can a school limit what students say?195
  13. 13 Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?213
  14. 14 Does giving credit let the crew use the song?232
  15. 15 Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?251
  16. 16 Who wrote the new building rule?268
  17. 17 How should the crew give out ten free seats?286
  18. 18 Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?303
  19. 19 What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?320
  20. 20 Can the crew post this image as true?340
2

Lesson 1Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?

Content note

The optional film clip from The Hunger Games (2012) shows coercion and danger to young people. Preview it before class, or skip it, because students need only the evidence in the story.

Overview

Students read a short story about a neighborhood screening. A cropped seven-second clip in the crew’s group chat seems to say the event is canceled. Students compare the post with two documents, the coordinator’s meeting transcript and a booking email, and decide what the evidence supports. They then write a short group-chat update that corrects the claim and says which entrance to use.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a detail in a short text and point to it
  • tell something they saw from something they guessed
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • separate what a post claims from what the original documents confirm

Objectives, continued

  • match a fact, such as the time or the door, to the document that proves it
  • write a 3- or 4-sentence update that says whether to come, which door to use and how they know

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A and C on half-pages, one set per pair
  • The transcript to read aloud, printed in the educator column of the evidence sheet

The task in this edition

Task: Talk it through, then write a three-sentence group-chat update telling friends whether to come on Friday and which door to use.

Students make: Group-chat message, 3–4 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 3): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Read What happened aloud. Skip the discussion of the opening question.

Key terms (pages 4 and 5): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Pacing, continued

Look at the evidence (pages 8 and 9): 18 min. Short on time: 12 min. Read the transcript aloud once. Students fill in only the “What it shows” boxes.

Key idea (pages 10 and 11): 8 min. Short on time: 2 min. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 12): 10 min. Short on time: 5 min. Do the first row together and stop.

Practice (page 13): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Your task (pages 14 and 15): 15 min. Short on time: 15 min.

Check your work (pages 16 and 17): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Score the messages yourself with the rubric.

Questions to discuss (page 18): 10 min. Short on time: 3 min. Use the first My take frame as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 19): at home.

Periods: full chapter 90 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

Plan 1

Lesson 1Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 1 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.6.8 Follow an argument in a text and tell which claims are backed by reasons and evidence and which are not.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.1.b Support a claim with clear reasons and relevant evidence from credible sources.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

RI.7.8 Trace an argument in a text and judge whether its reasons and evidence are sound and sufficient.

RI.7.9 Analyze how two authors writing on the same topic present key information differently through the evidence or interpretations they choose.

W.7.1.a State your claim, recognize opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order.

W.7.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources.

Standards, continued

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

RI.8.8 Break down an argument, judge whether its reasoning and evidence hold up and spot evidence that does not belong.

RI.8.9 Find where two texts on the same topic disagree, on facts or on interpretation.

W.8.1.a State your claim, show how it differs from opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order.

W.8.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources.

W.8.1.c Use words and phrases that show how claims, counterclaims, reasons and evidence connect.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

Standards, continued

D1.5.6-8 Decide which kinds of sources will help answer a question, considering the points of view they represent. In this case: Students decide which kinds of sources could answer “Is the screening canceled?”

D3.1.6-8 Gather information from several sources, using origin, authority, structure, context and corroboration to choose them. In this case: Students choose sources by origin and authority: the coordinator’s transcript over a forwarded screenshot.

Codes of ethics

  • SPJ Code of Ethics: Seek Truth and Report It
  • RTDNA Code of Ethics: Truth and accuracy above all
  • PRSSA Ethical Principles for PR Students & Professionals (professional values and member pledge): PRSSA Code of Ethics and Conduct (member pledge)

Heat map

Opener (page 3): Low

Key terms (pages 4 and 5): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 8 and 9): Low

Key idea (pages 10 and 11): Low

Sort the evidence (page 12): Medium

Plan 1b

Lesson 1Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 1 plan, continued

Heat map, continued

Practice (page 13): Medium

Check your work (pages 16 and 17): Low

Try it at your school

Find out how your school sends urgent updates.

  • Ask a teacher or front-office staff which channel carries official changes (email, app, website)
  • Save the official channel so you can check it before reposting
  • Next time a screenshot circulates, post “still checking” instead of a verdict
  • Suggest to your student council that urgent updates include the original link

Who to ask: Front-office staff, a teacher, the student council advisor or a school librarian

Safety: Don’t share other people’s names or messages from a private chat. Check any official source with a trusted adult if it asks for personal information.

Sources

  • Scholastic, “Sunrise on the Reaping announcement,” June 6, 2024
  • Robert M. Entman, “Framing,” 1993
  • Society of Professional Journalists, “SPJ Code of Ethics,” September 6, 2014
Plan 1c
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?

A cropped clip in the group chat seems to cancel the crew’s screening, so you check the original documents and write an update.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline the sentence that worries the crew. About 8 minutes.

Your role: You’re the one who reads the full transcript before Gia posts. New skill: Find the original source.

Gia and Mateo read the message about tonight’s screening.

What happened

It is Friday afternoon at the Common Room, a shared event space inside a bookshop in Fort Greene, Brooklyn. Mateo, 22, booked the room for tonight’s 6 p.m. screening, the crew’s first in the neighborhood. He has been moving tables and chairs all afternoon.

Gia, 21, is helping between her class and her shift at a café. Jordy is testing the projector and captions. Sami is on her way from the print shop.

At 4:52 p.m., someone forwards a seven-second clip to the group chat. The clip comes from a meeting about the room. Its caption asks whether the screening is canceled.

Gia wants to warn people before they leave home. Mateo hopes the post is wrong. Gia has about ten minutes before she has to leave for work.

Your question: Is the screening really canceled, and what should the crew tell people?

3
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 8 minutes.

Claim A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.

En español: afirmación

In this case: The caption “Screening canceled?” is a claim. It ends with a question mark, and no document confirms it.

Context Context is the information around an event or a quote that you need to understand what it means.

En español: contexto

In this case: The full transcript adds the words “through that reader tonight.” Those words show that only the broken side door is closing.

Framing Framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward.

En español: encuadre

In this case: The crop and the caption choose what viewers notice: “removing access,” not “through that reader.”

Holding statement A holding statement is a short update that says what is known, what is still being checked and when people will hear more.

En español: comunicado provisional

In this case: Jordy posts: “We’re checking the original. Hold your plans for a moment.”

Who is involved

Mateo

Booked the room for tonight

“I’ve been moving these tables all afternoon. Please tell me we didn’t cancel this in a group chat.”

Gia

Leaving soon for a café shift

“Sami’s already on the train from the print shop. “We’re figuring it out” doesn’t tell her whether to keep coming.”

4
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, what do you think is going on?

I think the screening is ___ because ___.

I think the screening is canceled because the post says so.

Notes

5
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Seven seconds of video

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Claim: A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.
  • Context: Context is the information around an event or a quote that you need to understand what it means.
  • Framing: Framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward.
  • Holding statement: A holding statement is a short update that says what is known, what is still being checked and when people will hear more.

The story: A clip lands in the group chat

It is Friday afternoon at the Common Room, an event space inside a bookshop in Fort Greene, Brooklyn. Mateo has spent hours setting out chairs for the crew’s first screening at 6 p.m. Jordy is testing the projector and captions. Gia is helping before her café shift. Sami is on the train from the print shop.

At 4:52 p.m., a seven-second clip lands in the group chat. In it, the room coordinator says, “we are removing access.” Then the video stops. The caption asks, “Screening canceled?”

Gia wants to warn everyone, because people are already asking if they should turn around. Mateo hopes the post is wrong. Jordy notices that the clip cuts off in the middle of a sentence. Jordy asks the group to find the rest before anyone reposts.

You are at the counter with them. Your job is to read the full record before Gia posts.

Stop and think. What words would you want to hear right after “we are removing access”?

Checking the full record

The caption makes a claim. A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence. The best evidence is the coordinator’s meeting transcript: “The side-door reader is broken. We are removing access through that reader tonight. Existing room bookings remain in place. Use the staffed front entrance while we repair it.”

6
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Checking the full record, continued

Context is the information around an event or a quote that you need to understand what it means. The clip left out “through that reader.” Only one broken side door is closing. Mateo’s booking email agrees that the screening is on. It lists a step-free front entrance with staff at the desk from 5:30 p.m.

Framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward. The crop brought forward “removing access” and hid the rest. You do not have to prove that anyone meant to trick people. You only need to show what the edit leaves out.

While the crew checks, Jordy posts a holding statement: “We’re checking the original. Hold your plans for a moment.” A holding statement is a short update that says what is known, what is still being checked and when people will hear more. Then Gia posts the correction in the same chat as the rumor. It names the time and the front entrance. Sami needs that detail, because she usually comes in the side way.

Stop and think. Which words did the clip cut off, and how do they change the meaning?

Why this skill matters in real life

In one study, Stanford researchers found that most of 3,446 students judged posts by how they looked. They did not check who made them (Stanford Graduate School of Education, November 18, 2019). Luckily, this skill can be learned. Fact-checkers leave the post, open new tabs and check who made it (CrashCourse, January 22, 2019).

The crew did the same thing with one transcript and one email. This is the first skill in the casebook: find the original source. You will use it again in almost every case that follows.

Stop and think. Why might people trust a post because of how it looks?

Sources

Real sourceStanford Graduate School of EducationNovember 18, 2019

High school students are unprepared to judge the credibility of information on the internet, according to Stanford researchers

Real sourceCrashCourse (YouTube)January 22, 2019

Check Yourself with Lateral Reading: Crash Course Navigating Digital Information #3

7
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 18 minutes.

Evidence AGroup-chat post, Friday 4:52 p.m.

The post

They’re removing access tonight. Screening canceled?” A seven-second clip is attached. In it, the coordinator says “we are removing access,” and the clip ends there.

Look closely: Which word in the caption goes further than the clip itself?

What it shows

Someone thinks the screening is canceled.

One question I still have

What did the coordinator say after “removing access”?

Evidence CBooking email to Mateo, sent Tuesday

The booking email

Friday, 6–9 p.m. Screening confirmed. Front entrance: step-free. Staff member at the desk from 5:30 p.m. Contact the coordinator for arrival support.

Look closely: What does this confirm? What does it not say about the side door?

What it shows

The screening is on Friday from 6 to 9 p.m. The front entrance has no steps.

One question I still have

Is the side door working?
8
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know if everyone can use the front entrance, or who cut the clip.

Notes

9
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: framing

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics. Then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

The clip in the group chat is real, but that only tells you the video is authentic. A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence. Context is the information around an event or a quote that you need to understand what it means. Here, the clip stops before the rest of the coordinator’s sentence, so the clip alone cannot confirm the caption’s claim.

Framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward. Media researcher Robert Entman uses this idea to study what messages select and emphasize. The crop makes “removing access” stand out and hides “through that reader,” the words that limit the change to one broken side door. You do not have to prove that anyone meant to mislead people. You only need to show what the edit leaves out.

A holding statement is a short update that says what is known, what is still being checked and when people will hear more. It gives people a next step while the crew checks the documents. The correction that follows needs the time, the door and a contact for arrival help. People who are already traveling need those details before they arrive.

Professional standards

Real sourceSociety of Professional Journalists (SPJ)

SPJ Code of Ethics: Seek Truth and Report It

“Verify information before releasing it. Use original sources whenever possible.”

In plain words: Journalists who follow the SPJ code check a claim against the original source before they share it.

Question: What does the full meeting transcript say right after the point where the seven-second clip ends?

Your answer

Right after the clip ends, the transcript says ___.

Right after the clip ends, the transcript says “through that reader tonight.” Only the side door is closing.
10
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceCrashCourse (YouTube)January 22, 2019

Check Yourself with Lateral Reading: Crash Course Navigating Digital Information #3

Shows the move the crew makes: leave the screenshot, open new tabs and check who made it and what other sources say.

Real sourcePolitiFactAugust 1, 2022

Viral image shows fake story from The Atlantic about Biden

A real fact-check of a fabricated news screenshot: the image looked official, but the outlet never published it.

Notes

11
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownCompare each piece of evidence with each claim. Write supports, challenges or neither in each box. About 10 minutes.

Draw an arrow from each piece of evidence to the claim it supports or challenges. Which claim is left standing, and which gap still needs a check before you post?

EvidenceClaim 1The screening is canceled.Claim 2The screening is on; use the staffed front entrance.
1 The clip: “we are removing access…” ends mid-sentence.
Supports
Neither
2 The transcript: access is removed “through that reader,” and existing bookings remain in place.
Challenges
Neither
3 The booking email: Friday 6–9 p.m., screening confirmed, step-free front entrance.
Challenges
Supports

Still open

  • Can every visitor use the temporary entrance?

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

Sami’s view is missing. I would ask her if the front entrance works for her.
12
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose the message you would send and explain why. Then fix the two marked lines. About 8 minutes.

The post arrived a few minutes ago, and nobody has checked the original yet. What do you send to the group chat?

  • A Cancel your plans before you travel.

  • B We’re checking the original. Hold your plans for a moment.

  • C The post is fake. Ignore it.

Why I chose it

B. It says the crew is checking and asks people to wait. It does not say the screening is canceled or that the post is fake.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Hey everyone, so there was a clip going around that said the screening was canceled but 1 that is NOT true lol. Someone didn’t watch the whole thing and posted it anyway which is kind of annoying. I checked with Mateo and he said the booking is still good. They are just removing access through one door so everything is fine and 2 you can come like normal. The event is still happening Friday. Bring snacks if you want, Jordy is doing the projector. See you there!! Also if you have questions ask Mateo.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

The clip is real, but it stopped before the coordinator said which door.

Rewrite phrase 2

Please use the front entrance. The side door is closed tonight.
13
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Talk it through, then write a three-sentence group-chat update telling friends whether to come on Friday and which door to use.

Use: The screenshot and the booking email only, with the transcript read aloud by the educator.

You’ll make: Group-chat message, 3–4 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read the post in Evidence A. Circle the word that goes further than the clip.
  2. Listen as your teacher reads the full meeting update. Raise your hand at the words the clip cut off.
  3. Match each fact to its proof. Write which document gives the time and which gives the door.
  4. Tell a partner what your message will say.
  5. Write a group-chat message of 3 or 4 sentences in the Your draft box.
  6. Check your message for the time, the door and the proof.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write the 3–4 sentence group-chat message with the frame “The post says __. The email says __. So __.”
  • Say it: Record a 30-second voice note for the chat that says whether the screening is on, which door to use and how you know.
  • Show it: Draw two phone screens side by side: the cropped post, then your update, with an arrow to the words the crop cut off.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

14
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

The word that goes too far

canceled

The time, and the document that shows it

The time is ___. It comes from ___.

Friday, 6–9 p.m. It comes from the booking email.

The door to use, and the document that shows it

Use the ___. It comes from ___.

Use the front entrance. It comes from the meeting update.

Your draft

The post says ___. The email says ___. So ___.

The post says the screening is canceled, but the full meeting update says only the side door is closed. The booking email says the screening is on Friday from 6 to 9 p.m. Use the front entrance, which is staffed from 5:30. I checked the email and the meeting update.

Notes

15
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your message say the screening is still on, with the time?

    YesNo
  • Does it name the front entrance?

    YesNo
  • Does it say which document shows this?

    YesNo
  • Does it avoid calling anyone a liar?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceRepeats the screenshot’s claim or ignores the documents.Mentions a source but not the detail that changes the meaning.Uses the transcript or email to correct the claim accurately.Uses both documents and names what they still cannot confirm.
ReasoningTreats the clip as fake or as final.Corrects the claim but adds a guess about motive.Explains the difference between an entrance change and a cancellation.Explains how the crop produced the wrong conclusion and avoids inventing motive.
Audience & purposeMessage would not help someone decide whether to leave.Gives the verdict but leaves out time or entrance.Gives time, entrance and a contact.Anticipates access needs and people who saw only the original post.
16
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

How your work is scored, continued

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
RevisionNo change after feedback.Surface edits only.Adds a missing fact or removes an unsupported claim.Explains why each edit makes the update more usable.

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed “come like normal” to “use the front entrance” because the side door is closed.

Notes

17
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then finish My take. About 10 minutes.

1 The clip is real. How did it lead people to the wrong conclusion?

The clip stopped before the coordinator said which door. Then the caption added the word “canceled.”

2 Should the crew say why they think the clip was posted? Why or why not?

No. The documents do not say why it was posted. A guess could start a new argument.

My take

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should tell people the screening is on because the booking email says so.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The meeting transcript changed my first guess. It says only the side door is closed.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is whether everyone can use the front entrance.
18
Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 1: Is the screening canceled?

In this case, a short video clip in a group chat makes a group of friends think their movie night is canceled. Your student compared the clip with the full meeting notes and a booking email, then wrote a message that corrects the mix-up.

Questions to talk about

  1. What would you check before you share a screenshot?
  2. Where does your school post official updates, such as closings?
  3. What makes a correction easy to trust?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

19

Lesson 2Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?

Content note

This case discusses disability, evaluations and support plans. No student should share their own grades, diagnosis or support plan, so keep the discussion on Dec’s situation.

Overview

Students read about Dec, a high school senior who explains a circuit well out loud but loses his place on a dense practice sheet. They sort the evidence into what is observed, what might explain it and what is not established, using a summary of the IDEA evaluation rule. They then redesign the practice sheet or draft a support request that Dec could approve.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find the main point of a short set of directions
  • tell what someone did from why they did it
  • write three to five sentences that explain a choice

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • name the learning goal of a task in their own words
  • separate a task’s goal from its format
  • redesign the format so the same goal is easier to show

Objectives, continued

  • explain why the new version still tests the same goal

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A and B on half-pages, with the goal line enlarged
  • A large printed circuit diagram to mark up, one per pair

The task in this edition

Task: Redesign Dec’s practice sheet so it still checks circuit understanding, then explain your changes to a partner.

Students make: Annotated sketch plus 3–5 sentence explanation

Pacing

Opener (page 20): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud. Skip the opening question.

Key terms (pages 21 and 22): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (pages 25 and 26): 12 min. Short on time: 10 min. Read Evidence B aloud. Students fill in only the “What it shows” boxes.

Pacing, continued

Key idea (pages 27 and 28): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Say the IDEA rule in one sentence. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (pages 29 and 30): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 31): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Vote on the options. Skip the draft fixes.

Your task (pages 32 and 33): 18 min. Short on time: 15 min. Students sketch in pairs and write two sentences each.

Check your work (pages 34 and 35): 6 min. Short on time: skip. Check sketches against the success criteria yourself.

Questions to discuss (page 36): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Use question 2 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 37): at home.

Periods: full chapter 80 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

RI.6.7 Combine information from words, images and numbers to build a clear understanding of a topic.

Plan 2

Lesson 2Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 2 plan, continued

Standards, continued

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.1.b Support a claim with clear reasons and relevant evidence from credible sources.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

RI.7.8 Trace an argument in a text and judge whether its reasons and evidence are sound and sufficient.

W.7.1.a State your claim, recognize opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order.

W.7.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

Standards, continued

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

RI.8.7 Weigh the strengths and weaknesses of presenting a topic in print, video or other media.

W.8.1.a State your claim, show how it differs from opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order.

W.8.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources.

W.8.1.c Use words and phrases that show how claims, counterclaims, reasons and evidence connect.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.12.6-8 Judge specific rules and laws, actual or proposed, as ways to address public problems. In this case: Students assess how the IDEA evaluation rule addresses the problem of one-score decisions.

Codes of ethics

  • CEC Ethical Principles and Practice Standards: Special Education Standards for Professional Practice: Teaching and Assessment
  • CEC Ethical Principles and Practice Standards: Special Education Professional Ethical Principles
  • Code of Ethics of the Education Profession: Principle I: Commitment to the Student, item 8

Heat map

Opener (page 20): Medium

Key terms (pages 21 and 22): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 25 and 26): Low

Key idea (pages 27 and 28): Low

Sort the evidence (pages 29 and 30): Medium

Practice (page 31): Medium

Check your work (pages 34 and 35): Low

Try it at your school

Learn your school’s route for asking about support.

  • Find your school’s student handbook or website page on learning support
Plan 2b

Lesson 2Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 2 plan, continued

Try it at your school, continued

  • Write one question you’d want answered, without naming a classmate
  • Ask a counselor who handles support requests and how parents or students start one
  • If a friend is struggling, ask them what they want before doing anything

Who to ask: School counselor, special-education coordinator or a teacher you trust

Safety: Don’t share anyone’s grades, diagnosis or support plan. A parent or guardian usually has to be part of a formal evaluation request for students under 18.

Sources

  • U.S. Department of Education, “IDEA regulations, 34 CFR § 300.304 (evaluation procedures),” No date listed
  • CAST, “Universal Design for Learning Guidelines 3.0,” 2024
Plan 2c
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?

Dec can explain a circuit out loud but gets lost on a crowded worksheet, so the crew asks what the task measures.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline what Dec can do out loud and where he gets stuck. About 6 minutes.

Your role: You’re the one who reads the goal line before anyone decides what Dec knows. New skill: Check what a task is meant to measure.

Dec points to a small light circuit on the table while Anika watches.

What happened

Anika, 16, and Dec, 17, are at the study table twenty minutes before theater rehearsal. They are building a light circuit for a school set. Dec can explain out loud how the current travels through the circuit. On the written practice sheet, he loses his place in the instructions.

The sheet has six dense paragraphs and one small diagram. Anika’s first idea is to run the same timed practice sheet again. Then she draws a larger sketch, and Dec traces the whole circuit correctly.

Mari, 19, is on her break from the bookshop. She does not assume she knows why Dec is stuck. Dec wants help with this task, but he does not want a diagnosis from the group chat.

Your question: Does the practice sheet show what Dec knows, and what should Dec ask his teacher?

20
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Learning goal A learning goal is the knowledge or skill that a task is meant to show.

En español: meta de aprendizaje

In this case: The practice brief names one goal: explain how a simple circuit works. It does not list speed or reading six dense paragraphs.

Evaluation An evaluation is a school's formal process for learning about a student's needs, using more than one measure.

En español: evaluación

In this case: Dec’s practice sheet is not an evaluation. It is one observation the crew can describe to a teacher.

Eligibility Eligibility is meeting the requirements for a particular service or program.

En español: elegibilidad

In this case: A practice sheet cannot show whether Dec is eligible for special education. Under IDEA, no single measure can be the only basis for that decision.

Who is involved

Dec

Theater crew, working on the circuit sheet

“I can show you where the current goes. Then I get halfway through the written question and lose my place.”

Anika

Studying the circuit with Dec

“I kept pointing at the page and saying “it’s right there.” I never looked at how the question was written.”

21
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, why do you think Dec gets stuck on the worksheet?

I think Dec gets stuck because ___.

I think Dec gets stuck because he does not understand circuits yet.

Notes

22
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

The circuit Dec can explain

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Learning goal: A learning goal is the knowledge or skill that a task is meant to show.
  • Evaluation: An evaluation is a school's formal process for learning about a student's needs, using more than one measure.
  • Eligibility: Eligibility is meeting the requirements for a particular service or program.
  • Context: Context is the information around an event or a quote that you need to understand what it means.

The story: Twenty minutes before rehearsal

Anika and Dec are at the study table twenty minutes before theater rehearsal. They are building a light circuit for a school set. Dec can explain out loud how the current travels from the battery, through the switch and the LED, and back.

The written practice sheet is a different story. It has six dense paragraphs and one small diagram. Halfway through a question, Dec loses his place. He says it is like a cue sheet with no numbers.

Anika’s first idea is to run the same sheet again with a timer. Then she tries something else. She draws the circuit bigger, and Dec traces the whole path correctly. Mari, on her break from the bookshop, asks Dec to walk her through it first. She does not guess why he is stuck.

Dec wants help with this task. He does not want a diagnosis from the group chat. “Say what happened,” he tells his friends, “not that you’ve figured out what’s wrong with me.”

Stop and think. Why do you think Dec can explain the circuit out loud but gets lost on the page?

What is the sheet checking?

In Lesson 1, you learned to go back to the original source. Here, the original source is the practice brief itself. Its goal line says: “Explain how a simple circuit works.”

A learning goal is the knowledge or skill that a task is meant to show.

23
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

What is the sheet checking?, continued

The goal does not mention speed. It does not mention reading six dense paragraphs either. So when Dec gets lost on the page, the sheet may be testing reading and layout as much as circuits.

This is a lot like the cropped clip in Lesson 1. One written answer, without context, can give the wrong picture. Dec’s spoken explanation is the missing context. Together, the two answers tell you more than either one alone.

The crew also knows what it cannot decide. An evaluation is a school’s formal process for learning about a student’s needs, using more than one measure. Eligibility is meeting the requirements for a particular service or program. Anika says it plainly: “We’re not an evaluation team.” Dec decides whether to ask his teacher, Ms. R, how that process starts.

Stop and think. What is the learning goal on the sheet, and what else does the sheet seem to test?

What real schools and laws say

A federal law called IDEA says a public school must use a variety of tools in an evaluation. No single measure can be the only basis for deciding eligibility (U.S. Department of Education, IDEA regulations, 34 CFR 300.304). Design guides for teachers also suggest giving students more than one way to show what they know (CAST, Universal Design for Learning Guidelines 3.0, 2024).

Your role in this case is to read the goal line before anyone decides what Dec knows. That habit, checking what a task is meant to measure, is the new skill you will carry into later cases.

Stop and think. Why should Dec, and not his friends, decide what his teacher hears?

Sources

Real sourceU.S. Department of EducationNo date listed

IDEA regulations, 34 CFR § 300.304 (evaluation procedures)

Real sourceCAST2024

Universal Design for Learning Guidelines 3.0

24
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 12 minutes.

Evidence APractice brief, handed out Monday

The assignment

Goal: Explain how a simple circuit works. Read the six paragraphs below before you answer. Use the diagram to trace the path of the current from the battery through the switch and the LED and back. Answer questions 1–4 in complete sentences.

Look closely: Which skill does the goal line name, and which does it leave out?

What it shows

The goal is to explain how a simple circuit works.

One question I still have

What are the six paragraphs meant to test?

Evidence BStudy-table notes, Wednesday 3:40 p.m.

Dec’s explanation

Out loud, with the larger sketch: traced the whole path, battery to switch to LED and back. Correct. Written sheet: skipped a line in the instructions and answered a different question from the one asked. Dec: the layout is hard to follow.

Look closely: What did Dec get right out loud that the sheet did not record?

What it shows

Dec traced the whole circuit correctly out loud with the larger sketch.

One question I still have

Why is the layout hard for Dec to follow?
25
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know if Dec wants help from the school, or how the sheet is scored.

Notes

26
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: learning goals

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics. Then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

Dec’s written answer and his spoken explanation give the crew different information. A learning goal is the knowledge or skill that a task is meant to show. The practice brief names one goal: explain how a simple circuit works. It does not list speed, and it does not list reading six dense paragraphs. So the next question is what the sheet was meant to measure and what got in the way.

CAST’s Universal Design for Learning Guidelines encourage giving learners more than one way to take in information and show what they know. For Dec, a larger diagram is a practice option to test. It is not a diagnosis, and it does not change an official test. Ask Dec what helped, and check that he can still explain the circuit.

An evaluation is a school's formal process for learning about a student's needs, using more than one measure. Under IDEA, a federal law, a public school must use varied tools in an evaluation. No single measure can be the only basis for deciding eligibility. Eligibility is meeting the requirements for a particular service or program. A study session is not an evaluation, so Dec decides whether to ask his school how that process starts.

Professional standards

Real sourceCouncil for Exceptional Children (CEC)

CEC Ethical Principles and Practice Standards: Special Education Standards for Professional Practice: Teaching and Assessment

“Use culturally and linguistically appropriate assessment procedures that accurately measure what is intended to be measured”

In plain words: Special educators who follow CEC's standards use assessments that measure the skill the task is meant to measure.

Question: The goal is explaining a circuit. Which parts of the sheet test something else, like reading six dense paragraphs?

27
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

The part that tests something else is ___.

The six long paragraphs test reading. The small diagram makes the circuit hard to see.

In the news

Real sourceEducation WeekOctober 13, 2025

Does Extended Time on Tests Actually Help Students With ADHD?

Asks the case’s question in real life: does a test accommodation help students show what they actually know?

Real sourceK-12 DiveDecember 3, 2025

IDEA at 50: How the landmark law changed education

Explains where IDEA, evaluations and IEPs came from and why schools must plan around each student’s needs.

Notes

28
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownRead each decision in the diagram. Write who decides it in each blank box. About 8 minutes.

Sort who can decide each question. Which decision belongs to the teacher, which to a formal school process, and which only to Dec?

Try a clearer practice format for the circuit goal

Who decides

The teacher, who sets the practice format and the learning goal

Under which rule
Who lives with it

Dec, who decides what to share and whether to ask

Your way in

Start a formal IDEA evaluation or a Section 504 conversation

Who decides

The school’s evaluation process, with a parent or guardian for a student under 18

Under which rule

IDEA evaluation rule: varied tools, no single measure as the sole basis

Who lives with it
Your way in
A counselor or special-education coordinator explains how a request starts
29
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

Ms. R’s view is missing. I would ask her what the six paragraphs are for.

Notes

30
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what the crew should try and explain why. Then fix the two marked lines. About 8 minutes.

What should the crew try at the study table?

  • A Run the same timed sheet again so Dec gets more practice.

  • B Let Dec explain with a larger diagram, then compare his reasoning with the sheet.

  • C Tell Dec he probably needs an IEP.

Why I chose it

B. It keeps the same goal and lets Dec show what he knows. A repeats the problem, and C guesses at a diagnosis.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Hi Ms. R, Dec failed the circuit sheet again and we think the test is unfair to him. He obviously knows the material because he explained it to us perfectly. At the study table he went through the whole thing out loud with no mistakes. 1 We think he might have a learning disability and should get an IEP so he can get extra time. My cousin has one and it helped her a lot. 2 Can you give him an easier version? We really think this would help him pass. Thanks, Anika and Mari.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

When we used a bigger diagram, Dec explained the whole circuit out loud.

Rewrite phrase 2

Could Dec try the same questions with a bigger diagram?
31
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Redesign Dec’s practice sheet so it still checks circuit understanding, then explain your changes to a partner.

Use: The practice brief and Dec’s study-table notes; the legal rule is summarized by the educator.

You’ll make: Annotated sketch plus 3–5 sentence explanation

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Find the goal line in Evidence A. Say it in your own words.
  2. List two parts of the sheet that got in Dec’s way.
  3. Sketch a new sheet with a bigger diagram and numbered steps.
  4. Label two changes on your sketch.
  5. Write three to five sentences in the Your draft box that explain your changes.
  6. Check that your sheet still asks for an explanation of how the circuit works.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–5 sentences with the frame “The goal is __. I changed __ so that __.”
  • Say it: Explain your redesigned sheet to a partner in one minute: the goal, two changes and why the goal stays the same.
  • Show it: Sketch the new practice sheet with a larger diagram and numbered steps, and label your two changes.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

32
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

The learning goal, in my words

The goal is ___.

The goal is to explain how a simple circuit works.

What got in the way: 1

Six dense paragraphs to read first.

What got in the way: 2

One small diagram that is hard to follow.

Change 1 on my sketch

A bigger diagram of the circuit.

Change 2 on my sketch

Numbered steps, one at a time.

Your draft

Your explanation

The goal is ___. I changed ___ so that ___.

The goal is to explain how a simple circuit works. I changed the small diagram to a bigger one so that the path of the current is easy to see. I changed the six paragraphs to numbered steps so that Dec can keep his place. The questions still ask him to explain the circuit, so the goal stays the same.
33
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 6 minutes.

  • Does your explanation name the learning goal?

    YesNo
  • Did you make at least two changes to the format?

    YesNo
  • Does your new sheet still ask how the circuit works?

    YesNo
  • Did you leave out any guess about a diagnosis?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceMentions only the score.Describes Dec’s explanation vaguely.Cites the goal and two specific observations.Uses observations and notes what they cannot show.
ReasoningConcludes Dec has a disability or the test is illegal.Suggests easier content without linking to the goal.Connects a possible format barrier to the learning goal.Distinguishes classroom support from IDEA evaluation accurately.
Audience & purposeMessage speaks for Dec without his input.Mentions Dec but ignores his voice.Written in Dec’s voice with his permission.Respects Dec’s control and gives the teacher a clear next step.
34
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

How your work is scored, continued

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
RevisionNo change.Removes one problem line.Replaces the diagnosis with an observation.Explains how each change protects Dec’s privacy and agency.

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I added “the goal stays the same” because my partner asked if my sheet was just easier.

Notes

35
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then finish My take. About 8 minutes.

1 Is the practice sheet checking circuit understanding, reading speed or both?

It is meant to check circuits. But the six long paragraphs also test reading, even though no time limit is listed.

2 How would you know a new format shows Dec’s learning more clearly instead of giving away the answer?

If Dec still has to explain how the current travels, the new sheet is not giving him the answer.

My take

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should try a bigger diagram because Dec could explain the circuit that way.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The study-table notes changed my first guess. Dec traced the whole circuit out loud.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is what the six paragraphs are supposed to test.
36
Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 2: Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?

In this case, a student can explain a light circuit out loud but gets lost on a crowded worksheet. Your student compared the worksheet’s goal with notes from a study session and thought about what the worksheet really measures.

Questions to talk about

  1. Can one test show everything a person knows? Why or why not?
  2. What makes the directions on a worksheet or a form easy to follow?
  3. Who at a school can students ask about help with schoolwork?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

37

Lesson 3Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?

Content note

The recap caption blames younger attendees for a late start. Keep the discussion on the event in the story, and do not ask students to describe times they were blamed or stereotyped.

Overview

Students read a short story in which the crew’s recap caption blames “the younger crowd” for a late start. They build a timeline from Jordy’s setup log, which shows that a projector failure caused the delay, and compare it with Gia’s first apology draft. They then write a correction that names the error and a repair step with an owner and a way to check it.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a time or a fact in a short record
  • tell a feeling from a fact
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • name the wrong claim in the caption
  • replace it with what the setup log shows
  • name one change the crew will make
  • tell the difference between saying sorry and correcting a claim

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A, B, C and D on half-pages, one set per pair
  • The four-line template, written on the board

The task in this edition

Task: Fix Gia’s apology using a four-line template, then read it aloud as Anika would hear it.

Students make: Four-sentence correction

Pacing

Opener (page 38): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud. Skip the opening question.

Key terms (pages 39 and 40): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 43): 10 min. Short on time: 8 min. Students fill in only the “What it shows” boxes.

Look at the evidence (page 44): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read Anika’s message and Gia’s draft aloud. Skip the boxes.

Key idea (pages 45 and 46): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the second paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 47): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Pacing, continued

Practice (page 48): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Vote on the options. Skip the draft fixes.

Your task (pages 49 and 50): 15 min. Short on time: 13 min. Fill in the planner together. Students write the correction on their own.

Check your work (pages 51 and 52): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Check corrections against the success criteria yourself.

Questions to discuss (page 53): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Use question 1 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 54): at home.

Periods: full chapter 79 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

RI.6.8 Follow an argument in a text and tell which claims are backed by reasons and evidence and which are not.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.1.b Support a claim with clear reasons and relevant evidence from credible sources.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

Plan 3

Lesson 3Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 3 plan, continued

Standards, continued

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

RI.7.8 Trace an argument in a text and judge whether its reasons and evidence are sound and sufficient.

RI.7.9 Analyze how two authors writing on the same topic present key information differently through the evidence or interpretations they choose.

W.7.1.a State your claim, recognize opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order.

W.7.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

Standards, continued

RI.8.8 Break down an argument, judge whether its reasoning and evidence hold up and spot evidence that does not belong.

RI.8.9 Find where two texts on the same topic disagree, on facts or on interpretation.

W.8.1.a State your claim, show how it differs from opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order.

W.8.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources.

W.8.1.c Use words and phrases that show how claims, counterclaims, reasons and evidence connect.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.7.6-8 Apply civic virtues and democratic principles at school and in the community. In this case: Students apply civic virtues like honesty and fairness to a group’s public post.

Codes of ethics

  • PRSA Code of Ethics: Free Flow of Information

Codes of ethics, continued

  • RTDNA Code of Ethics: Independence and transparency
  • Credo for Ethical Communication: “We accept responsibility for the short- and long-term consequences of our own communication…” (one of nine unnumbered principles)

Heat map

Opener (page 38): Medium

Key terms (pages 39 and 40): Low

Look at the evidence (page 43): Low

Look at the evidence (page 44): Low

Key idea (pages 45 and 46): Low

Sort the evidence (page 47): Medium

Practice (page 48): Low

Check your work (pages 51 and 52): Low

Try it at your school

Help a club you’re in write a corrections rule.

  • Ask the editor or advisor of a school newsletter, club account or yearbook how they fix mistakes
  • Suggest a three-step checklist: name the error, show the evidence, say what changes
  • Offer to test it on an old post together
  • Keep any real examples anonymous
Plan 3b

Lesson 3Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 3 plan, continued

Try it at your school, continued

Who to ask: School newspaper or yearbook advisor, club advisor, student council secretary

Safety: Don’t repost someone else’s mistake to criticize them. Talk to the club privately first.

Sources

  • Public Relations Society of America (PRSA), “PRSA Code of Ethics,” October 2000
  • Society of Professional Journalists, “SPJ Code of Ethics,” September 6, 2014
  • Critical Media Project, “Zootopia: the press conference,” No date listed
Plan 3c
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?

The crew’s recap caption blamed younger neighbors for a late start, but the event log shows the projector failed.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline the caption and the time the projector failed. About 6 minutes.

Your role: You’re the one who checks the log’s times before the correction goes up. New skill: Correct a public mistake.

Gia and Jordy sit at a table with a laptop and a printed page.

What happened

It is Sunday at the edit desk. Caio, 24, edited a short recap of Friday’s screening. The crew posted it on Saturday morning. Gia’s caption, “Great night, once the younger crowd finally got organized,” sounded believable, because a few people did arrive late.

Then Jordy checks the setup log. The projector failed at 5:40 p.m. The replacement was not running until 6:20, twenty minutes after everyone was seated. The log also says Anika and Dec helped carry chairs before the doors opened.

Anika sends the group a voice note asking why she and Dec are the problem in the post. Gia wants to take responsibility. Her first draft of a correction is mostly about how bad she feels, and the recap caption is still up.

Your question: What should the correction say, and what will the crew do differently next time?

38
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 5 minutes.

Claim A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.

En español: afirmación

In this case: The caption claims the late start happened because “the younger crowd” was not organized. Jordy’s setup log checks that claim.

Correction A correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information.

En español: corrección

In this case: Gia edits the original caption, not just her story, so people who saw it learn what was wrong.

Accountability Accountability is owning a mistake and doing what you said you would do to fix it.

En español: rendición de cuentas

In this case: The crew names who fixes the caption, who contacts Anika and Dec, and who checks the next recap against the log.

Who is involved

Gia

Wrote the recap caption

“I wrote ‘once the younger crowd finally got organized.’ A few people did come in late, so it felt true. I never checked why we started late.”

Jordy

Kept the setup log on Friday

“My log says Anika and Dec were carrying chairs before doors opened. The caption turned them into the reason we started late.”

39
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, what should Gia’s correction say first?

I think the correction should start with ___ because ___.

I think the correction should start with sorry because Gia feels bad.

Notes

40
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

The caption that blamed the wrong people

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • Claim: A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.
  • Correction: A correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information.
  • Accountability: Accountability is owning a mistake and doing what you said you would do to fix it.

The story: A recap goes up

Remember the screening you helped save in Lesson 1? It happened. On Saturday morning, the crew posted a short recap video that Caio edited. Gia wrote the caption: “Great night, once the younger crowd finally got organized.”

The caption sounded believable. A few people did arrive late. But on Sunday, Jordy opens the setup log from Friday night. It says the projector failed at 5:40 p.m. Everyone was seated at 6:00. The replacement projector was not connected until 6:20. The log also says Anika and Dec helped carry chairs before the doors opened.

Then Anika sends the crew a voice note. “We were helping you set up. Why are we the problem in this post?”

Gia wrote the caption, and she wants to fix it. Her first draft says, “Sorry if this came across wrong. We love our younger neighbors and would never want anyone to feel excluded.” It is kind. It also never mentions the projector.

Stop and think. The caption felt true to Gia because a few people came in late. Why was that not enough evidence?

From sorry to a real fix

You met the word claim in Lesson 1. A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence. The caption claimed the younger crowd caused the late start. Jordy’s log is the original source, and it shows a broken projector instead.

41
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

From sorry to a real fix, continued

A correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information. It should appear where people saw the mistake. So the crew edits the recap caption itself. Caio says it simply: they fix the same post instead of burying it under a new one.

Accountability is owning a mistake and doing what you said you would do to fix it. That means naming who does each job. Gia corrects the caption. Caio keeps a visible correction note with the video. Jordy adds a source check before the crew posts again. Anika and Dec do not have to do any of the repair work.

How will the crew know the fix worked? Jordy has an idea. Ask a few people who saw the first post why the screening started late. If they still say “the younger crowd,” the correction did not land.

Stop and think. What does a correction need that Gia’s first draft is missing?

What research says about apologies

Researchers have studied what makes an apology work. A 2016 study found that two parts matter most: taking responsibility and offering to repair the harm (The Ohio State University News, April 12, 2016). Gia’s first draft does neither.

Real newsrooms correct mistakes too. NPR’s public editor explains how the network names an error and fixes it on the story. NPR also keeps a public list of corrections (NPR, October 21, 2022). Your job in this case is to check the log’s times before the correction goes up.

Stop and think. How could the crew check that readers now understand why the screening started late?

Sources

Real sourceThe Ohio State University NewsApril 12, 2016

The 6 elements of an effective apology, according to science

Real sourceNPR Public EditorOctober 21, 2022

That was wrong

42
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 10 minutes.

Evidence ARecap caption, posted Saturday 11:08 a.m.

The caption

Great night, once the younger crowd finally got organized.

Look closely: Which group does this caption ask readers to blame, and on what evidence?

What it shows

The caption blames younger people for the slow start.

One question I still have

What really made the screening start late?

Evidence BSetup log, Friday evening

Jordy’s event log

5:40 p.m. Projector failure reported. 6:00 p.m. Attendees seated. 6:20 p.m. Replacement projector connected. Note: Anika and Dec helped carry chairs before doors opened.

Look closely: What happened at 5:40 that the caption never mentions?

What it shows

The projector broke at 5:40, and the new one worked at 6:20.

One question I still have

Did any latecomers slow down the start?
43
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CVoice note to the crew

Anika’s message

“We were helping you set up. Why are we the problem in this post?”

Look closely: What fact does Anika add, and what is she asking the crew?

What it shows

Anika was helping set up, and the post made her look like the problem.

One question I still have

What does Anika want the crew to do now?

Evidence DDraft correction, Saturday 2:15 p.m., not posted

Gia’s first correction

Sorry if this came across wrong. We love our younger neighbors and would never want anyone to feel excluded.

Look closely: What fact does this correct? Who does the word “if” put the problem on?

What it shows

Gia wants to say sorry and cares about younger neighbors.

One question I still have

Why doesn’t the draft mention the projector?

What is still missing from the evidence?

What each attendee actually experienced, whether any latecomers affected the start at all, how far the recap was reshared, and whether Anika wants any public response.
44
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: corrections

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics. Then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

Gia’s caption did two jobs at once. It explained the late start, and it blamed a group of people for it. A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence. Jordy’s setup log checks the caption’s claim and shows a projector failure instead.

A correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information. It should appear where people saw the mistake, so the crew should edit the recap caption itself. A 2016 study of apologies found that taking responsibility and offering to repair the harm mattered most. Gia’s first draft talks about loving younger neighbors, and it does neither.

Accountability is owning a mistake and doing what you said you would do to fix it. That means naming who corrects the caption, who contacts the people it blamed and who checks the next recap. Anika does not have to comfort Gia or approve the correction in public. The crew can offer her a private way to respond.

Professional standards

Real sourcePublic Relations Society of America (PRSA)

PRSA Code of Ethics: Free Flow of Information

“Act promptly to correct erroneous communications for which the practitioner is responsible.”

In plain words: Public relations professionals who belong to PRSA agree to fix their own mistakes quickly.

Question: The recap caption went up Saturday at 11:08 a.m. What should the crew change first, and where?

Your answer

First, the crew should change ___ in ___.

First, the crew should change the caption in the same post, because people saw the mistake there.
45
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceNPR Public EditorOctober 21, 2022

That was wrong

How a real newsroom corrects mistakes: name the error, fix it on the story and keep a public list.

Real sourceNPROctober 8, 2017

Dove Expresses 'Regret' For Racially Insensitive Ad

A real brand apology after an ad played into a racial stereotype; compare the words with what changed afterward.

Notes

46
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownCompare the four accounts. Mark where they agree, where they differ and which one was written at the time. About 8 minutes.

Place the four accounts side by side. Where do they agree, where do they split, and which one was written down at the time?

Account 1

Caption: the night went well once the younger crowd got organized.

Account 2

Event log: projector failed at 5:40; replacement connected at 6:20; Anika and Dec carried chairs.

Account 3

Anika: “We were helping you set up.”

Where they agree

The screening started late.

Where they differ

What caused the delay: a group’s behavior or an equipment failure?

Check: Which account was recorded at the time rather than remembered afterward?

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

Dec’s view is missing. I would ask him if the correction should mention him.
47
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what goes first in the correction and explain why. Then fix the two marked lines. About 8 minutes.

What should go first in the correction?

  • A An explanation of how bad Gia feels about the caption.

  • B The wrong claim, and what the event log shows.

  • C Delete the post and stay quiet.

Why I chose it

B. It fixes the wrong claim and says what the log shows. A is about Gia’s feelings, and C leaves the mistake uncorrected.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

We want to apologize for our last post. We didn’t mean to offend anyone and we love having younger people at our events. It was a really stressful night and 1 things were hectic so we said something we shouldn’t have. Honestly we were all tired and trying to get everything set up on time, and it’s been a lot. We are sorry if anyone was hurt. 2 We promise it won’t happen again and we hope everyone keeps coming! Thank you all for your support and understanding, it means a lot to us.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

The projector broke at 5:40, so we started late.

Rewrite phrase 2

Jordy will check the log before we post.
48
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Fix Gia’s apology using a four-line template, then read it aloud as Anika would hear it.

Use: The caption, the event log and Gia’s first draft.

You’ll make: Four-sentence correction

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Find the claim in Evidence A. What did it say caused the delay?
  2. Check the log in Evidence B. Write what happened at 5:40 and at 6:20.
  3. Choose one change the crew will make next time.
  4. Write a four-sentence correction with the template in the Your draft box.
  5. Read your correction aloud as Anika would hear it.
  6. Cross out any sentence that is only about how sorry Gia feels.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Fill in the template: “We said __. The record shows __. We changed __. Next time __ will __.”
  • Say it: Read your correction aloud as Anika would hear it, then say which line she needed most and why.
  • Show it: Make a three-box comic strip: the caption, the log entry that challenges it and the fixed caption posted in the same place.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

49
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

The wrong claim

The younger crowd made the screening start late.

What happened at 5:40

The projector failed.

What happened at 6:20

The new projector was connected.

One change the crew will make

Jordy will check the log before the crew posts a recap.

Your draft

Your correction

We said ___. The record shows ___. We changed ___. Next time ___ will ___.

We said the younger crowd made the screening start late. The record shows the projector failed at 5:40, and the new one was connected at 6:20. We changed the caption in the same post. Next time Jordy will check the log before we post.
50
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your correction name the wrong claim?

    YesNo
  • Does it say what the log shows?

    YesNo
  • Does it name one change?

    YesNo
  • Did you leave out how sorry Gia feels?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo evidence about the delay.Mentions “technical issues” vaguely.Cites the projector failure from the log.Cites specific times and corrects who actually helped.
ReasoningApologizes for feelings only.Admits error but not what it was.Names the inaccurate claim and replaces it.Explains why the claim harmed a group and how the repair prevents a repeat.
Audience & purposeDoes not consider who saw the post.Speaks to readers in general.Reaches the people who were blamed.Reaches the original audience and the blamed group through appropriate channels.
51
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

How your work is scored, continued

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
RevisionNo change.Softens tone only.Adds facts and a repair.Adds facts, an owner, a check and removes shifting of blame.

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I cut “we feel terrible” because it did not fix the claim.

Notes

52
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then finish My take. About 8 minutes.

1 The caption felt true to Gia because a few people came in late. Why was that not enough evidence?

Some people coming late does not show they caused the delay. The log shows the projector broke.

2 What evidence would show that the repair happened?

The caption is fixed, and people who saw it know about the projector.

My take

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should fix the caption because the log shows the projector broke.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The setup log changed my first guess. It shows the projector failed at 5:40.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is whether Anika wants the crew to post anything else.
53
Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 3: What should a group do after a public mistake?

In this case, a group of friends posts a caption that wrongly blames younger neighbors for a late start. Your student compared the caption with an event log and wrote a correction and a plan to repair the harm.

Questions to talk about

  1. What makes an apology feel complete?
  2. Where should a correction appear so the people who saw a mistake will see it?
  3. How can a group check a claim before it posts about an event?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

54

Lesson 4Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?

Overview

Students read a short story about the Common Room, where a nonprofit board is considering paid evening rentals. The rentals would help close a $200 weekly budget gap. Students read the board agenda, a budget note and listening notes from evening users, then map who might miss the meeting. They write a note or a spoken comment with a budget question and an access question.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • read a short list of numbers
  • tell a proposal from a decision
  • write a polite question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • name the nonprofit board as the decision-maker
  • work out the $200 weekly gap from the budget note
  • map who uses the room and who might miss the meeting
  • ask the board one budget question and one access question

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student

Materials, continued

  • A calculator and the worked example: $600 − $400 = $200
  • The people-map organizer, with two people filled in

The task in this edition

Task: Make a people map of who uses the room, then write a short note to the board asking one budget question and one access question.

Students make: People map plus a 4–6 sentence note

Pacing

Opener (page 55): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud. Skip the opening question.

Key terms (pages 56 and 57): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 60): 10 min. Short on time: 9 min. Work the budget example together. Students fill in only the “What it shows” boxes.

Look at the evidence (page 61): 5 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read the listening notes aloud.

Key idea (pages 62 and 63): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Pacing, continued

Sort the evidence (page 64): 8 min. Short on time: 4 min. Do the Option B row together and stop.

Practice (page 65): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Your task (pages 66 and 67): 15 min. Short on time: 13 min. Fill in two people on the people map before class.

Check your work (pages 68 and 69): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Check notes against the success criteria yourself.

Questions to discuss (page 70): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Use question 2 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 71): at home.

Periods: full chapter 76 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

RI.6.7 Combine information from words, images and numbers to build a clear understanding of a topic.

RI.6.8 Follow an argument in a text and tell which claims are backed by reasons and evidence and which are not.

W.6.1.a Open with your claim, then lay out the reasons and evidence in a clear order.

Plan 4

Lesson 4Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 4 plan, continued

Standards, continued

W.6.1.b Support a claim with clear reasons and relevant evidence from credible sources.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

RI.7.8 Trace an argument in a text and judge whether its reasons and evidence are sound and sufficient.

RI.7.9 Analyze how two authors writing on the same topic present key information differently through the evidence or interpretations they choose.

W.7.1.a State your claim, recognize opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order.

W.7.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

Standards, continued

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

RI.8.8 Break down an argument, judge whether its reasoning and evidence hold up and spot evidence that does not belong.

W.8.1.a State your claim, show how it differs from opposing claims and put the reasons and evidence in a logical order.

W.8.1.b Support a claim with logical reasoning and relevant evidence from accurate, credible sources.

W.8.1.c Use words and phrases that show how claims, counterclaims, reasons and evidence connect.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.6.6-8 Describe how political, civil and economic organizations shape people’s lives. In this case: Students describe how a civil-society organization (the nonprofit) shapes neighbors’ lives.

Standards, continued

D4.8.6-8 Use deliberative and democratic procedures to make decisions and act at school and in the community. In this case: Students apply democratic procedures by preparing a comment for the board.

Codes of ethics

  • ASPA Code of Ethics: 5. Fully Inform and Advise.
  • ASPA Code of Ethics: 3. Promote democratic participation.
  • ALA Code of Ethics: Principle 1 (of 9)

Heat map

Opener (page 55): Low

Key terms (pages 56 and 57): Low

Look at the evidence (page 60): Low

Look at the evidence (page 61): Low

Key idea (pages 62 and 63): Low

Sort the evidence (page 64): Medium

Practice (page 65): Low

Check your work (pages 68 and 69): Low

Try it at your school

Find the room where your community’s decisions happen.

Plan 4b

Lesson 4Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 4 plan, continued

Try it at your school, continued

  • With a trusted adult, look up an upcoming library board, school committee or rec-center meeting agenda
  • Identify which body decides and whether the item is for discussion or a vote
  • Write one question about who uses the space and when
  • Check whether written comments are accepted if you can’t attend

Who to ask: Library staff, a rec-center manager, the school board clerk or a student council advisor

Safety: Go to public meetings with a trusted adult. Check whether comments and names become part of the public record before submitting.

Sources

  • New York City Council, “NYC Council, Library Leaders, and New Yorkers Celebrate Library Budget Restorations to Restore Full Service, as Branches Reopen and Reinstate Services on Sunday for First Time in Months,” July 14, 2024
  • NYC Mayor’s Office, “Mayor Adams Celebrates $58.3 Million Investment in City’s Three Library Systems,” July 1, 2024
  • NY1, “Public libraries over the next two weeks to begin closing on Sundays,” November 17, 2023

Sources, continued

  • PIX11 News, “Last Sunday service held at Brooklyn Public Library,” December 17, 2023
  • Carol Bacchi, “What’s the problem represented to be?,” No date listed
  • NYC.gov, Brooklyn Community Board 13, “About community boards,” No date listed
  • Design Council, “The Double Diamond,” No date listed
Plan 4c
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?

The Common Room’s board is weighing paid rentals on two free evenings, so the crew prepares a comment before the meeting.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline who decides and what the board is considering. About 6 minutes.

Your role: You’re the one who checks the budget figures before the crew speaks to the board. New skill: Weigh the trade-offs of each option.

Mari shows Sami a printed schedule.

What happened

It is the Friday after the crew’s first screening, and the board meeting is coming up. A small neighborhood nonprofit runs the Common Room alongside the bookshop. The nonprofit’s board is considering paid rentals on two evenings a week to help cover staffing. No vote has happened yet.

Mari, 19, works the bookshop counter and closes the shop. She knows that “just keep it free” does not pay the evening staff. Sami runs a print workshop in the room after her afternoon shift. It is one of the few step-free rooms nearby.

Caio, 24, runs the crew’s Tuesday film night. Tuesday is one of the evenings Option B would rent out. Mateo already has a headline for a petition. The crew agrees the room matters, but they do not agree on the best schedule.

Your question: Which option should the crew support, and what should they ask the board?

55
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 5 minutes.

Proposal A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet.

En español: propuesta

In this case: Option B is a proposal on the board’s agenda. No vote has been taken, so it is not a decision yet.

Trade-off A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up.

En español: compensación entre opciones

In this case: Paid rentals help close the $200 weekly gap but take away free evenings Sami and Dec use.

Decision-maker A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice.

En español: quien toma la decisión

In this case: The nonprofit board decides, not a city community board and not the crew.

Who is involved

Mari

Closes the bookshop, then stays for zine night

“I’m the one they pay to lock up, and I’m also one of the people using this room after. I can’t pretend either half away.”

Sami

Runs a print workshop in the room

“We keep deciding what the evening people need. Has anyone asked them yet?”

56
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, what do you think the crew should ask the board for?

I think the crew should ask for ___ because ___.

I think the crew should ask to keep the nights free because the room matters to them.

Notes

57
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Two free evenings and a $200 gap

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • Proposal: A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet.
  • Trade-off: A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up.
  • Decision-maker: A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice.
  • Framing: Framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward.

The story: The room might change

The Common Room is more than a screening space. A small neighborhood nonprofit runs it alongside the bookshop. Now the nonprofit’s board is thinking about renting the room to paying groups on two evenings a week. The money would help pay the evening staff. No vote has happened yet.

The crew cares about the room, but each friend sees the plan differently. Mateo already has a petition headline. Mari works the bookshop counter and closes the shop at night. “Free nights matter,” she writes. “So does paying whoever stays to lock up. That’s me.” Sami runs a print workshop in the room after her afternoon shift. It is one of the few step-free rooms nearby. She asks a question nobody has answered: “Has anyone asked the evening regulars?”

Stop and think. Why might Mari see both sides of this plan more clearly than Mateo?

Reading the options

In Lesson 1, you learned to find the original source. Here, that means reading the board’s agenda instead of a petition headline. The agenda lists three options. Option A keeps the free evenings, but the money gap stays. Option B replaces the free Tuesday and Thursday evenings with paid rentals. Option C tests one rental evening for six weeks while the board looks for more funding.

Each option is a proposal. A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet. Each one is also a trade-off. A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up.

58
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading the options, continued

The budget note gives the numbers. Evening staffing and utilities cost $600 a week. Grants and donations bring in $400. That leaves a $200 gap. Each rental is expected to add $120. Two rentals would cover the gap if people book them. One rental would leave $80 still missing. Your job is to check these figures before the crew speaks to the board.

Lesson 1 taught you that framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward. Option B frames the $200 gap as the problem. It brings forward the money. It leaves out who loses those evenings.

Stop and think. What does Option B cost, and who pays that cost?

Who gets a say in real life

A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice. Here, it is the nonprofit’s board. In New York City, the decision-maker for library hours was the city. Budget cuts ended Sunday hours at library branches in 2023, and Brooklyn’s last Sunday was December 17, 2023 (NY1, November 17, 2023). In 2024, the city restored the money, and Sunday service returned (NYC Mayor’s Office, July 1, 2024). Council members thanked New Yorkers who called and wrote (New York City Council, July 14, 2024).

Stop and think. How is the Common Room’s board different from the city government that restored library Sundays?

Sources

Real sourceNY1November 17, 2023

Public libraries over the next two weeks to begin closing on Sundays

Real sourceNYC Mayor’s OfficeJuly 1, 2024

Mayor Adams Celebrates $58.3 Million Investment in City’s Three Library Systems

Real sourceNew York City CouncilJuly 14, 2024

NYC Council, Library Leaders, and New Yorkers Celebrate Library Budget Restorations to Restore Full Service, as Branches Reopen and Reinstate Services on Sunday for First Time in Months

59
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 10 minutes.

Evidence ABoard agenda, Wednesday 6:30 p.m. meeting

The proposal

Evening rentals, for discussion. Option A: keep the current free evenings; the funding gap remains. Option B: replace Tuesday and Thursday evenings with paid rentals. Option C: pilot one rental evening for six weeks while seeking additional funding. No vote has been taken.

Look closely: Is this a vote or a discussion? Which words tell you?

What it shows

The board is talking about three options and has not voted.

One question I still have

Who uses the room on Tuesday and Thursday nights?

Evidence BWeekly budget note for the board

The budget note

Evening staffing and utilities: $600. Current grants and donations: $400. Each paid rental is projected to add $120 after its extra costs. Two bookings would add $240; one would add $120. Demand is uncertain.

Look closely: Which number is a guess, and what could change it?

What it shows

The room costs $600 a week and gets $400. That leaves $200.

One question I still have

What if fewer people book the room?
60
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CListening notes from evening users

The missing voices

Sami works afternoons. Dec rehearses on Thursdays. Mari closes the shop. A nearby resident worries about late noise. The proposed meeting time overlaps with several shifts.

Look closely: Whose voice is missing from these four notes?

What it shows

Four people need the room at different times.

One question I still have

Who else uses the room but was not asked?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know who uses the room on other nights, or if the $120 guess is right.

Notes

61
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: trade-offs

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics. Then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

The board is weighing a proposal about the free evenings. A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet. Option B would help close the $200 weekly gap, but it would end the free Tuesday and Thursday evenings. A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up. Every option on the agenda has one, including the one you prefer.

Carol Bacchi’s policy-analysis approach asks what a proposed solution assumes the problem is. Option B treats the $200 gap as the problem and two free evenings as the price. That leaves two questions open: who loses those evenings, and what happens if bookings come in lower than projected? Ask the same questions about your own favorite option.

A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice. Here, the nonprofit’s board controls its own schedule. A community board or a city agency would follow other rules. A strong comment names the proposal, explains one effect with evidence and asks for a decision the board can make. The board can still choose an option the crew did not ask for.

Professional standards

Real sourceAmerican Society for Public Administration (ASPA)

ASPA Code of Ethics: 5. Fully Inform and Advise

“Provide accurate, honest, comprehensive, and timely information and advice to elected and appointed officials and governing board members”

In plain words: ASPA members agree to give decision-makers, such as board members, accurate and complete information.

Question: The budget note projects $120 more per rental. What should it also tell the board about how certain that is?

Your answer

The note should also tell the board ___.

The note should also tell the board that $120 is a guess and bookings might not come.
62
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceEducation WeekFebruary 6, 2023

Letting Students Decide Where Money Should Go: How One District Did It

A real district let students propose and vote on how shared school spaces and money would change.

Real sourceFirst Alert 4 (KMOV)June 4, 2026

St. Louis shuts down streets to cars, hands them over to neighbors

A city pilot that changes a shared space for a trial run, so neighbors can test trade-offs before anything is permanent.

Notes

63
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownFollow each option to its consequences. Mark the consequences that depend on a projection. About 8 minutes.

Follow each option to its consequences. Which consequences depend on a projection, and who carries the cost if it misses?

Option B: paid rentals replace Tuesday and Thursday evenings

  1. A projected $240 would cover the $200 gap if both evenings book

    Who is affected

    Check: What happens if bookings fall short of the projection?

  2. Dec loses Thursday rehearsals and Mari’s late evenings stop being usable

    Who is affected

    Evening users, including people who cannot attend the meeting

Option C: one rental evening piloted for six weeks

  1. A projected $80 gap remains while the board seeks funding and reviews the pilot

    Who is affected

    Check: What happens if bookings fall short of the projection?

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The nearby resident’s view is missing. I would ask what time is too late for noise.
64
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what the crew should ask for first and explain why. Then fix the two marked lines. About 6 minutes.

What should the crew ask the board for first?

  • A Post that the board is taking away the free nights.

  • B Ask for the budget assumptions, who uses each evening and a way to comment without attending.

  • C Support whichever option brings in the most money.

Why I chose it

B. It asks for facts the board can give. A says the board already decided, and C ignores who loses the room.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

1 The board should not take away our free nights. The Common Room is important to the community and a lot of people use it. I have been coming here for movie nights since it opened and it’s one of the only places we can all hang out without paying. Renting it out just shows 2 the board cares more about money than people. Sami and Dec would lose their spot and that is not fair. Please keep it free for everyone. Thank you for listening.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

The board is thinking about renting our free nights.

Rewrite phrase 2

The board has a $200 gap to fill each week.
65
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Make a people map of who uses the room, then write a short note to the board asking one budget question and one access question.

Use: The agenda and listening notes; the budget note with the $200 example worked out.

You’ll make: People map plus a 4–6 sentence note

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Circle the board on the agenda and underline “No vote has been taken.”
  2. Find the gap: $600 − $400 = $200.
  3. Put each person from the listening notes on the people map.
  4. Mark one person who might miss the meeting.
  5. Write a note of four to six sentences in the Your draft box.
  6. Ask one question about money and one about who can use the room.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 4–6 sentences with the frame “I use the room when __. Could the board explain __?”
  • Say it: Practice a 45-second comment with a partner who plays a board member and asks you one question.
  • Show it: Finish the people map: who uses the room, on which evening, and who might miss the meeting, with a question mark beside each missing voice.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

66
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Who decides

The nonprofit board

The weekly gap

$600 − $400 =

$200

Someone who might miss the meeting

Mari, who closes the shop.

Your draft

Your note to the board

I use the room when ___. Could the board explain ___?

Dear board members, I use the Common Room on weeknights. I know the room has a $200 gap each week. Could the board explain how sure it is that each rental will bring in $120? Could you also tell us who uses the room on Tuesday and Thursday nights? Some people work during the meeting, so could they send written comments? Thank you.
67
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your note name the board as the decision-maker?

    YesNo
  • Does it ask one question about money?

    YesNo
  • Does it ask one question about who can use the room?

    YesNo
  • Does it treat the agenda as a proposal, not a final decision?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo figures or perspectives.Mentions money or people vaguely.Uses one figure and one affected perspective accurately.Uses figures conditionally and names an uncertainty.
ReasoningAssigns bad motives to the board.States a preference without addressing the gap.Recommends an option and addresses the gap.Weighs trade-offs across options and explains the choice.
Audience & purposeSpeaks to the wrong decision-maker.Addresses the board but asks for nothing specific.Makes a request the board can act on.Requests a process that includes people who can’t attend.
RevisionNo change.Tone edits only.Replaces a motive claim with evidence.Adds a figure, a perspective and a follow-up request.
68
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I added a question about written comments because some people work during the meeting.

Notes

69
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then finish My take. About 8 minutes.

1 Mari is paid to close the shop and also uses the room at night. How does that shape what she asks for?

She knows the staff needs to be paid, so she asks for a plan for the money, not just free nights.

2 If the board chooses an option the crew did not support, how should the crew tell the group what happened?

They should say what the board chose and why, without calling the board mean.

My take

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should support the pilot because it keeps one free night.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The budget note changed my first guess. The room has a $200 gap each week.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is who uses the room on other nights.
70
Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 4: Who gets a say when a shared room changes?

In this case, a community room’s board is weighing whether to rent out two free evenings to cover its costs. Your student used a budget note and notes from evening users to write a comment the board could act on.

Questions to talk about

  1. Who decides the hours at a public library or community center?
  2. What should a group know before it asks a board for a change?
  3. How can people give input if they cannot attend a meeting?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

71

Lesson 5Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?

Content note

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read a short story in which Gia’s bank deposit is smaller than she expected after 18 hours of café shifts. They read her pay statement and shift log, label gross pay, FICA, withholding and net pay, and find out why three hours are missing. They then write a private question to payroll about any line they cannot explain.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • multiply a whole number by a dollar amount
  • tell whether one date comes before or after another
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • tell gross pay from net pay on a pay statement
  • name FICA as the Social Security and Medicare lines
  • find the shift that belongs to the next pay period

Objectives, continued

  • write 3 or 4 sentences that explain where Gia’s money went

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A and B on half-pages, one set per pair
  • Calculators and three colored pencils: green, orange and blue

The task in this edition

Task: Label a practice pay statement and explain to a partner where the money went.

Students make: Labeled statement plus 3–4 sentence explanation

Pacing

Opener (page 72): 5 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud and skip the list of guesses.

Key terms (pages 73 and 74): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (pages 77 and 78): 10 min. Short on time: 10 min.

Key idea (pages 79 and 80): 6 min. Short on time: skip. Say in one sentence that FICA funds Social Security and Medicare.

Sort the evidence (page 81): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Do the first row together and stop.

Pacing, continued

Practice (page 82): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Your task (pages 83 and 84): 15 min. Short on time: 15 min.

Check your work (pages 85 and 86): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Students answer the Check your work questions only. Score the rubric yourself.

Questions to discuss (page 87): 8 min. Short on time: 7 min. Use questions 1 and 3 only.

Talk about this case at home (page 88): at home.

Periods: full chapter 69 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

Plan 5

Lesson 5Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 5 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

Standards, continued

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.13.6-8 Analyze the purposes, carrying out and effects of public policies in different settings. In this case: Students analyze the purpose of payroll taxes and their effect on workers.

Codes of ethics

  • PayrollOrg Code of Ethics: Item 2
  • PayrollOrg Code of Ethics: Item 5
  • IABC Code of Ethics for Professional Communicators: “I communicate accurate information”

Heat map

Opener (page 72): Low

Key terms (pages 73 and 74): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 77 and 78): Low

Key idea (pages 79 and 80): Low

Sort the evidence (page 81): Low

Practice (page 82): Medium

Check your work (pages 85 and 86): Low

Try it at your school

Know how to read your first pay statement.

Try it at your school, continued

  • Before a first job, ask how and when you’ll be paid and where to see your pay statement
  • Keep your own log of hours and shifts
  • Look up your state’s minimum wage on its labor department site
  • Bring pay questions to a supervisor or payroll, in writing

Who to ask: School counselor or career office, a work-permit issuing officer if your state uses them, your supervisor or payroll office

Safety: Never post pay statements, Social Security numbers or bank details online. Workers under 18 have limits on hours and jobs; ask a trusted adult to help check them.

Sources

  • Internal Revenue Service, “Understanding Taxes: gross pay and net pay,” No date listed
  • Internal Revenue Service, “Understanding employment taxes,” No date listed
  • Internal Revenue Service, “Tax Withholding Estimator,” No date listed
  • TBS, “Rachel Gets Her First Paycheck from Central Perk,” No date listed
Plan 5b
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?

Gia’s bank deposit is smaller than the pay she worked out, so she reads her pay statement line by line before asking payroll.

On your ownRead What happened and underline the two hour totals that do not match. About 5 minutes.

Gia holds a small card and talks beside a phone on a tripod. Jordy holds Voz, one of the crew’s companions, on an open hand.

Your role: You’re the one who adds up Gia’s hours before she writes to payroll. New skill: Read a pay statement line by line.

What happened

It is Thursday evening, and it is payday for Gia. She works café shifts around her college classes. She checks her bank account and sees a deposit that is smaller than the pay she worked out. Gia keeps a shift log in her notes app. The log says 18 hours, but her pay statement says 15.

Jordy works event shifts, and their deposit looks different too. Jordy’s shifts fall on different dates and hours, so their pay cannot explain Gia’s. Jordy asks Gia to name the line that worries her instead of posting her whole statement.

Gia’s pay statement lists her hours, her hourly rate and four tax lines. She expected the lines for Social Security and Medicare. She does not understand the line for federal income tax. Before she writes to payroll, she wants to know what her own records show.

Your question: Why is Gia’s deposit smaller than her own count, and what should she ask payroll?

72
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Gross pay Gross pay is the money you earn before any taxes or other deductions are taken out.

En español: salario bruto

In this case: Gia’s statement pays 15 hours at $17.00 an hour, so her gross pay is $255.00.

Net pay Net pay is the money left after taxes and other deductions, often called take-home pay.

En español: salario neto

In this case: The $220.99 that reached Gia’s bank account is her net pay, not the amount she earned.

FICA FICA is the federal payroll tax that funds Social Security and Medicare.

En español: FICA (Seguro Social y Medicare)

In this case: On Gia’s statement, FICA appears as two lines: Social Security tax, $15.81, and Medicare tax, $3.70.

Withholding Withholding is money an employer takes out of each paycheck to pay taxes or other costs for the worker.

En español: retención

In this case: Federal income tax withheld, $8.40, is a separate line from FICA. The IRS says its amount depends partly on the W-4.

Who is involved

Gia

Works café shifts and keeps her own shift log

“My notes say 18 hours. The statement says 15. I counted twice, so where did three hours go?”

Jordy

Works event shifts on different dates

“Mine is event work. Different dates, different hours. My deposit can’t tell Gia anything about hers.”

73
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, why do you think Gia’s deposit is smaller than she expected?

I think the deposit is smaller because ___.

I think the deposit is smaller because taxes took some of her pay.

Notes

74
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Where did three hours go?

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • Gross pay: Gross pay is the money you earn before any taxes or other deductions are taken out.
  • Net pay: Net pay is the money left after taxes and other deductions, often called take-home pay.
  • FICA: FICA is the federal payroll tax that funds Social Security and Medicare.
  • Withholding: Withholding is money an employer takes out of each paycheck to pay taxes or other costs for the worker.
  • Claim: A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.

The story: Payday for Gia

It is Thursday evening, and it is payday. Gia works café shifts around her college classes. She opens her bank app and frowns. The deposit is smaller than the pay she worked out.

Gia keeps a shift log in her notes app. It lists five shifts and 18 hours. Her pay statement says 15 hours. “I counted twice,” she says. “So where did three hours go?”

Jordy works event shifts, and their deposit looks different too. But Jordy’s shifts fall on other dates and hours, so their pay cannot explain Gia’s. Jordy asks Gia not to post her whole statement. Just name the line that worries you.

You are sitting next to Gia. Your job is to add up her hours before she writes to payroll.

Stop and think. What is the first thing you would check when a paycheck looks too small?

Reading the statement line by line

Gia thinks payroll shorted her. That is a claim, a word you learned in Lesson 1. A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence. So check the original source: the pay statement.

75
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading the statement line by line, continued

The statement covers the pay period ending Friday the 12th. It lists 15 hours at $17.00 an hour. That makes $255.00. Gross pay is the money you earn before any taxes or other deductions are taken out.

Now look at the log. Four shifts fall on or before Friday the 12th, and they add up to 15 hours. The fifth shift, 3 hours, was on Saturday the 13th. It belongs to the next pay period. Gia still wants payroll to confirm that.

Next come the tax lines. Social Security tax is $15.81 and Medicare tax is $3.70. Together they are FICA, the federal payroll tax that funds Social Security and Medicare. Then comes federal income tax withheld, $8.40, and state and local tax, $6.10. Withholding is money an employer takes out of each paycheck to pay taxes or other costs for the worker. What is left is $220.99. Net pay is the money left after taxes and other deductions, often called take-home pay.

Stop and think. Why does the Saturday shift not appear on this statement?

FICA is not a person

On the TV show Friends, Rachel opens her first paycheck and asks, “Who’s FICA? Why’s he getting all my money?” (TBS, Friends clip, December 14, 2019). The joke works because the money you earn and the money you receive are two different numbers.

The IRS explains that federal income tax withholding depends partly on Form W-4. A worker fills out that form for the employer (Internal Revenue Service, updated May 1, 2026). Gia wonders whether the W-4 she filled out on her first day explains that line. That is a good question to ask payroll.

Stop and think. Which line on Gia’s statement would you ask payroll about, and why?

Sources

Real sourceTBSDecember 14, 2019

Rachel Gets Her First Paycheck from Central Perk

Real sourceInternal Revenue ServiceMay 1, 2026

Understanding employment taxes

76
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead the pay statement and the shift log, and fill in both boxes for each one. About 10 minutes.

Evidence APay statement

Gia’s pay statement

Pay period ending Friday the 12th, paid the following Thursday. Hours: 15.00 at $17.00. Gross pay: $255.00. Social Security tax: $15.81. Medicare tax: $3.70. Federal income tax withheld: $8.40. State and local income tax withheld: $6.10. Net pay: $220.99.

Look closely: Which line shows gross pay? Which two lines together make up FICA?

What it shows

15 hours at $17.00 is $255.00. Four tax lines bring it to $220.99.

One question I still have

How was the federal income tax amount figured?

Evidence BNotes app

Gia’s shift log for the last two weeks

Mon the 8th: 4 hrs. Wed the 10th: 4 hrs. Thu the 11th: 3 hrs. Fri the 12th: 4 hrs. Sat the 13th: 3 hrs. My total: 18 hrs.

Look closely: Which shift falls outside the pay period? Add the hours inside it.

What it shows

Gia worked 18 hours. The Saturday shift is after Friday the 12th.

One question I still have

Will the Saturday hours be on her next statement?
77
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know if the Saturday shift will be on the next statement, or what Gia put on her W-4.

Notes

78
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: gross pay and net pay

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 6 minutes.

A bank deposit shows how much money arrived, but the pay statement shows how the employer figured it. Gross pay is the money you earn before any taxes or other deductions are taken out. For an hourly worker, gross pay is the hours worked times the hourly rate, plus any other earnings. Net pay is the money left after taxes and other deductions, often called take-home pay. Gia’s deposit is her net pay.

Deductions are the lines between those two totals. FICA is the federal payroll tax that funds Social Security and Medicare. On Gia’s statement, FICA appears as two lines: Social Security tax and Medicare tax. Withholding is money an employer takes out of each paycheck to pay taxes or other costs for the worker. Federal income-tax withholding is a separate line from FICA, and the IRS says its amount depends partly on the worker’s Form W-4.

A statement can also list other deductions, such as benefit contributions, so read each line’s name before you decide it is income tax. The federal income tax taken from each paycheck counts toward the tax a worker owes for the whole year. One paycheck cannot show what that yearly total will be. This explanation covers employees in the United States. Self-employed workers follow a different tax process.

Professional standards

Real sourcePayrollOrg

PayrollOrg Code of Ethics: Item 2

“To strive for perfect compliance, accuracy, and timeliness of all payroll activities.”

In plain words: Payroll professionals who belong to PayrollOrg aim to pay people correctly and on time.

Question: Gia worked Saturday the 13th, after the pay period ended. What should payroll confirm about when she gets paid?

79
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

Payroll should confirm ___.

Payroll should confirm that the 3 Saturday hours will be on Gia’s next statement.

In the news

Real sourceTwo Cents, PBS (YouTube)April 10, 2019

How Do Your Tax Dollars Get Spent?

Starts with a first paycheck that’s smaller than expected and explains FICA and income tax withholding.

Real sourceNPR, The Indicator from Planet MoneyJune 6, 2018

Social Insecurity

A short episode on the Social Security part of FICA and why it comes out of nearly every paycheck.

Notes

80
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownCompare each piece of evidence with each claim and write supports, challenges or neither in each box. About 8 minutes.

Before calling it an error, sort the evidence. Which facts explain the smaller deposit, and which question is still worth asking payroll?

EvidenceClaim 1Payroll shorted Gia’s pay.Claim 2The missing 3 hours belong on the next statement.
1 Shift log shows 18 hours; the statement shows 15
Supports
Neither
2 The period ended Friday the 12th; the 3-hour shift was Saturday the 13th
Challenges
Supports
3 Gross pay of $255.00 matches 15 × $17.00
Challenges
Neither
4 FICA and withholding lines account for the gap between gross and net
Challenges
Neither

Still open

  • Will the Saturday shift actually appear next time? Ask payroll.

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

Payroll’s view is missing. I would ask if the Saturday shift will be on the next statement.
81
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what Gia should do first and explain why, then fix the two marked lines. About 6 minutes.

Gia’s deposit is smaller than the pay she worked out. What should she do first?

  • A Compare her deposit with Jordy’s.

  • B Check her hours and the pay period, then read each line of her statement.

  • C Treat the whole gap as taxes and let it go.

Why I chose it

B. Checking the hours, the dates and each line shows what happened. Jordy’s deposit can’t explain Gia’s pay.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Hi, my paycheck is wrong. 1 I worked way more hours than what I got paid for and also a lot of money was taken out for taxes which doesn’t seem right. I’ve been working really hard and picking up extra shifts so this is really frustrating. My friend Jordy works similar hours and got more than me. Can you fix it? 2 My account number is 4471-xxxx if you need it. Please let me know as soon as possible because I have bills. Thanks, Gia

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

My shift log shows 18 hours, but the statement shows 15.

Rewrite phrase 2

I can bring my shift log with the dates if that helps.
82
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Label a practice pay statement and explain to a partner where the money went.

Use: The pay statement and a one-paragraph explanation of FICA.

You’ll make: Labeled statement plus 3–4 sentence explanation

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Mark the earnings line green and each tax line orange on Evidence A.
  2. Check the earnings line by multiplying 15 hours by $17.00.
  3. Circle the net pay in blue. This is the amount in Gia’s deposit.
  4. Find the shift in Evidence B that falls after Friday the 12th.
  5. Write 3 or 4 sentences in the Your draft box that explain where Gia’s money went.
  6. Check your sentences for gross pay, FICA and net pay.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–4 sentences with the frame “Gross pay is __. After __, net pay is __.”
  • Say it: Walk a partner through the statement from top to bottom: what Gia earned, what was taken out and what reached her bank.
  • Show it: Color the statement (earnings green, deductions orange, deposit blue) and draw an arrow from the Saturday shift to the next pay period.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

83
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Gross pay, and how you checked it

Gross pay is ___. I checked it by ___.

Gross pay is $255.00. I checked it by multiplying 15 hours by $17.00.

The two FICA lines

Social Security tax, $15.81, and Medicare tax, $3.70

The shift for the next pay period

Saturday the 13th, 3 hours. It is after Friday the 12th.

Your draft

Your explanation, 3 or 4 sentences

Gross pay is ___. After ___, net pay is ___.

Gross pay is $255.00, which is 15 hours times $17.00. After four tax lines come out, net pay is $220.99. FICA is two of those lines: Social Security and Medicare. Gia’s Saturday shift was after the pay period, so it belongs on her next statement.
84
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Did you find gross pay and net pay?

    YesNo
  • Did you name FICA as Social Security and Medicare?

    YesNo
  • Did you explain one deduction in your own words?

    YesNo
  • Did you use only the practice statement, not real pay information?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo specific numbers.Mentions hours but no period.Names hours, period and the line in question.Cites own records and the statement side by side.
ReasoningAssumes an error or theft.Assumes all difference is tax.Separates hours, deductions and period timing.Explains which differences are expected and which need checking.
Audience & purposeShares private details or demands.Polite but vague.Clear question payroll can answer.Clear, private, and offers the right document.
RevisionNo change.Removes one issue.Adds period and line, removes private data.Explains why each change helps payroll respond.
85
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed my claim that taxes took the rest so it names the four tax lines, because FICA is only two of them.

Notes

86
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete the sentence frames below. About 8 minutes.

1 What would Gia’s statement need to show for the missing hours to be a payroll mistake?

It would need to leave out hours from inside the pay period. The Saturday shift was after it.

2 Why might a new worker think that every missing dollar went to taxes?

Taxes are the lines people hear about most. A new worker might not check the dates.

3 Before a first job, what would you want to know about how and when you will be paid?

I would want to know when payday is, where to see my pay statement and who to ask about it.

My take

I think Gia should ___ because ___.

I think Gia should ask payroll about the Saturday shift because it is not on this statement.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The evidence that changed my first guess is the shift log. The Saturday shift was after the pay period.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is what the federal income tax line is based on.
87
Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 5: Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?

In this case, Gia’s bank deposit is smaller than the pay she expected. Your student read a practice pay statement line by line and explained where the money went.

Questions to talk about

  1. What is the difference between gross pay and net pay?
  2. Why might a bank deposit be less than the hours worked times the hourly rate?
  3. Who at a workplace can answer questions about a pay statement?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

88

Lesson 6Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?

Content note

This case is about private records. No student should share their own grades, forms, records or family finances, so keep the discussion on Rafa’s situation.

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read about Rafa, an 18-year-old in his first year of college whose family wants to help pay tuition and asks for his login. They read an access form, a college FERPA notice and summaries of federal guidance, then sort billing access from access to grades. They then write the question Rafa could send the records office and the smallest access that would help his family.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a detail in a short text and point to it
  • put three events on a timeline in order
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • explain who holds FERPA rights for a student under 18 in K–12

Objectives, continued

  • explain what changes at 18 or when a student starts college
  • apply the rule to a student who starts college at 17
  • write a question for the school office that uses no real records

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A and B on half-pages, one set per pair
  • The FERPA summary on the key idea page, read aloud
  • Colored pencils for the timeline

The task in this edition

Task: Make a “my records, my family” card explaining who holds FERPA rights for a middle-school student and what changes at 18.

Students make: Illustrated card, 4–6 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 89): 5 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud and skip the opening discussion.

Key terms (pages 90 and 91): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Pacing, continued

Look at the evidence (pages 94 and 95): 10 min. Short on time: 8 min. Students fill in the What it shows boxes only.

Key idea (pages 96 and 97): 6 min. Short on time: skip. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud instead.

Sort the evidence (page 98): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 99): 6 min. Short on time: 5 min. Hold the vote and skip Improve a draft.

Your task (pages 100 and 101): 15 min. Short on time: 15 min.

Check your work (pages 102 and 103): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Students answer the Check your work questions only. Score the rubric yourself.

Questions to discuss (pages 104 and 105): 8 min. Short on time: 6 min. Use questions 1 and 3 only.

Talk about this case at home (page 106): at home.

Periods: full chapter 69 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

Plan 6

Lesson 6Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 6 plan, continued

Standards, continued

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

Standards, continued

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.3.6-8 Examine where constitutions, laws and treaties come from, what they are for and what effects they have. In this case: Students examine the purpose of a federal privacy law and how it affects families.

Codes of ethics

  • AACRAO Ethics and Practice: Standards of professional practice
  • AACRAO Ethics and Practice: Principles of professional ethics
  • Credo for Ethical Communication: “We advocate sharing information, opinions, and feelings…” (one of nine unnumbered principles)

Heat map

Opener (page 89): Medium

Heat map, continued

Key terms (pages 90 and 91): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 94 and 95): Low

Key idea (pages 96 and 97): Low

Sort the evidence (page 98): Medium

Practice (page 99): Low

Check your work (pages 102 and 103): Low

Try it at your school

Find your school’s records notice.

  • Search your school or district website for its FERPA or “student records” notice
  • Find out what counts as directory information and how families can opt out
  • Write one question about who can see a record, and ask the front office or counselor
  • If you’re heading to college, look up its parent-access and authorization forms early

Who to ask: School counselor, registrar or records office, front-office staff

Safety: Never post screenshots of grades, IDs or forms. Talk with a trusted adult about what to share and with whom.

Sources

  • U.S. Department of Education, Student Privacy Policy Office, “What is FERPA?,” No date listed
Plan 6b

Lesson 6Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 6 plan, continued

Sources, continued

  • U.S. Department of Education, Student Privacy Policy Office, “What is an education record?,” No date listed
  • U.S. Department of Education, Student Privacy Policy Office, “Must postsecondary institutions provide a parent with access to an eligible student’s education records?,” No date listed
  • U.S. Department of Education, Student Privacy Policy Office, “Student privacy questions,” No date listed
  • American University, AU Central, “FERPA and parent-access guide,” No date listed
Plan 6c
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?

Rafa’s parents help pay his college bill, and a family-access form asks whether they should also get information about his grades.

On your ownRead What happened and underline what Rafa’s dad asks for in the family chat. About 5 minutes.

Rafa and Caio sit on a sofa and look at Rafa’s phone. Caio explains something with an open hand.

Your role: You’re the one who reads each box on the form before Rafa signs. New skill: Read a form section by section before you sign.

What happened

Rafa, 18, has just started college, and his parents help pay his tuition bill. He commutes from the next block and helps at his family’s shop after class. At the start of October, the college mailed Rafa a family-access form, but he has not opened the envelope yet.

On Sunday night, his parents ask about the form in the family group chat. His dad wants Rafa’s login so the family can handle everything. Rafa is glad to share the bill, but he wants to read the rest of the form first.

Caio, an older friend who rents a room on the block, reads the form with Rafa, not for him. The form has separate sections for billing and for grades. Rafa wants to check the billing box. He wants to talk with his family before he decides about grades.

Your question: What will this form let Rafa’s parents see, and what should he ask before he signs?

89
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

FERPA FERPA, the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, is a federal law about who can see student education records.

En español: FERPA (Ley de Derechos Educativos y Privacidad de la Familia)

In this case: Rafa is 18 and in college, so under the general rule the FERPA rights to his records are his, not his parents’.

Education record An education record is a record directly about a student that a school or college keeps.

En español: expediente educativo

In this case: Rafa’s grades and schedule are education records. Section 2 of his form asks whether his parents may receive information about his grades.

Consent Consent is permission a person gives for something specific, such as sharing a record with a named person.

En español: consentimiento

In this case: Rafa’s form asks for consent in two separate sections, one for billing and one for grades. He can say yes to one and no to the other.

Who is involved

Rafa

First-year commuter with a family-access form

“My parents help with the bill. The college mailed this form, and the family chat already wants to know if I signed it. I haven’t even opened it.”

Caio

Reads the form with Rafa, not for him

“I can sit with Rafa while he asks. Being the older friend doesn’t make this my decision.”

90
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, what do you think Rafa’s parents are allowed to see?

I think Rafa’s parents can see ___ because ___.

I think Rafa’s parents can see his grades because they help pay the bill.

Notes

91
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

One envelope, two boxes

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • FERPA: FERPA, the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, is a federal law about who can see student education records.
  • Education record: An education record is a record directly about a student that a school or college keeps.
  • Consent: Consent is permission a person gives for something specific, such as sharing a record with a named person.
  • Decision-maker: A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice.

The story: The family chat wants an answer

Rafa is 18 and has just started college. He commutes from the next block and helps at his family’s shop after class. His parents help pay his tuition bill.

At the start of October, the college mailed Rafa a family-access form. He has not opened the envelope. On Sunday night, the family group chat lights up. His mom writes, “Did the tuition form come? We want to help with the bill.” His dad goes further: “Send us the login and we’ll take care of everything.”

Rafa is glad to share the bill. But he wants to read the rest of the form first. His older friend Caio sits with him and reads it with Rafa, not for him. “Being the older friend doesn’t make this my decision,” Caio says.

You are at the table too. Your job is to read each box on the form before Rafa signs.

Stop and think. Why might Rafa want to share the bill but wait on his grades?

Reading the form section by section

In Lesson 5, you read a pay statement line by line. A form works the same way. Rafa’s form has three sections. Section 1 is about billing: his parents could view statements and make payments. Section 2 is about academic records: his parents could get information about his grades, enrollment and standing. Section 3 says his choice lasts until he changes it in writing.

92
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading the form section by section, continued

Each section has its own yes-or-no box. That means Rafa does not have to choose all or nothing. He can check yes for billing. He can wait on grades until he talks with his family.

In Lesson 4, you learned that a decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice. Here, the decision-maker is Rafa. Consent is permission a person gives for something specific, such as sharing a record with a named person. Giving his dad his login would skip that choice entirely.

Stop and think. What would Rafa give up if he just sent his dad his login?

The real law behind the form

FERPA, the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, is a federal law about who can see student education records. An education record is a record directly about a student that a school or college keeps. Grades and schedules can be education records. Under the general rule, FERPA rights move from parents to the student at age 18 or when the student starts college (U.S. Department of Education, Student Privacy Policy Office, no date listed).

There are exceptions. A college may share records with parents if the student is a dependent for federal tax purposes. But the Education Department says this sharing is allowed, not required. So Rafa should ask his records office what his college does.

Stop and think. What is one question Rafa could ask the records office?

Sources

Real sourceU.S. Department of Education, Student Privacy Policy OfficeNo date listed

What is FERPA?

Real sourceU.S. Department of Education, Student Privacy Policy OfficeNo date listed

Must postsecondary institutions provide a parent with access to an eligible student’s education records?

93
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead the form and the notice, and fill in both boxes for each one. About 10 minutes.

Evidence ACollege form

Parent and family access authorization, mailed to Rafa on October 5

Section 1, Billing and payments: allow the person named below to view account statements and make payments. Yes or No. Section 2, Academic records: allow the person named below to receive information about grades, enrollment and academic standing. Yes or No. Section 3: this authorization stays in effect until the student changes or withdraws it in writing.

Look closely: Which section covers billing, and which covers grades? Circle each yes-or-no box.

What it shows

Paying the bill and seeing grades are two separate yes-or-no choices.

One question I still have

What can the college share without Rafa saying yes?

Evidence BCollege notice

Annual FERPA notice on the registrar’s page

Students have the right to inspect their education records, to request corrections and to consent to disclosures, except where the law allows disclosure without consent. Questions go to the Office of the Registrar.

Look closely: Which phrase tells you the law has exceptions? Underline it.

What it shows

At college, Rafa holds the rights to see and share his records.

One question I still have

When can the law allow sharing without his consent?
94
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know which exceptions Rafa’s college uses, or what help his family wants.

Notes

95
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: education records

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 6 minutes.

FERPA, the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, is a federal law about who can see student education records. It gives parents, and later students, rights over those records. An education record is a record directly about a student that a school or college keeps. Grades, transcripts and schedules can be education records, on paper or stored digitally. Under the general rule, the rights transfer to the student at age 18 or when the student starts college, at any age. The law calls that student an “eligible student.”

Helping pay tuition does not, by itself, give those rights back to a parent. Consent is permission a person gives for something specific, such as sharing a record with a named person. For college records, consent is written and says which record, to whom and for what purpose. Rafa’s form asks about billing and about grades in separate sections. He can say yes to one section and no to the other. He can also change his choice later in writing.

FERPA also has exceptions, which are situations in which a college may share records without the student’s consent. A college may share records with parents if the student is a dependent for federal tax purposes. It may also share them in a health or safety emergency. The U.S. Department of Education says this sharing is allowed, not required, so Rafa should ask his records office what his college does.

Professional standards

Real sourceAmerican Association of Collegiate Registrars and Admissions Officers (AACRAO)

AACRAO Ethics and Practice: Standards of professional practice

“Protect the legitimate privacy interests of all individuals and maintain appropriate confidentiality of institutional and student education records”

In plain words: College registrars who belong to AACRAO agree to protect students' privacy and keep education records confidential.

Question: Rafa's form separates billing from grades. What would the registrar need before sharing his grades with his parents?

96
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

The registrar would need ___.

The registrar would need Rafa to check yes in Section 2, the grades section.

In the news

Real sourceU.S. Department of Education (YouTube)November 7, 2013

Student Privacy 101: FERPA for Parents and Students

The Education Department’s own short explainer of FERPA rights and when they move from parents to students.

Real sourceU.S. Department of Education, Student Privacy Policy OfficeNo date listed

Must postsecondary institutions provide a parent with access to an eligible student’s education records?

Answers the case question directly, including the exception for students claimed as tax dependents.

Notes

97
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownFill in the diagram to show who decides each question, which rule applies and who can ask. About 8 minutes.

Who actually decides each question: Rafa, the rule or the college? Mark where paying the bill and seeing grades split into two separate decisions.

Who may see Rafa’s grades?

Who decides

Rafa, the eligible student, through written consent

Under which rule

FERPA: rights transfer to the student at 18 or on entering college

Who lives with it

Rafa’s family, who help pay tuition

Your way in
The registrar or records office explains which form and which exceptions apply

Who may see and pay the tuition bill?

Who decides

Rafa, the eligible student, through written consent

Under which rule
Who lives with it

Rafa’s family, who help pay tuition

Your way in

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

Rafa’s parents’ view is missing. I would ask what help they want with the bill.
98
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose who holds Rafa’s rights and explain why, then fix the two marked lines. About 6 minutes.

Rafa is 18 and in college, and his parents help pay his tuition. Under the general FERPA rule, who holds the rights to his education records?

  • A Rafa does.

  • B His parents do, because they help pay the bill.

  • C His parents do, until Rafa signs a form that says otherwise.

Why I chose it

A. Rafa is 18 and in college, so the rights are his. Paying the bill does not give them back to his parents.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Rafa, 1 your parents are paying so they can probably see everything, that’s how it works at most schools. My parents could always see my grades on the portal in high school. FERPA is a privacy law but it’s mostly for kids. 2 Once you’re 18 it doesn’t really matter anymore. If you want to keep your grades private you should just not give them your password. Honestly just ask your parents what they want to see. They’re helping you a lot so it’s probably fair for them to know how you’re doing.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

Paying the bill and seeing your grades need separate permission.

Rewrite phrase 2

At 18, the rights to your records become yours.
99
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Make a “my records, my family” card explaining who holds FERPA rights for a middle-school student and what changes at 18.

Use: The FERPA FAQ summary read aloud and the case quiz.

You’ll make: Illustrated card, 4–6 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Find who holds FERPA rights for a student under 18 in K–12.
  2. Find what changes at 18 or when a student starts college.
  3. Write who holds the rights for a student who starts college at 17.
  4. Draw the timeline: middle school, high school, then 18 or college.
  5. Write 4 to 6 sentences for your card in the Your draft box.
  6. Add one question for the school office, using no real records.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 4–6 sentences with the frame “Right now, __ can see my records. At 18 or in college, __.”
  • Say it: Tell a partner in three sentences who can see your school records now and what changes at 18 or in college.
  • Show it: Draw the picture timeline (middle school, high school, 18 or college) and write who holds the rights at each stop.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

100
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Right now, in K–12

Right now, ___ hold the rights.

Right now, my parents hold the rights.

At 18 or in college

The rights transfer to the student.

A student starts college at 17. Who holds the rights?

The student does, because starting college transfers the rights at any age.

Your draft

Your card, 4 to 6 sentences

Right now, ___ can see my records. At 18 or in college, ___.

Right now, my parents hold the FERPA rights to my school records. They can see my records and have some say over who else can. At 18 or when I start college, the rights transfer to me. Then I decide what to share, but the law has some exceptions. My question for the office: who can see my records now?
101
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your card say that parents hold the rights for students under 18 in K–12?

    YesNo
  • Does it explain what changes at 18 or in college?

    YesNo
  • Does it include a question for the school office?

    YesNo
  • Does it leave out real student information?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo source cited.Refers to “privacy law” generally.Cites the transfer rule and the separate-access guide.Cites both and notes that exceptions exist.
ReasoningStates the rule backwards.Gets the transfer right but merges billing and grades.Separates paying from permission correctly.Explains why least access is a reasonable choice.
Audience & purposeTells Rafa what to do.Gives advice without a next step.Leaves the decision with Rafa and names the records office.Respects Rafa’s family relationship while protecting his choice.
RevisionNo change.Fixes one fact.Fixes the rule and adds a next step.Explains why each correction matters for Rafa’s decision.
102
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed my line that said my records are private, because my parents hold the rights until I turn 18 or start college.

Notes

103
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete the sentence frames below. About 8 minutes.

1 What is the smallest amount of access that would give Rafa the help he wants from his family?

Rafa could say yes to billing and no to grades. That lets his family pay without seeing his grades.

2 Why might Rafa want to talk with his family before he checks the box for grades?

So his family knows why he is choosing. Talking first can keep them from feeling shut out.

3 Someone says, “Parents can never see college records.” How would you revise that claim after reading this case?

Parents usually need the student’s permission to see college records, but there are exceptions.

My take

I think Rafa should ___ because ___.

I think Rafa should say yes to billing because that is the help his family asked for.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The evidence that changed my first guess is the form. Billing and grades are separate boxes.
104
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

My take, continued

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is which exceptions Rafa’s college uses.

Notes

105
Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 6: What can your family see in your college records?

In this case, Rafa’s parents help pay his college bill, and a form asks if they should also see his grades. Your student read the form and a federal privacy rule, then explained how paying the bill differs from seeing grades.

Questions to talk about

  1. Under the general rule, when do students start to control who sees their school records?
  2. Why might a college form keep paying a bill separate from seeing grades?
  3. Who at a college could answer a question about records?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

106

Lesson 7Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?

Overview

Students read a short story in which a group chat claims that one parent’s complaint got a novel “banned” from Anika’s school library. They compare the claim with the district’s reconsideration notice, the committee input form and the ALA’s example procedure. They map where the novel is in the review. They then write input to the review committee that is tied to the selection criteria.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a detail in a short text and point to it
  • put the steps of a process in order
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • tell a complaint apart from a final decision
  • place the novel’s current stage on a process flowchart
  • write a 3- or 4-sentence message that corrects the chat without attacking anyone
  • ask the librarian one real question

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student

Materials, continued

  • Evidence A and B on half-pages, one set per pair
  • A blank process flowchart: request filed, under review, decision, appeal
  • Optional: the Matilda library extract, read aloud

The task in this edition

Task: Draw the steps of a book review and write a message correcting the group chat.

Students make: Flowchart plus 3–4 sentence message

Pacing

Opener (page 107): 5 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud and skip the list on the board.

Key terms (pages 108 and 109): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (pages 112 and 113): 10 min. Short on time: 8 min. Students fill in the What it shows boxes only.

Key idea (pages 114 and 115): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Sort the evidence (page 116): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Do the first decider together and stop.

Practice (page 117): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Pacing, continued

Your task (pages 118 and 119): 15 min. Short on time: 15 min.

Check your work (pages 120 and 121): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Students answer the Check your work questions only. Score the rubric yourself.

Questions to discuss (pages 122 and 123): 8 min. Short on time: 8 min.

Talk about this case at home (page 124): at home.

Periods: full chapter 69 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

Plan 7

Lesson 7Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 7 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

Standards, continued

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.11.6-8 Compare how classrooms, schools, civil society and governments make decisions, and what each process is meant to do. In this case: Students differentiate how decisions are made in a school library process.

Codes of ethics

  • ALA Code of Ethics: Principle 2 (of 9)
  • Code of Ethics of the Education Profession: Principle I: Commitment to the Student, item 2
  • Credo for Ethical Communication: “We strive to understand and respect other communicators' intent…” (one of nine unnumbered principles)

Heat map

Opener (page 107): Medium

Key terms (pages 108 and 109): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 112 and 113): Low

Key idea (pages 114 and 115): Medium

Sort the evidence (page 116): Medium

Practice (page 117): Low

Check your work (pages 120 and 121): Low

Try it at your school

Find your library’s reconsideration policy.

  • Ask your school librarian how book challenges are handled
  • Find the written policy on the district website
  • Learn whether students can give input during a review
  • If a review is happening, read the whole book before commenting

Who to ask: School librarian or media specialist, public library staff, school board clerk

Safety: Don’t post names of people who filed a challenge or who spoke at a meeting. Disagree with ideas, not individuals.

Sources

  • Penguin, “Matilda by Roald Dahl: authorized extract,” No date listed
  • American Library Association, “Selection and Reconsideration Policy Toolkit: formal reconsideration,” No date listed
  • American Library Association, “Selection and Reconsideration Policy Toolkit: selection criteria,” No date listed
Plan 7b
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?

A group chat says one parent’s complaint got a novel banned, so Mari and Gia check what the school library’s notice says.

On your ownRead What happened and underline the word in the group chat that may go too far. About 5 minutes.

Your role: You’re the one who reads the library notice before anyone replies “banned.” New skill: Find what stage a process has reached.

Gia, Mari and Sami talk around a table on a rooftop terrace at sunset.

What happened

On Thursday night, a message about a novel in the library at Anika’s high school appears in a group chat. The message says one parent complained, so the novel is now banned and gone from the library. Gia replies that this is censorship.

On Friday, the school library posts a notice about the novel. Mari reads it and compares it with the group chat. Gia deletes her first reply, because she had not read the notice or the novel.

Mari works the counter at the neighborhood bookshop. She switches between print and audio, and she is halfway through the novel on audio. Gia is planning a discussion at the bookshop. First, both of them want to know what stage the library’s process has reached.

Your question: Is the novel really banned, and what can people who care about it do next?

107
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Challenge A challenge is a formal request to remove or restrict a book or other library material.

En español: impugnación

In this case: A parent’s request about a novel at Anika’s school started a review. The novel stays available while the committee reads it.

Reconsideration policy A reconsideration policy is a library's written process for reviewing a challenge to a book.

En español: política de reconsideración

In this case: The library’s notice follows district policy: a committee review, the selection criteria, written input by the 15th and an appeal.

Selection criteria Selection criteria are the written standards a library uses to decide which materials to include.

En español: criterios de selección

In this case: The committee judges the whole novel against the district’s selection criteria. The input form asks which criteria your comment addresses.

Who is involved

Mari

Works the bookshop counter

“The chat says the book is gone from the library. The notice says it stays available during the review. Those can’t both be true.”

Gia

Planning a book discussion at the bookshop

“I called it censorship before I’d read the notice. Now I’m planning a discussion at the bookshop, so I’d better get this right.”

108
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, what do you think happened to the novel?

I think the novel is ___ because ___.

I think the novel is gone because the group chat says it was banned.

Notes

109
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Banned, or under review?

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • Challenge: A challenge is a formal request to remove or restrict a book or other library material.
  • Reconsideration policy: A reconsideration policy is a library's written process for reviewing a challenge to a book.
  • Selection criteria: Selection criteria are the written standards a library uses to decide which materials to include.
  • Claim: A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.
  • Correction: A correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information.

The story: A rumor on Thursday night

On Thursday night, a message spreads through a group chat. It is about a novel in the library at Anika’s high school. The message says one parent complained, so the novel is now banned and gone from the library. Gia replies fast: “censorship, full stop.”

On Friday, the school library posts a notice about the novel. Mari reads it. Mari works the counter at the neighborhood bookshop, and she is halfway through the novel on audio. She compares the notice with the chat. “The chat says the book is gone from the library,” she says. “The notice says it stays available during the review. Those can’t both be true.”

Gia deletes her first reply. She had not read the notice, or the book.

Your job in this case is to read the library notice before anyone replies “banned.”

Stop and think. Why do you think the rumor said “banned” instead of “under review”?

What stage is the process in?

In Lesson 1, you learned to find the original source. Here, the original source is the library’s notice. It says a request for reconsideration has been received. The book stays available during the review. A committee will read the whole book and judge it against the district’s selection criteria.

110
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

What stage is the process in?, continued

People can send written input by the 15th. The decision can be appealed.

A challenge is a formal request to remove or restrict a book or other library material. A challenge starts a review. On its own, it does not remove a book. A reconsideration policy is a library’s written process for reviewing a challenge to a book. Selection criteria are the written standards a library uses to decide which materials to include.

So the chat’s claim, that the book is banned, does not match the notice. In Lesson 3, you learned that a correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information. The chat needs one. The book is under review, it is still on the shelf, and anyone who cares can send input by the 15th.

Mari plans to use the input form. It asks whether you read the whole book, so she is finishing it first. Gia plans a discussion at the bookshop. She has one rule: nobody goes after the parent. “They used the process too,” she says.

Stop and think. Which sentence in the notice tells you where the book is right now?

Book challenges in real life

The American Library Association recommends that libraries adopt a reconsideration policy. Its example has a committee read the whole work (American Library Association, updated January 2018). That is professional advice, not a law. Rules differ by state. In Tennessee, reporters found that a stricter state law changed the review steps (Chalkbeat Tennessee, September 17, 2024).

Stop and think. Why does Gia say nobody should go after the parent who asked for the review?

Sources

Real sourceAmerican Library AssociationJanuary 2018

Selection and Reconsideration Policy Toolkit: formal reconsideration

Real sourceChalkbeat TennesseeSeptember 17, 2024

Under stricter Tennessee law, some school library books quietly disappear

111
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead the notice and the input form, and fill in both boxes for each one. About 10 minutes.

Evidence ALibrary notice

Reconsideration notice, posted Friday by the school library

A request for reconsideration has been received for one title in the library collection. Under district policy, the title remains available during the review. A review committee will read the full work and evaluate it against the district’s selection criteria. Written input may be submitted by the 15th. The committee’s decision may be appealed.

Look closely: Which sentence tells you where the book is right now? Underline it.

What it shows

The book is still available. A committee is reviewing it.

One question I still have

Which novel is it, and who is on the committee?

Evidence BInput form

Review committee input form, due the 15th

Name and role (student, parent, staff or community member). Have you read the entire work? Yes or No. Which selection criteria does your input address? Comments, 300 words maximum.

Look closely: Who can send input? What does the form ask before your comments?

What it shows

Students can send input, and the form asks if you read the whole book.

One question I still have

How will the committee use the comments?
112
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know which novel it is, who is on the committee or what the criteria say.

Notes

113
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: book challenges

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 6 minutes.

A challenge is a formal request to remove or restrict a book or other library material. A challenge starts a review. On its own, it does not remove a book. A complaint, a temporary change and a final decision can happen at different times. Check which stage a process has reached before you repeat a claim.

A reconsideration policy is a library's written process for reviewing a challenge to a book. The American Library Association (ALA) recommends that libraries adopt one, and its example has a committee read the whole work. Selection criteria are the written standards a library uses to decide which materials to include. ALA’s guidance is a professional recommendation, not a law. Each district’s adopted policy and the applicable law govern its own process.

Whether removing a book breaks the law is a harder question. Federal courts disagree about how the First Amendment applies when a library removes a book. The answer can depend on where you live. Right now, the notice at Anika’s school describes a review, and the novel is still available.

Professional standards

Real sourceAmerican Library Association (ALA)

ALA Code of Ethics: Principle 2 (of 9)

“We uphold the principles of intellectual freedom and resist all efforts to censor library resources.”

In plain words: Library workers who follow the ALA code support people's freedom to read and oppose censorship of library materials.

Question: The district notice says the title stays available during review. Does that match the group chat's claim that it's “gone”?

Your answer

The notice says ___, but the chat says ___.

The notice says the book stays available, but the chat says it is gone.
114
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceChalkbeat ColoradoFebruary 10, 2025

Colorado bill to curb school library book challenges clears first legislative hurdle

A state debated requiring clear reconsideration policies, showing a challenge is a process, not an instant ban.

Real sourceChalkbeat TennesseeSeptember 17, 2024

Under stricter Tennessee law, some school library books quietly disappear

A state law changed the review steps, so you have to check which rules and stage actually applied.

Notes

115
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownFill in the diagram to show who decides at each stage, which rules apply and where input goes. About 8 minutes.

Replace “banned” with the real chain of decisions. Who decides at each stage, which rules bind them, and where can a student’s input land?

Keep, restrict or remove the novel after review

Who decides

The school review committee, which reads the whole work and votes

District-level appeal and, finally, the school board

Under which rule

District reconsideration policy and selection criteria

State law and unsettled First Amendment case law (Pico had no majority opinion)

Who lives with it
Your way in
Written input on the committee form by the 15th

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The parent’s view is missing. I would ask what worries them about the book.
116
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what to check first and explain why, then fix the two marked lines. About 6 minutes.

A group chat says, “One parent complained, so that novel is banned.” What should you check first?

  • A Find the library’s policy and where the review stands.

  • B Ask everyone in the chat whether they like the book.

  • C Read the passage people are upset about, then decide.

Why I chose it

A. The policy and the notice tell you what stage the review is in. Liking the book or reading one passage can’t tell you that.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

This is so messed up. One parent complains and 1 now the whole school can’t read the book?? That’s literally censorship and it’s illegal because of the First Amendment. 2 Whoever complained is a terrible person and should mind their own business. Everyone should go to the board meeting and yell at them until they put it back. Books like this are the only ones some of us actually finish. I read part of it last year and it was actually really good. I’m so done with this school honestly.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

The book is still on the shelf while a committee reviews it.

Rewrite phrase 2

The parent used the review process, and we can use it too.
117
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Draw the steps of a book review and write a message correcting the group chat.

Use: The Matilda extract, the chat claim and a simplified district process.

You’ll make: Flowchart plus 3–4 sentence message

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read the chat message in What happened, and underline what it says happened.
  2. Circle the sentence in Evidence A that says where the book is now.
  3. Write the four stages on the flowchart in order.
  4. Mark the stage the novel is at now.
  5. Write a message of 3 or 4 sentences in the Your draft box.
  6. Write one question you would ask the librarian.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–4 sentences with the frame “A complaint was made. Right now, __. The next step is __.”
  • Say it: Explain the steps of a book review to a partner, pointing to where the novel is right now.
  • Show it: Fill in the flowchart (request filed, under review, decision, appeal) and put a sticker on the current stage.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

118
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

The four stages, in order

Request filed, under review, decision, appeal

Where the novel is now

Under review, and still available

The next step

The committee decides. Input is due by the 15th.

My question for the librarian

Who is on the review committee, and when will it decide?

Your draft

Your message, 3 or 4 sentences

A complaint was made. Right now, ___. The next step is ___.

A complaint was made, but the book is not banned. Right now, it is under review and still in the library. The next step is the committee’s decision, and you can send input by the 15th. Please don’t go after the parent who asked.
119
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your message separate the complaint from the decision?

    YesNo
  • Does it name the stage the novel is at now?

    YesNo
  • Does it avoid attacking the parent?

    YesNo
  • Did you write a real question for the librarian?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceRepeats “banned.”Mentions a complaint without stage.States the current stage from the policy.States stage, next steps and input route.
ReasoningDeclares a legal verdict.Treats outrage as the argument.Separates complaint, review and decision.Connects input to criteria and notes legal uncertainty.
Audience & purposeAttacks people.Rallies without direction.Gives a useful participation route.Invites participation while respecting other readers and the parent.
RevisionNo change.Tone only.Corrects the stage and removes attacks.Explains how each change helps the chat act accurately.
120
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed my claim that the book got banned, because the notice says it is still available during the review.

Notes

121
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete the sentence frames below. About 8 minutes.

1 Whose reading experience is missing from the crew’s discussion of the novel?

The parent’s reading is missing, and so are students who read the novel. Mari has read only part of it.

2 Gia says nobody should go after the parent who asked for the review. Why might that matter for her bookshop discussion?

If people go after the parent, the discussion turns into a fight. Gia wants people to send input by the 15th.

3 How does calling the same action a “review,” a “restriction” or a “ban” change what people think happened?

“Ban” sounds final. “Review” tells people the book is still there and no decision has been made.

My take

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should tell the chat the book is still there because the notice says so.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The evidence that changed my first guess is the notice. It says the book stays available.
122
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

My take, continued

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is who is on the review committee.

Notes

123
Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 7: Did one complaint get the novel banned?

In this case, a group chat claims one parent’s complaint got a novel banned from a school library. Your student compared that claim with the library’s notice and learned how a book review works.

Questions to talk about

  1. What is the difference between a book being reviewed and a book being removed?
  2. Where could someone find out how a library decides which books to keep?
  3. How can people disagree about a book without attacking each other?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

124

Lesson 8Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?

Content note

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read a short story in which a publisher sends Gia a free novel to review. Her video tags the publisher but never says the copy was free. They compare the publisher’s email, the video script and Caio’s edit notes with the FTC’s disclosure guidance for social media. They then rewrite the video’s opening and caption so that a viewer watching with the sound off learns about the free copy.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a detail in a short text and point to it
  • tell an opinion from a fact
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • identify the free copy as a material connection between Gia and the publisher
  • place a disclosure early in the video, spoken and on screen
  • explain in 3 or 4 sentences where the disclosure goes and why

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A, B and C on half-pages, one set per pair
  • A disclosure word bank: free copy, sent by, paid by, ad

The task in this edition

Task: Add a clear disclosure to Gia’s review script and explain where you put it and why.

Students make: Storyboard plus 3–4 sentence explanation

Pacing

Opener (page 125): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud. Skip the group-chat excerpt.

Key terms (pages 126 and 127): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 130): 12 min. Short on time: 10 min. Students fill in only the What it shows boxes.

Look at the evidence (page 131): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read Caio’s notes aloud. Students fill in only the What it shows box.

Key idea (pages 132 and 133): 8 min. Short on time: skip. Say that a free product counts, even when no post is required.

Pacing, continued

Sort the evidence (page 134): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 135): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Take the vote and read the best option’s feedback. Skip Improve a draft.

Your task (pages 136 and 137): 18 min. Short on time: 17 min. Students draw frame 1 only, then write the explanation.

Check your work (pages 138 and 139): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Score the storyboards yourself with the rubric.

Questions to discuss (page 140): 10 min. Short on time: 3 min. Use the first My take frame as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 141): at home.

Periods: full chapter 86 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

Plan 8

Lesson 8Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 8 plan, continued

Standards, continued

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

Standards, continued

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.1.6-8 Tell apart the powers and responsibilities of citizens, political parties, interest groups and the media. In this case: Students distinguish the responsibilities of media creators and a government agency.

Codes of ethics

  • FTC Endorsement Guides (16 CFR Part 255): § 255.5 Disclosure of material connections
  • FTC Endorsement Guides (16 CFR Part 255): § 255.0 Purpose and definitions, paragraph (f)
  • PRSA Code of Ethics: Free Flow of Information

Heat map

Opener (page 125): Low

Key terms (pages 126 and 127): Low

Look at the evidence (page 130): Low

Look at the evidence (page 131): Low

Key idea (pages 132 and 133): Low

Sort the evidence (page 134): Low

Heat map, continued

Practice (page 135): Low

Your task (pages 136 and 137): Low

Check your work (pages 138 and 139): Low

Try it at your school

Check the relationship before you trust the review.

  • Next time you see a recommendation, look for a disclosure in the video itself
  • If you post reviews, practice a clear spoken line like “They sent me this for free”
  • Share a disclosure checklist with a school media club
  • Don’t accuse real creators; practice on your own sample posts

Who to ask: School media or journalism advisor, a librarian, a digital citizenship teacher

Safety: Don’t share personal information to get free products. Talk with a trusted adult before accepting any brand deal.

Sources

  • TikTok Newsroom, “BookTok and publishing,” September 2022
  • Federal Trade Commission, “Disclosures 101 for Social Media Influencers,” No date listed
Plan 8b

Lesson 8Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 8 plan, continued

Sources, continued

  • Federal Trade Commission, “FTC’s Endorsement Guides: What People Are Asking,” No date listed
  • Federal Trade Commission, “FTC explanatory video,” No date listed
Plan 8c
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?

Gia loves a novel that a publisher sent her for free, and her video review does not mention the free copy yet.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline what the publisher sent Gia and what it asked for. About 6 minutes.

Gia, Caio and Mari set up a camera in a bright studio.

Your role: You’re the viewer with the sound off who checks the first three seconds. New skill: Spot and disclose a material connection.

What happened

At 1:30 p.m. on Saturday, Caio finishes editing Gia’s short video review of a new novel. Gia made the review for BookTok, where people recommend books on TikTok. She stayed up until 2 a.m. to finish the novel, and she loves it.

Two weeks ago, the book’s publisher emailed Gia. The publicity team offered her a free copy of its spring novel for review. The email said she did not have to post, but it asked for a tag if she did. In the first cut, Gia never says the book was free. The only sign of the publisher is a tag in the caption below the video.

Caio wants to watch the cut the way a stranger would, on a phone with the sound off. He wants to know whether the first three seconds say the book was free. Gia wants to keep her honest opinion in the video. She also wants viewers to know how she got the book.

Your question: Do Gia’s viewers need to know the book was free, and how should she tell them?

125
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Material connection A material connection is a relationship with a brand, like payment or a free product, that viewers might not expect.

En español: conexión material

In this case: The publisher sent Gia a free copy of its spring novel for review. That free copy is a material connection.

Disclosure A disclosure is a clear statement that tells people about a relationship or fact they would want to know.

En español: divulgación

In this case: Gia’s first cut has no disclosure. The tag in the caption names the publisher but never says the book was free.

Endorsement An endorsement is a message that shares someone's opinion or experience of a product to promote it.

En español: respaldo

In this case: Gia’s video review promotes the novel with her own opinion: she stayed up until 2 a.m. to finish it.

Who is involved

Gia

Made the video review

“I stayed up till 2 a.m. finishing it. That part’s real. The publisher sending it free is also real, and right now it’s nowhere in the video.”

Caio

Editing Gia’s video

“The publisher’s email literally says ‘free copy for review.’ That’s the sentence. It’s just not in the video yet.”

126
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, does Gia need to tell viewers the book was free?

I think Gia ___ because ___.

I think Gia does not need to say it because her opinion is honest.

Notes

127
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

The free book in the first three seconds

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Material connection: A material connection is a relationship with a brand, like payment or a free product, that viewers might not expect.
  • Disclosure: A disclosure is a clear statement that tells people about a relationship or fact they would want to know.
  • Endorsement: An endorsement is a message that shares someone's opinion or experience of a product to promote it.
  • Framing: Framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward.

The story: A review that is almost ready

Gia stayed up until 2 a.m. to finish a new novel, and she loves it. Now she has made a short video review for BookTok, where people recommend books on TikTok. At 1:30 p.m. on Saturday, Caio finishes editing it.

There is one thing the video does not say. Two weeks ago, the book’s publisher emailed Gia. The publicity team offered her a free copy for review. The email said she did not have to post, but it asked for a tag if she did.

In the first cut, Gia says, “You guys, I have to tell you about this book because I literally could not put it down!” The only sign of the publisher is a tag in the caption below the video.

Gia is ready to post. Caio asks her to wait and watch it once on mute. Your role is to be that viewer with the sound off. You check the first three seconds.

Stop and think. Why might Gia think a tag in the caption is enough?

What viewers need to know

An endorsement is a message that shares someone’s opinion or experience of a product to promote it. Gia’s review is an endorsement, and her opinion is honest.

128
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

What viewers need to know, continued

A material connection is a relationship with a brand, like payment or a free product, that viewers might not expect. The free copy is a material connection. It does not prove Gia’s opinion is false. It is simply something viewers would want to know.

A disclosure is a clear statement that tells people about a relationship or fact they would want to know. Gia thinks the tag is enough. Caio disagrees. A tag says who made the book. It does not say they sent it to her free. And the tag sits in the caption, which many people never open.

Lesson 1 taught you that framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward. Right now, the video brings forward Gia’s excitement and hides the free copy. Caio suggests a new opening: “Quick heads-up, the publisher sent me this free.” Gia would say it out loud and show it on screen, so it works with the sound off. Then comes her hook.

Gia also makes one more change. She drops the idea of calling it the best book of the year. She will just say what happened: two nights, and she could not put it down.

Stop and think. How would you test whether a stranger with the sound off can tell the book was free?

The real rules

The Federal Trade Commission, a federal agency, writes guides about endorsements. It says that for a video, the disclosure belongs in the video itself, ideally both spoken and on screen (Federal Trade Commission, updated December 3, 2024). In 2023, the FTC warned a dozen influencers about posts that did not clearly disclose they were paid (Federal Trade Commission, November 14, 2023).

Stop and think. Would knowing the book was free change how much you trust the review? Why or why not?

Sources

Real sourceFederal Trade CommissionDecember 3, 2024

Disclosures 101 for Social Media Influencers

Real sourceFederal Trade CommissionNovember 14, 2023

FTC Warns Two Trade Associations and a Dozen Influencers About Social Media Posts Promoting Consumption of Aspartame or Sugar

129
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 12 minutes.

Evidence AEmail

The publisher’s email

“Hi Gia, we love your book reviews! We’d be glad to send you a free copy of our spring novel for review. There’s no obligation to post, but if you do, we’d appreciate a tag. Best, the publicity team”

Look closely: What did the publisher give, and what did it ask for?

What it shows

The publisher sent Gia a free book and asked for a tag.

One question I still have

Does Gia have any other deal with the publisher?

Evidence BVideo script and caption

Gia’s first cut

Spoken: “You guys, I have to tell you about this book because I literally could not put it down!” On-screen text: none. Caption below the video: “@publisher #booktok

Look closely: Where in this video would a viewer learn about the free copy?

What it shows

Gia loves the book. The publisher’s tag is only in the caption.

One question I still have

Where would a viewer learn the book was free?
130
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CEdit notes

Caio’s edit notes

“Watch once as a stranger, phone on mute. 0:00–0:03: does anything say free copy? Caption sits below the video; most people won’t open it. Tag = brand name, not relationship.”

Look closely: What does Caio want to test before uploading, and why the first three seconds?

What it shows

Caio will watch it on mute, like a stranger, to test it.

One question I still have

How many of Gia’s viewers watch with no sound?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know how many of Gia’s viewers watch with no sound, or if she has any other deal with the publisher.

Notes

131
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: material connections

On your ownRead the key idea and the FTC guide. Then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

An endorsement is a message that shares someone's opinion or experience of a product to promote it. Gia’s video review is an endorsement, and her opinion in it is honest. A material connection is a relationship with a brand, like payment or a free product, that viewers might not expect. The free copy from the publisher is a material connection. Knowing about it gives viewers context, but it does not prove that Gia’s opinion is false.

The Federal Trade Commission (FTC) is a federal agency. Its Endorsement Guides explain how a federal law against deceptive practices applies to endorsements. A disclosure is a clear statement that tells people about a relationship or fact they would want to know. For a video, the FTC says the disclosure belongs in the video itself, ideally both spoken and on screen. A tag in the caption only names the brand, and it sits below the video.

A disclosure answers one question: how did Gia get the book? Viewers can still ask what supports her claims about the book itself. A clear disclosure does not make every claim in a review accurate. Do not accuse a real creator of hiding a sponsorship based on a guess.

Professional standards

Real sourceLaw or regulationFederal Trade Commission (FTC)

FTC Endorsement Guides (16 CFR Part 255): § 255.5 Disclosure of material connections

“They can include monetary payment or the provision of free or discounted products … to an endorser, regardless of whether the advertiser requires an endorsement in return.”

In plain words: The FTC says a free product can be a connection that reviewers must clearly disclose, even if the brand asked for nothing in return.

Question: The publisher's email says there is “no obligation to post.” Does that change whether Gia has a connection to disclose?

132
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

The email says ___. Gia still ___ because ___.

The email says she does not have to post. Gia still has a connection because the book was free.

In the news

Real sourceNBC NewsNovember 15, 2023

Influencers warned by FTC over ‘inadequate’ disclosures of artificial sweetener promotions

Real creators were warned for not clearly saying they were paid, the exact question this case asks.

Real sourceABC NewsNovember 6, 2019

Popular YouTuber chimes in on federal product disclosure guide for influencers

A creator reacts to the FTC’s disclosure rules, showing how the guidance lands for people who actually post.

Notes

133
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownFollow each choice to its results. Then write whose view is missing. About 8 minutes.

Follow both choices forward. Which consequences can Gia control, which depend on viewers, and what test tells her the disclosure worked?

Post the first cut with only a brand tag in the caption

  1. Sound-off viewers never learn the book was free

    Who is affected

    Viewers deciding whether to buy or borrow the book

Disclose aloud and on screen in the first seconds

  1. Viewers weigh the recommendation knowing the relationship

    Who is affected

    Viewers deciding whether to buy or borrow the book
  2. Some viewers may discount the review as an ad

    Who is affected

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

Gia’s viewers are missing. I would ask one of them if they could tell the book was free.
134
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose the change that makes the relationship clearest. Then fix the two marked phrases. About 8 minutes.

Gia loves the novel the publisher sent her for free. Which change to her video makes the relationship clearest to viewers?

  • A Tag the publisher in the caption.

  • B Say and show at the start of the video that the publisher sent her the book for free.

  • C Leave the video as it is, since the email said there was no obligation to post.

Why I chose it

B. Viewers learn the book was free while they watch, even with the sound off. Gia can still say she loved it.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Okay you guys, I have to tell you about this book because I literally could not put it down!! 1 #ad #booktok @publisher. The characters are so real and the ending destroyed me. I stayed up until 2 a.m. finishing it and then just sat there staring at the wall. Everyone needs to read this, trust me, 2 it’s the best book of the year and you won’t regret it. Link is in my bio, go get it before everyone else does!

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

Say it and show it at the start: “the publisher sent me this book for free.”

Rewrite phrase 2

Say what happened: “I finished it in two nights.”
135
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Add a clear disclosure to Gia’s review script and explain where you put it and why.

Use: The review description, the publisher email and three FTC key points.

You’ll make: Storyboard plus 3–4 sentence explanation

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read the email in Evidence A. Circle what Gia got for free.
  2. Read the first cut in Evidence B. Underline the only place the publisher appears.
  3. Choose words from the word bank for a disclosure of one sentence.
  4. Draw three storyboard frames. Put your disclosure in frame 1, spoken and on screen.
  5. Write 3 or 4 sentences in the Your draft box. Explain where you put the disclosure and why.
  6. Test frame 1 with a partner. Could a viewer with the sound off tell the book was free?

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–4 sentences with the frame “I put it __ because viewers __.”
  • Say it: Perform or record the first five seconds of the review with your spoken disclosure, then explain why you put it there.
  • Show it: Draw the three-frame storyboard and show where the words “sent to me free” appear on screen for a viewer with the sound off.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

136
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

What Gia got for free

A free copy of the novel

Where the first cut names the publisher

Only in a tag in the caption, below the video.

Frame 1: what Gia says and what the screen shows

Gia says ___. The screen shows ___.

Gia says, “Quick heads-up, the publisher sent me this free.” The screen shows the words Free copy from the publisher.

Frame 2

Gia holds up the book and says she could not put it down.

Frame 3

Gia says she read it in two nights and loved the ending.

Your draft

Your explanation, 3 or 4 sentences

I put it ___ because viewers ___.

I put the disclosure in frame 1 because viewers see the start first. I made it spoken and on screen because some viewers watch with the sound off. The tag in the caption only names the publisher. Now a stranger can tell the book was free in three seconds.
137
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your disclosure say the book was free?

    YesNo
  • Is the disclosure in frame 1?

    YesNo
  • Could a viewer with the sound off see it?

    YesNo
  • Did you keep Gia’s honest opinion?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo disclosure or claim support.Tag only.Names the relationship clearly.Names the relationship and supports the product claim.
ReasoningTreats opinion as a substitute for disclosure.Discloses but can’t explain why.Explains why placement and clarity matter.Distinguishes opinion, relationship and product claim.
Audience & purposeIgnores viewers.Assumes viewers read captions.Works for sound-off viewers.Works across channels with consistent wording.
RevisionNo change.Adds a hashtag.Adds spoken and on-screen disclosure.Explains each placement choice for different viewers.
138
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed my disclosure from spoken only to spoken and on screen, because some viewers watch on mute.

Notes

139
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then finish My take. About 10 minutes.

1 Would knowing the book was free change how much you trust Gia’s review? Why or why not?

Maybe a little. I would still believe she loved it, but I would know she did not pay for it.

2 Some viewers may treat a review with a disclosure as just an ad. How could Gia keep their trust?

She can say the book was free right away. Then she can give her honest opinion, like how she read it in two nights.

3 Who should make sure disclosures are clear: creators, brands or platforms?

Gia should, because she is the one talking to viewers. The publisher could remind her in its email.

My take

I think Gia should ___ because ___.

I think Gia should say the book was free at the start because viewers may not read the caption.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

Caio’s notes changed my first guess. A tag only names the brand.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is how many viewers watch with no sound.
140
Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 8: Is it a recommendation or an ad?

In this case, a publisher sends Gia a free novel, and her video review does not say the book was free. Your student read the email and the video script, then rewrote the opening so viewers learn about the free copy.

Questions to talk about

  1. How can you tell when a video review is also an ad?
  2. Where in a video would you look for a note that a product was free?
  3. Why might a review still be honest if the reviewer got the product for free?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

141

Lesson 9Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?

Content note

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read a story in which Dec, who turns 18 in October, looks past the headline race on his sample ballot. He finds a school board race, a city council race and a transit bond. They compare the ballot with a creator’s voter guide that mixes facts with picks, and they read Vote.gov’s guidance for people 18 and under. They then write a personal checklist of official sources for registration, deadlines and their own sample ballot.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a detail in a short text and point to it
  • tell a fact from an opinion
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • find contests below the big race on a sample ballot
  • match at least three contests to something they decide
  • point families to official, address-based information without taking sides

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A, B and C on half-pages, one set per group
  • Office-to-issue matching cards

The task in this edition

Task: Match offices on a sample ballot to the everyday things they decide, then make a poster for families about finding their own ballot.

Students make: Matching sheet plus a poster

Pacing

Opener (page 142): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud. Skip the group-chat excerpt.

Key terms (pages 143 and 144): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 147): 12 min. Short on time: 10 min. Students fill in only the What it shows boxes.

Look at the evidence (page 148): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read Gia’s reminder aloud. Students fill in only the What it shows box.

Key idea (pages 149 and 150): 8 min. Short on time: skip. Say that a pick tells you how to vote and a fact can be checked.

Pacing, continued

Sort the evidence (pages 151 and 152): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 153): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Take the vote and read the best option’s feedback. Skip Improve a draft.

Your task (pages 154 and 155): 18 min. Short on time: 17 min. Groups match two contests instead of three.

Check your work (pages 156 and 157): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Check the posters yourself with the rubric.

Questions to discuss (page 158): 10 min. Short on time: 3 min. Use the first My take frame as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 159): at home.

Periods: full chapter 86 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

Plan 9

Lesson 9Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 9 plan, continued

Standards, continued

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

Standards, continued

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.2.6-8 Explain the roles citizens play, such as voters, jurors, taxpayers, petitioners and protesters. In this case: Students explain specific roles played by citizens, such as voters.

Codes of ethics

  • SPJ Code of Ethics: Seek Truth and Report It
  • RTDNA Code of Ethics: Opening statement (before the guiding principles)
  • Credo for Ethical Communication: “We advocate sharing information, opinions, and feelings…” (one of nine unnumbered principles)

Heat map

Opener (page 142): Low

Key terms (pages 143 and 144): Low

Look at the evidence (page 147): Low

Look at the evidence (page 148): Low

Key idea (pages 149 and 150): Low

Heat map, continued

Sort the evidence (pages 151 and 152): Medium

Practice (page 153): Low

Your task (pages 154 and 155): Low

Check your work (pages 156 and 157): Low

Try it at your school

Find your official election information.

  • With a trusted adult, visit vote.gov and choose your state or territory
  • Check eligibility, preregistration and registration rules for your age
  • Find a sample ballot for your address and circle one local office
  • Learn what that office does before researching candidates

Who to ask: Your county or local election office, a civics teacher, a school librarian

Safety: Never share your address, birthdate or voter information in group chats. Use official government sites (.gov) for registration.

Sources

  • Vote.gov, “Your state or territory’s voting information,” No date listed
  • Vote.gov, “Preparing to vote: age 18 and under,” No date listed
Plan 9b

Lesson 9Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 9 plan, continued

Sources, continued

  • USAGov, “Sample ballots and voter guides,” No date listed
  • National Constitution Center, “The 26th Amendment of the U.S. Constitution,” No date listed
Plan 9c
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?

Dec turns 18 before the election on November 3, 2026, and his feed covers only one race on his ballot.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline the contests Mateo finds below the big race. About 6 minutes.

Your role: You’re the one who finds Dec’s official sample ballot before anyone tells him how to vote. New skill: Check an official source for your own area.

Mateo and Gia work in a notebook at a café table.

What happened

It is Sunday at the library desk. Dec turns 18 in October, before the general election on November 3, 2026. His feed is full of posts about one big race. Mateo and Gia are helping him find out what else is on his ballot.

They look at a sample ballot for the November election. The front shows the big race from Dec’s feed. The second page has more: a school board race, a city council seat and Measure T, a transit bond. Mateo notices that nobody is posting about Measure T.

A creator’s voter guide is also going around. It says registration closes “the 14th,” but it never names a state. It also tells people how to vote on the school board race and Measure T. Gia is writing a reminder for the group chat.

Mateo has his own problem. He may still be registered at his mom’s address in New Bedford, Massachusetts. Dec says he does not need anyone to pick for him. He needs to know what is on his ballot and whether he is registered in time.

Your question: What is on Dec’s ballot, and where should he check his own information?

142
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Sample ballot A sample ballot is a preview of the contests and measures that will appear on your ballot.

En español: boleta de muestra

In this case: Dec’s sample ballot lists a school board race, a city council seat and Measure T below the big race from his feed.

Voter guide A voter guide is a document that explains or recommends choices in an election.

En español: guía para votantes

In this case: A creator’s voter guide mixes one deadline with two picks: “vote Candidate B” and “Measure T: yes, obviously.”

Registration Registration is signing up with your election office so that you are on the list of people who can vote.

En español: inscripción electoral

In this case: Dec turns 18 in October and needs to know whether he is registered in time. The guide’s deadline names no state.

Jurisdiction A jurisdiction is the place or area where a particular government or rule has authority.

En español: jurisdicción

In this case: Mateo may still be registered in New Bedford, Massachusetts. A different place can mean a different ballot and a different deadline.

Who is involved

Mateo

Helping Dec read the sample ballot

“Dec’s feed is all the big race. Then you flip the sample ballot: school board, city council, a transit bond. Nobody’s posting about Measure T.”

Gia

Writing the group-chat reminder

“The creator’s guide says ‘registration closes the 14th.’ Whose 14th? It doesn’t even say which state.”

143
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, what do you think is on Dec’s ballot?

I think Dec’s ballot has ___ because ___.

I think Dec’s ballot has only the big race because that is all his feed talks about.

Notes

144
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Flip the ballot over

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • Sample ballot: A sample ballot is a preview of the contests and measures that will appear on your ballot.
  • Voter guide: A voter guide is a document that explains or recommends choices in an election.
  • Registration: Registration is signing up with your election office so that you are on the list of people who can vote.
  • Jurisdiction: A jurisdiction is the place or area where a particular government or rule has authority.
  • Claim: A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.
  • Material connection: A material connection is a relationship with a brand, like payment or a free product, that viewers might not expect.

The story: More than one race

It is Sunday at the library desk. Dec turns 18 in October, before the general election on November 3, 2026. His feed is full of posts about one big race. Mateo and Gia are helping him find out what else is on his ballot.

They look at a sample ballot. The front shows the big race from Dec’s feed. Then Mateo flips it over. The second page has a school board race, a city council seat and Measure T, a transit bond. “Nobody’s posting about Measure T,” Mateo says.

A creator’s voter guide is going around too. It says registration closes “the 14th.” It never says which state. It also tells people how to vote on the school board race and Measure T.

Dec is clear about what he wants. “I don’t need someone picking for me,” he says. He needs to know what is on his ballot and whether he is registered in time. Your job is to find his official sample ballot before anyone tells him how to vote.

Stop and think. Why might a feed show only one race when the ballot has five or more?

145
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Facts, picks and your own address

A sample ballot is a preview of the contests and measures that will appear on your ballot. A voter guide is a document that explains or recommends choices in an election. The two do different jobs. Start with the sample ballot. Then check a guide’s facts apart from its picks.

In Lesson 1, you learned that a claim can be checked with evidence. “Registration closes the 14th” is a claim. But the 14th of what month, in which state? Gia asks, “Whose 14th?” The picks, like “Measure T: yes, obviously,” are opinions, not facts.

In Lesson 8, you learned to ask about a material connection, a relationship with a brand, like payment or a free product, that viewers might not expect. The guide never says who wrote it or who pays for it. That is worth asking.

Your address decides which contests appear on your ballot. A jurisdiction is the place or area where a particular government or rule has authority. Mateo realizes he may still be registered at his mom’s address in New Bedford, Massachusetts. His ballot and deadline could be different from Dec’s. Registration is signing up with your election office so that you are on the list of people who can vote.

Stop and think. Which lines in the creator’s guide are facts you can check, and which are picks?

How voting rules really work

The Twenty-Sixth Amendment protects the right to vote for citizens 18 and older (National Constitution Center, no date listed). Rules for registering differ by state. Most states let teens preregister before they turn 18 (Ballotpedia News, September 26, 2025). Gia’s reminder for the group chat sends everyone to Vote.gov to check their own registration and sample ballot.

Stop and think. Why could Mateo’s ballot be different from Dec’s?

Sources

Real sourceNational Constitution CenterNo date listed

The 26th Amendment of the U.S. Constitution

Real sourceBallotpedia NewsSeptember 26, 2025

Most states allow teenagers to pre-register to vote before turning 18, and some let them vote in primaries

Real sourceVote.govNo date listed

Your state or territory’s voting information

146
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 12 minutes.

Evidence ASample ballot

Sample ballot for the November general election

Federal: U.S. Representative. State: State Senator; Superior Court judge (retention). Local: Board of Education, District 3 (vote for two); City Council, Ward 5. Measures: Measure T, transit improvements bond.

Look closely: Which contests sit below the big race, and which one touches Dec’s school?

What it shows

Offices at three levels, plus Measure T, a transit bond.

One question I still have

What does each office decide?

Evidence BVoter guide post

A creator’s voter guide

All you need for November!! Registration closes the 14th. School board: vote Candidate B, the only one who cares about students. Measure T: yes, obviously.

Look closely: Which line could you check, and which lines tell you how to vote?

What it shows

A deadline, plus picks for the school board and Measure T.

One question I still have

Which state is “the 14th” for?
147
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CGroup-chat draft

Gia’s reminder

Check your registration and your own sample ballot at vote.gov. Deadlines depend on your state. Please don’t post your address here.

Look closely: What does Gia share, and what does she ask friends to keep private?

What it shows

Gia sends friends to Vote.gov and asks them not to post addresses.

One question I still have

Where do I find my own deadline?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know Dec’s state, his deadline or whether he is registered. We also don’t know who wrote the creator’s guide.

Notes

148
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: sample ballots

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics. Then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

A sample ballot is a preview of the contests and measures that will appear on your ballot. A measure is a question that voters decide directly, such as Measure T. A voter guide is a document that explains or recommends choices in an election. The two have different purposes. Start with the ballot for your address, and then check a guide’s facts apart from its picks.

Your address decides which contests appear on your ballot. A jurisdiction is the place or area where a particular government or rule has authority. A friend two districts over may see different local races. A school board and a city council have different jobs, so each one makes different decisions. Before you research candidates, find out which office has power over the issue you care about.

Registration is signing up with your election office so that you are on the list of people who can vote. Rules and deadlines vary by state, so do not copy a friend’s deadline. The Twenty-Sixth Amendment protects the right to vote for citizens 18 and older. Most states let people preregister before they turn 18. Several states let 17-year-olds vote in a primary if they will be 18 by the general election.

Professional standards

Real sourceSociety of Professional Journalists (SPJ)

SPJ Code of Ethics: Seek Truth and Report It

“Label advocacy and commentary.”

In plain words: Journalists who follow the SPJ code mark opinions and recommendations so readers can tell them apart from facts.

Question: The creator's guide mixes a registration deadline with “vote Candidate B.” Which lines are checkable facts, and which are picks?

Your answer

A fact I can check is ___. A pick is ___.

A fact I can check is “Registration closes the 14th.” A pick is “vote Candidate B.”
149
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceNPRAugust 6, 2023

Some states are trying to boost youth voter registration. Here's what they're doing

Explains preregistration and other state steps that let teens sign up before they turn 18.

Real sourceBallotpedia NewsSeptember 26, 2025

Most states allow teenagers to pre-register to vote before turning 18, and some let them vote in primaries

Rules differ by state, so where you live decides when you can register and what you vote on.

Notes

150
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownMatch each of Dec’s questions to the rule or office that answers it. Then write whose view is missing. About 8 minutes.

Separate the two questions Dec has: what is on his ballot, and can he vote. Which rules and offices answer each, and which source should he check first?

Which contests and measures appear on Dec’s ballot

Who decides

His address and district lines, drawn through redistricting

Under which rule
Who lives with it
Your way in
Vote.gov, which links to his state or local election office

Whether Dec can register and vote in November

Who decides
Under which rule

Twenty-Sixth Amendment: the vote at 18 cannot be denied on account of age

State rules on preregistration, deadlines and 17-year-old primary voting

Who lives with it
Your way in
Vote.gov, which links to his state or local election office
151
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The election office’s view is missing. I would ask where Dec can find his own sample ballot.

Notes

152
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what you would do with a friend’s sample ballot. Then fix the two marked phrases. About 8 minutes.

You live at a new address. A friend sends their sample ballot and says, “Just use this one.” What should you do?

  • A Use it, because you and your friend live in the same state.

  • B Check your registration and find the official sample ballot for your address.

  • C Use a creator’s voter guide instead, since it covers the whole election.

Why I chose it

B. Your address decides your ballot. A friend’s ballot or a guide may not match yours, so check your own first.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Guys the election is coming up and it’s a big one!! 1 Registration closes on the 14th so do it now. Here’s the voter guide I use, it tells you exactly who to vote for so you don’t have to research. Also 2 drop your addresses and I’ll check if you’re registered for you. Only the big race really matters anyway, the rest is small stuff. My cousin in another state said the same deadline works for her too, so just use mine. Let’s go vote!!

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

Deadlines depend on your state. Check yours at vote.gov.

Rewrite phrase 2

Please don’t post your address here.
153
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Match offices on a sample ballot to the everyday things they decide, then make a poster for families about finding their own ballot.

Use: A sample ballot and one-line office descriptions.

You’ll make: Matching sheet plus a poster

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read the sample ballot in Evidence A. Circle three contests at the state or local level.
  2. Match each circled contest to something it decides. Use the office cards.
  3. Read Gia’s reminder in Evidence C. Find where a family gets its own ballot.
  4. Write your poster text in the Your draft box, 3 to 5 sentences.
  5. Add one sentence on why a friend’s ballot might look different.
  6. Check that your poster does not tell anyone how to vote.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3 sentences with the frame “The __ decides __. To find your ballot, __.”
  • Say it: Explain to a partner which office on the sample ballot decides something about your school, and how a family can find its own ballot.
  • Show it: Make the family poster: three offices, each with a picture of what it decides, plus the steps to find your own ballot.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

154
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Board of Education, District 3, decides:

the school budget and the school calendar

Measure T asks voters about:

paying for transit improvements, like buses

U.S. Representative votes on:

federal laws, in Congress

Where a family finds its own ballot

Go to vote.gov, choose your state, then find the ballot for your address.

Your draft

Your poster text, 3 to 5 sentences

The ___ decides ___. To find your ballot, ___.

Your ballot is more than the big race. The school board decides the school budget and calendar. Measure T asks voters about transit. To find your ballot, go to vote.gov and choose your state. Your address decides your races, so a friend’s ballot may look different.
155
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your poster match at least three contests to what they decide?

    YesNo
  • Does it send families to vote.gov or their election office?

    YesNo
  • Does it avoid telling anyone how to vote?

    YesNo
  • Does it say why a friend’s ballot might differ?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceCopies one person’s deadlines.Mentions official sources vaguely.Points to official sources for each person’s state.Points to official sources and explains why rules differ.
ReasoningTreats a guide as the ballot.Mentions the ballot but not local contests.Separates ballot, guide and registration.Explains why local offices matter to the audience.
Audience & purposeCollects private info.Generic hype.Useful, private, nonpartisan.Includes people not yet eligible.
RevisionNo change.Adds a link.Replaces copied deadlines with official routes.Explains how each change helps friends in different situations.
156
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I took out a line that told people how to vote on Measure T, because the poster has to stay neutral.

Notes

157
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then finish My take. About 10 minutes.

1 Which contest on the sample ballot could affect Dec’s school or his bus?

The Board of Education race could affect his school. Measure T, the transit bond, could affect his bus.

2 Mateo may still be registered in New Bedford. Why might his ballot differ from Dec’s?

Your address decides your ballot. New Bedford is in another state, so Mateo’s races could be different.

3 Anika is 16. How can she be part of this election before she can vote?

She can check if her state lets her preregister. She can also learn what the school board decides.

My take

I think Dec should ___ because ___.

I think Dec should check vote.gov first because it leads to his own ballot and deadline.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The sample ballot changed my first guess. It has local races below the big one.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is what the city council decides.
158
Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 9: What is on your ballot, and where do you check?

In this case, a teen about to turn 18 finds local races on his ballot that his feed never mentions. Your student compared a sample ballot with a voter guide, then wrote a guide that points to official sources without telling anyone how to vote.

Questions to talk about

  1. What offices appear on a local ballot, besides the big races?
  2. Where can someone find official information about registering to vote?
  3. How can you tell a fact in a voter guide from a recommendation?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

159

Lesson 10Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?

Content note

This case involves disability access on a city route. No student should share their own disability or health information, so keep the discussion on Sami’s trip.

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read a story in which construction blocks the curb ramp on Sami’s route to a city workshop, and the detour points to stairs. They examine the sign, the route map and the workshop flyer. They use the Department of Justice’s Title II guide to see which part of the ADA applies. They then audit the whole trip and write a message to the city’s ADA coordinator.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a detail in a short text and point to it
  • follow the stages of a trip on a simple map
  • write a complete sentence that asks a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • trace a trip to a city program in stages
  • mark each place on the route where something could go wrong

Objectives, continued

  • write one question for the city and check it against what Sami wants

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • A printed route map with five stages, one per pair
  • Evidence A, B and C on half-pages

The task in this edition

Task: Map Sami’s trip from home to the workshop and mark each place something could go wrong.

Students make: Annotated map plus 3–4 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 160): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud. Skip the group-chat excerpt.

Key terms (pages 161 and 162): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 165): 12 min. Short on time: 10 min. Students fill in only the What it shows boxes.

Look at the evidence (page 166): 5 min. Short on time: 2 min. Read the flyer aloud. Students fill in only its What it shows box.

Pacing, continued

Key idea (pages 167 and 168): 8 min. Short on time: skip. Say that the city runs the workshop, so the city is the office to ask.

Sort the evidence (page 169): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 170): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Take the vote and read the best option’s feedback. Skip Improve a draft.

Your task (pages 171 and 172): 18 min. Short on time: 18 min.

Check your work (pages 173 and 174): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Check the maps yourself with the rubric.

Questions to discuss (page 175): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Use the first My take frame as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 176): at home.

Periods: full chapter 84 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

Plan 10

Lesson 10Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 10 plan, continued

Standards, continued

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

Standards, continued

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.4.6-8 Explain the powers and limits of the branches of government, public officials and agencies at different levels. In this case: Students explain the powers and limits of local government offices responsible for access.

D4.7.6-8 Assess what you and others can do about local, regional and global problems, considering strategies and likely outcomes. In this case: Students assess their capacity to take action through a route audit and a question to the city.

Codes of ethics

  • ASPA Code of Ethics: 3. Promote democratic participation.
  • NPPA Code of Ethics for Visual Journalists: Code of Ethics, standard 3
  • ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct: Rule 3.1 Meritorious Claims and Contentions

Heat map

Opener (page 160): Medium

Key terms (pages 161 and 162): Low

Look at the evidence (page 165): Low

Look at the evidence (page 166): Low

Key idea (pages 167 and 168): Low

Sort the evidence (page 169): Medium

Practice (page 170): Medium

Your task (pages 171 and 172): Low

Check your work (pages 173 and 174): Low

Try it at your school

Find your city’s ADA contact.

  • With a trusted adult, search your city’s website for “ADA coordinator” or “accessibility”
  • Save how to report a blocked sidewalk or curb ramp (often 311 or a public works page)
  • If you notice a barrier, note the location, date and time
  • Ask the person affected what they want before reporting on their behalf

Who to ask: City ADA coordinator, 311 or public works, school transportation office for school routes

Safety: Don’t film or post people with disabilities without clear permission. Stay out of construction zones.

Plan 10b

Lesson 10Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 10 plan, continued

Sources

  • HISTORY, “When the ‘Capitol Crawl’ Dramatized the Need for Americans with Disabilities Act,” July 24, 2020
  • Minnesota Governor’s Council on Developmental Disabilities, “The Capitol Crawl,” No date listed
  • U.S. Department of Justice, “The ADA and City Governments,” No date listed
Plan 10c
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?

A construction detour sends Sami toward stairs on her way to a city workshop, and her bus comes in 12 minutes.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline where the detour sign points. About 6 minutes.

Your role: You’re the one who writes down the corner, the time and the sign before Mateo posts. New skill: Report a problem to the office responsible.

Sami, Jordy and Mateo plan with picture cards on a whiteboard.

What happened

It is Tuesday, 4:05 p.m., at the corner of Elm Street and 4th Avenue. Sami is on her way to a free community workshop run by the city’s parks department. It starts at 5. Sami uses a manual wheelchair, and her bus comes in 12 minutes. Mateo is with her.

The curb ramp on the northeast corner is blocked by construction fencing. A sign reads “SIDEWALK CLOSED AHEAD. PEDESTRIAN DETOUR.” Its arrow points to a path that begins with a flight of stairs. That detour does not work for Sami.

Mateo already has the sign on video, and his first idea is to post it. Sami asks whether the video gets her on the bus. It does not, so Mateo puts the camera down. He checks the other corners for a ramp while Sami looks up the next bus stop.

Later, they want to report the corner to the city. Mateo wonders whether the city is breaking the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). First, they need to know what one video can show and which office is responsible.

Your question: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route, and what should Sami and Mateo tell the city?

160
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Program access Program access is an ADA rule that a city's services, taken as a whole, must be usable by people with disabilities.

En español: acceso a los programas

In this case: The city runs the workshop. Program access asks whether Sami can reach and join the workshop, not only whether one ramp is open.

Barrier A barrier is something that blocks or limits a person from taking part.

En español: barrera

In this case: Fencing blocks the curb ramp at Elm Street and 4th Avenue, and the detour points to stairs. The flyer gives no way to request access.

ADA coordinator An ADA coordinator is the staff member a government names to handle disability access questions and complaints.

En español: coordinador de la ADA

In this case: Mateo plans to send the city’s ADA coordinator the corner, the time, the sign and one question, if Sami agrees.

Who is involved

Sami

Trying to catch her bus to the workshop

“The sign says detour. The detour starts with stairs. So, no. Twelve minutes.”

Mateo

Filmed the detour sign

“I had the sign on video before I even thought about it. Sami asked if that gets her on the bus. Fair. Camera down.”

161
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, whose job do you think it is to fix Sami’s route?

I think it is ___’s job because ___.

I think it is the construction workers’ job because they put up the fence.

Notes

162
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Twelve minutes at Elm and 4th

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Program access: Program access is an ADA rule that a city's services, taken as a whole, must be usable by people with disabilities.
  • Barrier: A barrier is something that blocks or limits a person from taking part.
  • ADA coordinator: An ADA coordinator is the staff member a government names to handle disability access questions and complaints.
  • Claim: A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.
  • Jurisdiction: A jurisdiction is the place or area where a particular government or rule has authority.

The story: A detour that starts with stairs

It is Tuesday at 4:05 p.m., at the corner of Elm Street and 4th Avenue. Sami is heading to a free community workshop run by the city’s parks department. It starts at 5. Sami uses a manual wheelchair, and her bus comes in 12 minutes. Mateo is with Sami.

The curb ramp on the northeast corner is blocked by construction fencing. A sign reads “SIDEWALK CLOSED AHEAD. PEDESTRIAN DETOUR.” Its arrow points to a path that begins with a flight of stairs. “The sign says detour,” Sami says. “The detour starts with stairs. So, no.”

Mateo already has the sign on video. His first idea is to post it. Sami asks one question: does that get her on the bus? It does not. So Mateo puts the camera down. He checks the other corners for a ramp while Sami looks up the next bus stop. The report can wait an hour.

Stop and think. Why does Sami care more about the bus than about the video right now?

What one video can show

Later, Mateo wonders whether the city is breaking the Americans with Disabilities Act, or ADA. That is a big claim, a word from Lesson 1. A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence. But one video of one corner cannot prove what a whole city is doing. It can show what happened, where and when.

163
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

What one video can show, continued

A barrier is something that blocks or limits a person from taking part. The fenced ramp is one barrier. The workshop flyer may be another. It says “All welcome!” but gives no way to ask about an accessible entrance.

In Lesson 9, you learned that a jurisdiction is the place or area where a particular government or rule has authority. The city runs the workshop, so the city is responsible. An ADA coordinator is the staff member a government names to handle disability access questions and complaints. That is who should get the report, not Mateo’s followers.

Program access is an ADA rule that a city’s services, taken as a whole, must be usable by people with disabilities. A good report names the corner, the day and time and where the sign points. It asks one question: is there an accessible detour, and how long will the ramp be blocked? Mateo will send it only if Sami says yes. Your job is to write down the corner, the time and the sign before anyone posts.

Stop and think. What can Mateo’s video prove, and what can it not prove?

How the ADA began

On March 12, 1990, about 60 disabled activists set aside their wheelchairs and other mobility aids and climbed the steps of the U.S. Capitol. The youngest was eight-year-old Jennifer Keelan. The protest became known as the Capitol Crawl. It showed Congress what stairs do to public life. The ADA was signed that July (HISTORY, July 24, 2020).

Stop and think. Why should Mateo ask Sami before he reports a barrier she faced?

Sources

Real sourceHISTORYJuly 24, 2020

When the ‘Capitol Crawl’ Dramatized the Need for Americans with Disabilities Act

Notes

164
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 12 minutes.

Evidence AConstruction sign

The detour sign

The sign reads “SIDEWALK CLOSED AHEAD. PEDESTRIAN DETOUR.” Its arrow points to a path that begins with a flight of stairs. The sign went up on Monday. Mateo recorded it on Tuesday at 4:05 p.m.

Look closely: Where does the arrow point? Who could not use that path?

What it shows

The detour starts with stairs, so Sami cannot use it.

One question I still have

Is there another way around with no stairs?

Evidence BRoute map

Sami and Mateo’s route map

1. Home to the corner of Elm Street and 4th Avenue: sidewalk clear. 2. Northeast curb ramp: blocked by construction fencing. 3. Bus stop: next bus in 12 minutes. 4. Bus to the parks department building. 5. Workshop entrance and room: not yet checked.

Look closely: Which stage is blocked, and which stage has nobody checked?

What it shows

The trip has five stages. The ramp at stage 2 is blocked.

One question I still have

Can Sami get into the workshop room?
165
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CFlyer

The workshop flyer

The flyer reads “Free Community Workshop Series. Tuesdays, 5–7 p.m., Parks Department Annex. All welcome! Questions? Call the front desk.” It gives no information about accessible entrances or how to request access.

Look closely: What does the flyer tell someone who needs to request access?

What it shows

The workshop is free, on Tuesdays, and says “All welcome!”

One question I still have

How would Sami ask for access?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know if there is a way around with no stairs or how long the ramp stays blocked. We don’t know if Sami can get into the workshop room.

Notes

166
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: program access

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics. Then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

Program access is an ADA rule that a city's services, taken as a whole, must be usable by people with disabilities. The U.S. Department of Justice explains that Title II of the ADA covers state and local government programs and services. Program access generally does not require every older building to be accessible. For example, a city can relocate a service to an accessible place. Existing buildings and new construction have different requirements.

Access covers the whole visit: finding the information, getting there, going in, taking part and leaving. A barrier is something that blocks or limits a person from taking part. Sami meets one barrier at the curb ramp. The workshop flyer could be another, because it gives no way to request access. The Justice Department’s guide for cities also covers curb ramps during street work.

One video of one corner cannot show whether a city is following the law. It can show what happened, where and when. An ADA coordinator is the staff member a government names to handle disability access questions and complaints. That office can say whether an accessible detour exists. Before you report a barrier someone else faces, ask them what they want said.

Professional standards

Real sourceAmerican Society for Public Administration (ASPA)

ASPA Code of Ethics: 3. Promote democratic participation

“respect and assist all persons in their dealings with public organizations”

In plain words: ASPA members in public service agree to help every person use public programs and services.

Question: The parks flyer says “All welcome!” with no access information. What should it add so Sami can request access?

Your answer

The flyer should add ___.

The flyer should add how to ask for access and who to call about it.
167
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceHISTORYJuly 24, 2020

When the ‘Capitol Crawl’ Dramatized the Need for Americans with Disabilities Act

A throwback to March 12, 1990, when activists climbed the Capitol steps to show what stairs do to access. The ADA was signed that July.

Real sourceTHE CITYOctober 3, 2025

North Bronx Subway Station to Get Elevators, Nearly a Decade After ADA Lawsuit

A lawsuit pushed a transit agency to add elevators, showing how the ADA makes access a public duty.

Notes

168
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownMark whether each piece of evidence supports or narrows each claim. Then write whose view is missing. About 8 minutes.

Sort what the evidence supports. Which claim can you make today, which one needs more facts, and who can supply them?

EvidenceClaim 1The city is breaking the ADA.Claim 2On Tuesday, the posted detour did not work for a wheelchair user.
1 Photo: the northeast curb ramp blocked by fencing on Tuesday at 4:05 p.m.
Narrows
Supports
2 Detour sign points to a path that starts with stairs
Neither
Supports
3 DOJ: Title II requires program access, not every facility to be accessible
Narrows
Neither

Still open

  • Is there another accessible route to the bus and the workshop? Ask the ADA coordinator.

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The city’s view is missing. I would ask if there is a way around the ramp with no stairs.
169
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what Mateo should do and explain why. Then fix the two marked phrases. About 8 minutes.

Mateo wants people to know about the blocked corner. What should he do?

  • A Post the video with a caption saying the city is breaking the ADA.

  • B Send the ADA coordinator the corner, the time, the detour sign and one question, if Sami agrees.

  • C Skip the report if Sami finds another bus stop that works today.

Why I chose it

B. It tells the city what they saw and asks a question. It also lets Sami decide if she is part of it.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

1 The city is breaking the ADA. There is construction blocking the ramp and a wheelchair user I know couldn’t get to the bus. We were standing there for like ten minutes trying to figure out another way and the sign just pointed to stairs. My friend almost missed her workshop because of it. This is discrimination and completely illegal. Nobody even cares about this. You need to 2 fix every ramp in the neighborhood right away or we will post the photos everywhere.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

The ramp at Elm Street and 4th Avenue was blocked. The sign pointed to stairs.

Rewrite phrase 2

Is there a way around with no stairs while the ramp is blocked?
170
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Map Sami’s trip from home to the workshop and mark each place something could go wrong.

Use: The route map, the detour sign description and Sami’s conversation.

You’ll make: Annotated map plus 3–4 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read the route map in Evidence B. Number the five stages of Sami’s trip.
  2. Mark the stage where the ramp is blocked.
  3. Read the detour sign in Evidence A. Circle where its arrow points.
  4. Decide whether Sami can use that detour. Look for stairs.
  5. Write 3 or 4 sentences in the Your draft box, with one question for the city.
  6. Check that your question matches what Sami wants.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–4 sentences with the frame “At __, the barrier was __. We could ask __.”
  • Say it: Walk a partner through Sami’s trip stage by stage, pointing to where something could go wrong and what you would ask the city.
  • Show it: Mark the printed route map with a symbol at each barrier and a question mark wherever you need more information.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

171
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

The stage where the ramp is blocked

Stage 2, the northeast curb ramp at Elm Street and 4th Avenue

Where the detour sign points

To a path that starts with a flight of stairs

A stage nobody has checked

Stage 5, the workshop entrance and room

Your draft

Your sentences, 3 or 4

At ___, the barrier was ___. We could ask ___.

At the corner of Elm Street and 4th Avenue, the barrier was a blocked curb ramp. The detour sign points to stairs, so Sami cannot use it. Nobody has checked the workshop entrance yet. We could ask the city if there is a way around with no stairs.
172
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your map mark at least three stages of the trip?

    YesNo
  • Does it describe the blocked ramp correctly?

    YesNo
  • Does it ask the city one question?

    YesNo
  • Did you check your question against what Sami wants?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo location or time.General description.Specific location, time and observation.Specific observation plus what remains unknown.
ReasoningDeclares a violation.Mixes observation and conclusion.Separates observation from legal question.Connects observation to program access and asks the right office.
Audience & purposeThreatening or vague.Polite but no clear request.Specific, answerable request to the right office.Request plus how to report future issues.
RevisionNo change.Tone only.Adds specifics and removes the legal conclusion.Explains how each change helps the city act and respects Sami.
173
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed “the city broke the law” to a question, because one video cannot show that.

Notes

174
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then finish My take. About 8 minutes.

1 Which barrier on Sami’s trip would a photo miss?

A photo would miss the flyer. It does not say how to ask for access.

2 What is the difference between recording a barrier and making Sami the content?

Recording the barrier shows the ramp and the sign. Making Sami the content means filming her without asking.

3 Construction is temporary, but the detour affects people now. What should a city do to keep routes usable during repairs?

The city should post a detour with no stairs and say how long the ramp will be closed.

My take

I think Sami and Mateo should ___ because ___.

I think Sami and Mateo should ask the city for a way around because the sign points to stairs.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The route map changed my first guess. It shows nobody checked the workshop room.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is how long the ramp will be blocked.
175
Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 10: Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?

In this case, construction blocks a curb ramp on a young woman’s route to a city workshop, and the detour points to stairs. Your student studied what one video can show, then wrote a question for the city office responsible for access.

Questions to talk about

  1. Who in our town takes care of sidewalks and curb ramps?
  2. What details make a report to the city easy to act on?
  3. Why should you ask someone before you post a video of them?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

176

Lesson 11Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?

Content note

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read a story in which Jordy and Gia work the same Saturday event. Jordy is paid $16.50 an hour, and Gia is paid $18.00. They compare the pay statements and the crew schedule, which lists Gia as shift lead, with federal pages on pay discrimination and on discussing wages. They then draft Jordy’s message to the supervisor asking how the rates were set.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a number or a word in a short document
  • tell what a document says from what they guess
  • write a complete question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • compare two workers’ hours, duties, titles and rates in a chart
  • name one fair reason and one unfair reason that could explain a pay difference
  • write one respectful question that asks for the reason instead of guessing it

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A, B and C, one set per pair
  • A blank four-column chart: duties, hours, title, rate

The task in this edition

Task: Make a side-by-side chart of Jordy’s and Gia’s work, then write one question Jordy could ask.

Students make: Chart plus a one-sentence question

Pacing

Opener (page 177): 5 min. Short on time: 5 min.

Key terms (pages 178 and 179): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 182): 10 min. Short on time: 10 min.

Look at the evidence (page 183): 5 min. Short on time: 5 min.

Key idea (pages 184 and 185): 6 min. Short on time: 2 min. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 186): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Do the first row together and stop.

Practice (page 187): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Pacing, continued

Your task (pages 188 and 189): 12 min. Short on time: 12 min.

Check your work (pages 190 and 191): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Score the questions yourself with the rubric.

Questions to discuss (pages 192 and 193): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Use question 2 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 194): at home.

Periods: full chapter 71 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

Plan 11

Lesson 11Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 11 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

Standards, continued

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

Codes of ethics

  • SHRM Code of Ethics: Fairness and Justice
  • SHRM Code of Ethics: Use of Information
  • IABC Code of Ethics for Professional Communicators: “I protect confidential information”

Heat map

Opener (page 177): Medium

Key terms (pages 178 and 179): Low

Look at the evidence (page 182): Low

Look at the evidence (page 183): Low

Key idea (pages 184 and 185): Low

Sort the evidence (page 186): Low

Practice (page 187): Medium

Your task (pages 188 and 189): Low

Check your work (pages 190 and 191): Low

Try it at your school

Know how pay decisions are made where you work.

  • Ask for your pay rate and how it’s set in writing when you start a job
  • Keep your own record of hours and duties

Try it at your school, continued

  • Talk with a trusted adult or counselor if something seems off
  • Look up your state labor department’s pay-equity page

Who to ask: Supervisor or HR, school counselor, state labor department, the EEOC’s public information line

Safety: Don’t share coworkers’ pay information without their permission. Deadlines apply to formal complaints, so ask a qualified adviser early if you think there’s a legal issue.

Sources

  • NPR, “The U.S. national women’s soccer team wins $24 million in equal pay settlement,” February 22, 2022
  • NPR, “Federal Judge Dismisses U.S. Women’s Soccer Team’s Equal Pay Claim,” May 2, 2020
  • U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC), “Pay Discrimination,” No date listed
  • National Labor Relations Board (NLRB), “Your Right to Discuss Wages,” No date listed
Plan 11b
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?

Jordy and Gia worked the same Saturday event, but Gia’s pay rate is $1.50 an hour higher, and Jordy wants to know why.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline the two pay rates and the job title on the schedule. About 5 minutes.

Mateo attaches an arrival notice at the Common Room entrance. Gia points to the doorway, and Jordy checks what a visitor will see.

Your role: You’re the one who lines up both shifts side by side before Jordy writes to Dana. New skill: Compare two cases on the same terms.

What happened

Jordy and Gia work event shifts for the same company. They both worked a Saturday event from 3 to 11 p.m. Both helped with setup and closing, and Jordy also ran the caption and audio check.

They were paid the following Friday. On Sunday afternoon, Jordy and Gia compare pay statements. Jordy’s lists eight hours at $16.50 an hour. Gia’s lists $18.00 an hour for the same event.

The crew schedule lists Gia as “shift lead,” but it does not say what that job includes. That day, Gia opened up and handled one guest issue. She does not know if that explains the $1.50 difference. Gia is fine with Jordy knowing her rate. But she does not want her statement posted.

Jordy wants to ask Dana, the supervisor, how rates are set. Jordy will not post anything before Dana answers.

Your question: Why is Gia paid more than Jordy for the same event, and how should Jordy ask about it?

177
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess about the pay difference. About 6 minutes.

Compensation Compensation is all the pay and benefits a worker receives, including hourly rates, bonuses and overtime.

En español: compensación

In this case: Jordy’s statement shows eight hours at $16.50 an hour, and Gia’s shows $18.00. The statements show the rates but not how they were set.

Equal Pay Act The Equal Pay Act is a federal law from 1963 that requires equal pay for men and women who do equal work.

En español: Ley de Igualdad Salarial

In this case: The Equal Pay Act covers pay differences based on sex, not every difference. Different job duties, such as a real shift-lead role, can be a lawful reason.

Title VII Title VII is part of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. It bans job discrimination based on race, color, religion, sex or national origin.

En español: Título VII

In this case: Title VII covers pay decisions based on race, color, religion, sex or national origin. No document shows how Jordy’s rate was set.

Who is involved

Jordy

Worked setup through close

“Three to eleven, setup to close, and I ran the caption and audio check. $16.50 an hour. Gia’s says $18.00.”

Gia

Listed as shift lead

“I only found out I make more because Jordy showed me theirs. The schedule calls me shift lead. Nobody told me what that pays for.”

178
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, why do you think Gia is paid more than Jordy?

I think Gia is paid more because ___.

I think Gia is paid more because she is the shift lead.

Notes

179
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Same event, different rate

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Compensation: Compensation is all the pay and benefits a worker receives, including hourly rates, bonuses and overtime.
  • Equal Pay Act: The Equal Pay Act is a federal law from 1963 that requires equal pay for men and women who do equal work.
  • Title VII: Title VII is part of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. It bans job discrimination based on race, color, religion, sex or national origin.
  • Gross pay: Gross pay is the money you earn before any taxes or other deductions are taken out.

The story: Comparing pay statements

Jordy and Gia work event shifts for the same company. Last Saturday, they both worked an event from 3 to 11 p.m. Both helped set up and close. Jordy also ran the caption and audio check.

On Sunday afternoon, they compare pay statements. Jordy’s says eight hours at $16.50 an hour. Gia’s says $18.00 an hour for the same event. “Wait what,” Gia texts. “Is it because I’m shift lead?”

The crew schedule does list Gia as “shift lead.” But it never says what that job includes. That day, Gia opened up and handled one guest issue. She honestly does not know if that explains the $1.50 difference.

Jordy wants to ask Dana, the supervisor, how rates are set. Jordy will not post anything before Dana answers. Your role is to line up both shifts side by side before Jordy writes to Dana.

Stop and think. What facts are the same for Jordy and Gia, and what facts are different?

Lining up the facts

In Lesson 5, you read a pay statement line by line. You learned that gross pay is the money you earn before any taxes or other deductions are taken out. Jordy’s gross pay for the event is $132.00, which is 8 hours times $16.50.

180
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lining up the facts, continued

Now compare the two jobs on the same terms. The hours match. Setup and closing match. Jordy did the caption and audio check. Gia had the shift lead title, opened up and handled one guest issue. Compensation is all the pay and benefits a worker receives, including hourly rates, bonuses and overtime. A job title, extra duties or more experience can explain a pay difference. So can a mistake. The statements show the rates. They do not show how the rates were set.

In Lesson 10, you learned to take a question to the office responsible. Here, that is Dana. Jordy’s message can say what Jordy knows for sure: the hours, the duties and Jordy’s own rate. Then it can ask one clear question: what does “shift lead” include, and how are rates set?

Gia is fine with Jordy knowing her rate. But she does not want her statement posted anywhere. That choice belongs to Gia, and posting Jordy’s own pay is Jordy’s choice.

Stop and think. What could explain the $1.50 difference?

The laws and a famous pay fight

Two federal laws limit how employers set pay. The Equal Pay Act is a federal law from 1963 that requires equal pay for men and women who do equal work. Title VII is part of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. It bans job discrimination based on race, color, religion, sex or national origin.

In 2022, the U.S. women’s national soccer team won a $24 million settlement in its equal pay fight (NPR, February 22, 2022). The whole fight turned on what to compare. Jordy’s question starts the same way.

Stop and think. Why does Jordy want Dana’s answer before posting anything?

Sources

Real sourceNPRFebruary 22, 2022

The U.S. national women’s soccer team wins $24 million in equal pay settlement

181
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, fill in both boxes. About 10 minutes.

Evidence APay statement

Jordy’s pay statement

Event crew, Saturday. Hours: 8.0 at $16.50. Gross pay for the event: $132.00.

Look closely: Multiply the hours by the rate. Does it match the gross pay?

What it shows

Jordy worked 8 hours at $16.50 an hour and earned $132.00.

One question I still have

How did the company decide Jordy’s rate?

Evidence BWork schedule

The crew schedule

Saturday event, 3:00–11:00 p.m. Crew: Gia (shift lead), Jordy and two other crew members. Setup, 3:00–5:00: all crew. Caption and audio check: Jordy. Closing, 10:00–11:00: all crew.

Look closely: Circle “shift lead.” Does the schedule say what that job includes?

What it shows

Gia is shift lead. All crew did setup and closing. Jordy did the caption and audio check.

One question I still have

What does a shift lead do?
182
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CText messages

Jordy and Gia compare notes

Sunday, 1:15 p.m.

Gia: I’m fine with you knowing my rate. I just don’t want my statement posted anywhere.

Jordy: Got it. Did you do anything different as shift lead?

Gia: I opened up and handled one guest issue. Honestly, I don’t know if that’s why. Let’s ask Dana.

Look closely: What does Gia agree to share, and what does she ask Jordy not to do?

What it shows

Gia is fine with Jordy knowing her rate. She opened up and handled a guest issue.

One question I still have

Does opening up and one guest issue explain the $1.50?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know what a shift lead is supposed to do, how the company sets pay, or what the other crew members earn.
183
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: equal pay

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics. Then answer the question in the box. About 6 minutes.

Before you can say why Jordy is paid less, you need to know what each job included. Compensation is all the pay and benefits a worker receives, including hourly rates, bonuses and overtime. A job title, extra duties or more experience can explain a pay difference. So can a mistake. The pay statements show the rates, but they do not show how the rates were set.

Federal laws limit the reasons an employer can use to set pay. The Equal Pay Act is a federal law from 1963 that requires equal pay for men and women who do equal work. Title VII is part of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. It bans job discrimination based on race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Both laws apply to covered employers, and the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) enforces them. A legitimate reason, such as different job duties, can lawfully explain a pay difference.

Talking about pay is protected too. The National Labor Relations Board (NLRB) says most private-sector workers have a right to discuss pay with coworkers. That right holds with or without a union. It does not make Gia’s pay statement Jordy’s to share. Jordy can ask Dana how rates are set without naming Gia’s rate.

Professional standards

Real sourceSociety for Human Resource Management (SHRM)

SHRM Code of Ethics: Fairness and Justice

“Develop, administer, and advocate policies and procedures that foster fair, consistent and equitable treatment for all.”

In plain words: HR professionals who belong to SHRM agree to use workplace policies that treat workers fairly and consistently.

Question: The schedule lists Gia as shift lead. What written policy would show whether that title explains the higher rate?

Your answer

Jordy would need a written ___ that says ___.

Jordy would need a written job description that says what a shift lead does and what it pays.
184
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceNPRFebruary 22, 2022

The U.S. national women's soccer team wins $24 million in equal pay settlement

A real ‘same work, different pay’ dispute that ended in a settlement and a promise of equal rates.

Real sourceNPRMay 2, 2020

Federal Judge Dismisses U.S. Women’s Soccer Team’s Equal Pay Claim

Why the claim was first dismissed: the judge compared how the contracts were structured. What you compare shapes the answer.

Notes

185
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownLine up the accounts in the diagram. Then name one view that is missing. About 8 minutes.

Line up the accounts. Where do they agree, where do they differ, and which difference could be a legitimate factor? What would you need to find out before calling it unfair?

Account 1

Jordy’s record: 8 hours, setup, caption and audio check, closing, $16.50

Account 2

Gia’s account: same hours, setup and closing, opened up and handled one guest issue, $18.00

Account 3

The schedule: Gia listed as shift lead, with no description of the role

Where they agree

Both worked the same event, the same hours, and setup and closing.

Where they differ

Title and rate: shift lead at $18.00 versus crew at $16.50

Check: Ask the supervisor how rates are set and what the shift-lead role requires

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

Dana’s view is missing. I would ask Dana what a shift lead does and how pay is set.
186
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what Jordy should do first and explain why. Then fix the two marked lines. About 6 minutes.

Jordy’s statement shows $16.50 an hour. Gia’s shows $18.00 for the same Saturday event, and the schedule lists her as “shift lead.” What should Jordy do first?

  • A Tell the rest of the crew that Gia is paid more for the same work.

  • B Compare what each of them did, find out what “shift lead” means and ask Dana how rates are set.

  • C Let it go, because an employer can set any pay rate it chooses.

Why I chose it

B. Jordy finds out what “shift lead” means before blaming anyone. It also keeps Gia’s statement private.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Hi, I found out Gia makes more than me and we did the exact same work so 1 this is discrimination. I know it’s because of who I am. I want the same rate as her starting now or I’m going to post about it everywhere so people know how this company treats workers. 2 I have her pay stub as proof. I’ve worked here longer than some people and I always show up on time. Let me know by tomorrow. Jordy

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

I want to know why my rate is lower.

Rewrite phrase 2

My own statement shows $16.50 an hour for the same event.
187
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Make a side-by-side chart of Jordy’s and Gia’s work, then write one question Jordy could ask.

Use: The two statements and the event schedule.

You’ll make: Chart plus a one-sentence question

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read Jordy’s pay statement in Evidence A. Circle the hours and the rate.
  2. Read the schedule in Evidence B. Underline each person’s job title and duties.
  3. Fill in the chart for Jordy and for Gia: duties, hours, title and rate.
  4. Circle the row where Jordy and Gia are different.
  5. Write one question for Dana in the Your draft box. Do not guess the reason.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write one question under your chart with the frame “Both __. But __. I want to ask __.”
  • Say it: Tell a partner one way Jordy’s and Gia’s work was the same and one way it might have been different, then say Jordy’s question aloud.
  • Show it: Complete the side-by-side chart with icons for duties, hours, title and rate, and circle the row that is different.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

188
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

What is the same for Jordy and Gia

Both ___.

Both worked 3 to 11 p.m. and did setup and closing.

What is different

But ___.

But Gia is shift lead at $18.00. Jordy gets $16.50.

Your draft

Jordy’s question for Dana

I want to ask ___.

I want to ask Dana how pay rates are set for event crew and what a shift lead does.

Notes

189
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your chart show the hours, duties, title and rate for each person?

    YesNo
  • Does your question ask for the reason instead of guessing it?

    YesNo
  • Does your question keep Gia’s pay statement private?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceRelies on assumption.Mentions the gap only.Cites duties, hours and rate.Cites records and acknowledges what isn’t known.
ReasoningDeclares discrimination.Assumes the reason.Asks for criteria before concluding.Identifies possible legitimate factors to test.
Audience & purposeThreatens or exposes coworkers.Polite but vague.Specific question to the right person.Specific question that protects coworkers’ privacy.
RevisionNo change.Tone only.Replaces conclusion with a question.Explains how changes protect Jordy and get an answer.
190
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed my question about Gia’s pay to a question about how rates are set, because Gia’s pay is hers to share.

Notes

191
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then complete each sentence frame below the questions. About 8 minutes.

1 What information could explain the $1.50 difference, and what might challenge that explanation?

The shift-lead title could explain it. But the schedule doesn’t say what a shift lead does, and Gia only opened up and handled one guest issue.

2 Whose choice is it to make Jordy’s pay public, and why?

It is Jordy’s choice, because it is Jordy’s own pay. Gia’s pay is Gia’s choice.

3 What answer from Dana would satisfy Jordy, and what answer would not?

A clear reason, such as a list of what a shift lead does, would help. An answer with no reason would not.

My take

I think Jordy should ___ because ___.

I think Jordy should ask Dana what a shift lead does because the schedule doesn’t say.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The text messages changed my guess. Gia only opened up and handled one guest issue.
192
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

My take, continued

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is what the two other crew members are paid.

Notes

193
Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 11: Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?

In this case, two friends who worked the same event find out one is paid $1.50 more an hour. Your student compared their records and wrote a respectful message asking a supervisor how pay rates are set.

Questions to talk about

  1. What questions could someone ask about pay when starting a new job?
  2. Why might a person want to keep their pay private?
  3. What makes a question to a boss sound respectful?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

194

Lesson 12Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?

Content note

The news sources include 2026 student walkouts against federal immigration enforcement, which grew after federal agents fatally shot two people in Minneapolis. Preview them, and keep discussion on the legal questions in Anika’s case.

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read about Anika, a high school junior whose poster asks students to wear blue Thursday to keep the library open at lunch. They compare her poster, a posting policy and a group chat about a walkout with a summary of Tinker v. Des Moines (1969). They then compare the fact patterns and write two questions for a school contact about the posting policy.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • retell the main events of a short summary
  • find a rule in a short document
  • write sentences that compare two examples

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • describe the facts of Tinker v. Des Moines accurately

Objectives, continued

  • name one way the armbands and the wear-blue plan are alike and one way they differ
  • explain why walking out raises a different question than wearing blue

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • The U.S. Courts Tinker summary, read aloud
  • Picture cards: armband, blue shirt, poster, empty classroom

The task in this edition

Task: Make a two-column chart comparing the Tinker armbands with Anika’s wear-blue plan, then explain one way they’re alike and one way they’re different.

Students make: Chart plus 3–5 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 195): 5 min. Short on time: 5 min.

Key terms (pages 196 and 197): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 200): 10 min. Short on time: 10 min.

Look at the evidence (page 201): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read Evidence C aloud. Students fill in only its “What it shows” box.

Pacing, continued

Key idea (pages 202 and 203): 8 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip In the news.

Sort the evidence (page 204): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 205): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Your task (pages 206 to 208): 15 min. Short on time: 15 min.

Check your work (pages 209 and 210): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Check the charts yourself.

Questions to discuss (page 211): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Use question 3 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 212): at home.

Periods: full chapter 76 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

Plan 12

Lesson 12Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 12 plan, continued

Standards, continued

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

Standards, continued

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.8.6-8 Analyze the ideas in the founding documents of the United States and how they shape the political system. In this case: Students analyze how the First Amendment shapes student life at public schools.

Codes of ethics

  • ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct: Rule 2.1 Advisor
  • PRSA Code of Ethics: Disclosure of Information
  • AIGA Standards of Professional Practice: The designer’s responsibility to the public

Heat map

Opener (page 195): Medium

Key terms (pages 196 and 197): Low

Look at the evidence (page 200): Low

Look at the evidence (page 201): Low

Key idea (pages 202 and 203): Medium

Sort the evidence (page 204): Low

Heat map, continued

Practice (page 205): Medium

Your task (pages 206 to 208): Low

Check your work (pages 209 and 210): Low

Try it at your school

Read your school’s expression policy before you print.

  • Find your student handbook’s section on posting, dress or expression
  • Write down which spaces allow student posters and whether approval is needed
  • Make student-made materials clearly student-made, with no school logo
  • Bring questions to student council or an advisor before planning an action

Who to ask: Student council advisor, a civics or government teacher, an assistant principal

Safety: Don’t pressure classmates to join a protest or skip class. Talk with a trusted adult before any action that could lead to discipline.

Sources

  • U.S. Courts, “Facts and Case Summary: Tinker v. Des Moines,” No date listed
  • U.S. Courts, “Fictional Scenario: Tinker v. Des Moines,” No date listed
Plan 12b

Lesson 12Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 12 plan, continued

Sources, continued

  • Legal Information Institute, Cornell Law School, “Tinker v. Des Moines Independent Community School District, 393 U.S. 503 (1969),” 1969
Plan 12c
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?

Anika’s poster asks her school to keep the library open at lunch, and now someone in her group chat suggests a walkout.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline each plan: the poster, wearing blue and the walkout. About 5 minutes.

Anika records a voice memo while Mateo listens beside a phone on a small tripod.

Your role: You’re the one who compares Tinker with each action before anyone says “can’t touch us.” New skill: Apply a precedent by comparing fact patterns.

What happened

Anika is a junior at a public high school. She wants the school library to stay open at lunch. On Tuesday afternoon, she prints a poster that says “KEEP OUR LIBRARY OPEN AT LUNCH. Wear blue Thursday.”

Mateo did the photo and layout. He put a photo of the school’s sign and logo across the top. The poster does not name Anika or any student group. The student handbook says posters need approval from the main office and the name of the student or group responsible.

On Wednesday night, someone in the group chat suggests a walkout if the school takes the poster down. The message says a 1969 Supreme Court case, Tinker v. Des Moines, means the school “can’t touch us.” Anika never suggested a walkout.

Your question: How far does Tinker cover the poster, the wear-blue plan and the walkout, and what facts are missing?

195
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Precedent A precedent is an earlier court decision that judges use as a guide in similar later cases.

En español: precedente

In this case: Tinker v. Des Moines (1969) guides Anika’s case only as far as the facts match: quiet expression at a public school.

Fact pattern A fact pattern is the specific set of facts in a situation that a rule is applied to.

En español: conjunto de hechos

In this case: Anika lists each plan’s action, place, timing and rule: the poster on a school board, wearing blue on Thursday and leaving class.

Substantial disruption Substantial disruption is the standard from Tinker v. Des Moines: a public school may limit speech that would seriously disrupt school activities.

En español: alteración sustancial

In this case: Wearing blue on Thursday is quiet, like the armbands. Leaving class is conduct under the attendance rule, which Tinker does not settle.

Who is involved

Anika

Made the poster

“My poster says keep the library open at lunch, and wear blue Thursday. Now the chat says we walk out. I never said walk out.”

Mateo

Did the photo and layout

“I put the school sign across the top because it looked good. Now it reads like the school is announcing it. It isn’t.”

196
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, can the school do anything about the poster or the walkout?

I think the school ___ because ___.

I think the school can’t do anything because students have free speech.

Notes

197
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

The poster, the blue shirts and the walkout

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • Precedent: A precedent is an earlier court decision that judges use as a guide in similar later cases.
  • Fact pattern: A fact pattern is the specific set of facts in a situation that a rule is applied to.
  • Substantial disruption: Substantial disruption is the standard from Tinker v. Des Moines: a public school may limit speech that would seriously disrupt school activities.
  • Claim: A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.
  • Framing: Framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward.

The story: A poster about lunch

Anika is a junior at a public high school. She wants the school library to stay open at lunch. On Tuesday afternoon, she prints a poster: “KEEP OUR LIBRARY OPEN AT LUNCH. Wear blue Thursday.” Mateo did the photo and layout. He put a photo of the school’s sign and logo across the top.

On Wednesday night, a message appears in the group chat: “If they take the poster down we walk out Thursday. Tinker says they can’t touch us.” Someone replies, “Wait, wear blue AND walk out??”

Anika is surprised. “I never asked anyone to leave class,” she says. Mateo notices something else. The school logo makes the poster look like the school made it. He decides to redo the photo.

Your role is to compare Tinker with each action before anyone says “can’t touch us.”

Stop and think. Why did Anika’s poster turn into a walkout plan in the group chat?

One real case, three actions

The chat mentions a real Supreme Court case, Tinker v. Des Moines, from 1969. A precedent is an earlier court decision that judges use as a guide in similar later cases. In Tinker, public-school students wore black armbands to protest the Vietnam War. The school suspended them. The Supreme Court ruled for the students.

198
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

One real case, three actions, continued

Substantial disruption is the standard from Tinker v. Des Moines: a public school may limit speech that would seriously disrupt school activities. The Court said a mere fear of disruption was not enough.

A precedent guides a new case only as far as the facts match. A fact pattern is the specific set of facts in a situation that a rule is applied to. In Lesson 11, you compared two jobs on the same terms. Now compare Tinker with each action. Wearing blue is quiet, like the armbands. A walkout is different, because students leave class, and the school’s attendance rule covers that. The poster raises its own question. The handbook says posters need office approval and a student’s name. Anika’s poster has no name. “That part’s on me,” she says.

“Tinker says they can’t touch us” is a claim, a word from Lesson 1. It goes much further than the case does. And Mateo’s logo is a kind of framing, also from Lesson 1. It brings the school forward as the speaker, even though the school did not make the poster.

Stop and think. Which action matches Tinker’s facts most closely: the poster, wearing blue or the walkout?

Student speech today

In Tinker, the Court wrote that students do not “shed their constitutional rights to freedom of speech or expression at the schoolhouse gate” (Legal Information Institute, 1969). In 2026, students in several states walked out of class. Some schools counted it as an unexcused absence, and one high school gave one-day suspensions (Chalkbeat Indiana, February 11, 2026).

Stop and think. Why might it matter whether a poster looks like the school made it?

Sources

Real sourceLegal Information Institute, Cornell Law School1969

Tinker v. Des Moines Independent Community School District, 393 U.S. 503 (1969)

Real sourceChalkbeat IndianaFebruary 11, 2026

How schools in Marion County responded to anti-ICE student protests

199
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, fill in both boxes. About 10 minutes.

Evidence APoster

Anika’s poster, first version

Printed Tuesday, 3:15 p.m. The poster reads “KEEP OUR LIBRARY OPEN AT LUNCH. Wear blue Thursday.” A photo of the school’s sign and logo runs across the top. No student name or group appears anywhere on the poster.

Look closely: Cover the logo photo with your hand. Who seems to be speaking now?

What it shows

The poster asks to keep the library open and says to wear blue Thursday.

One question I still have

Did the main office approve the poster?

Evidence BHandbook policy

Student handbook, page 14

Students may post materials on the student bulletin boards outside the cafeteria and the library. Materials must be approved by the main office and must show the name of the student or group responsible.

Look closely: Underline the two requirements for every poster.

What it shows

Posters need office approval and the name of the student or group.

One question I still have

What happens to a poster without a name?
200
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CGroup chat

The walkout message

Wednesday, 9:02 p.m.

First message: “If they take the poster down we walk out Thursday. Tinker says they can’t touch us.

Reply: “Wait, wear blue AND walk out??

Look closely: Which part is a message, and which part is leaving class?

What it shows

One person wants a walkout. Another person is confused about the plan.

One question I still have

What does the attendance rule say about leaving class?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know what the attendance rule says, whether the office approved the poster, or what the school plans to do.

Notes

201
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: precedent

On your ownRead the key idea and the Professional standards card. Then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

A precedent is an earlier court decision that judges use as a guide in similar later cases. In Tinker v. Des Moines (1969), public-school students wore black armbands to protest the Vietnam War. The school suspended them, and the Supreme Court ruled for the students. The Court wrote that students do not “shed their constitutional rights to freedom of speech or expression at the schoolhouse gate.” It also said a mere fear of disruption was not enough to limit their expression.

A precedent guides a new case only as far as the facts match. Substantial disruption is the standard from Tinker v. Des Moines: a public school may limit speech that would seriously disrupt school activities. Wearing blue on Thursday is quiet, like the armbands. A walkout is different, because students leave class. The school’s attendance rule covers that conduct, and Tinker does not settle it.

The poster raises another question. It shows the school’s sign and logo but no student name, so it may look like the school is speaking. Schools have more control over speech that looks like it comes from the school. A fact pattern is the specific set of facts in a situation that a rule is applied to. Write a fact pattern for each action before you decide whether Tinker fits it.

Professional standards

Adapted from a real sourceAmerican Bar Association (ABA), Center for Professional Responsibility

ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct: Rule 2.1 Advisor

Summary: Summary, not a quotation: in representing a client, a lawyer must use independent professional judgment and give candid advice. A lawyer may refer to moral, economic, social and political factors as well as the law.

In plain words: Lawyers must give their clients honest, independent advice, even when the client would rather hear something else.

Question: The chat says “Tinker says they can't touch us.” What would candid advice say about the walkout and attendance policy?

202
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

Honest advice would say ___.

Honest advice would say Tinker was about quiet armbands. Leaving class falls under the attendance rule.

In the news

Real sourcePBS NewsHourApril 28, 2021

Student free speech makes it to the Supreme Court in former high school cheerleader's case

Explains the Snapchat case the Court used to ask when a school can punish off-campus student speech.

Real sourcePBS NewsHour (Associated Press)June 23, 2021

Supreme Court rules in favor of cheerleader who published critical social media post in First Amendment case

The 8-1 ruling protected the student but said schools may still act on some off-campus speech, like threats.

Notes

203
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownLink each piece of evidence to the claim it supports or challenges. Then name one missing view. About 8 minutes.

Test the slogan against the facts. Which evidence supports each claim, which challenges it, and which fact would you still need?

EvidenceClaim 1Tinker means nobody can face consequences for walking out.Claim 2The wear-blue plan closely matches Tinker’s facts.Claim 3The poster should carry a student byline instead of the school logo.
1 Tinker’s facts: silent armbands, no substantial disruption, a public school
Narrows
Supports
Neither
2 A walkout means leaving class, which falls under the attendance rule
Challenges
Neither
Neither
3 The logo photo makes the poster look like school-sponsored speech
Neither
Neither
Supports

Still open

  • What does the attendance policy say, and what process follows?

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The school’s view is missing. I would ask the main office if the poster is allowed.
204
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose the best reply to the group chat and explain why. Then fix the two marked lines. About 6 minutes.

Someone in Anika’s group chat says, “Tinker means nobody can get in trouble for walking out of class.” How should you respond?

  • A Agree, because Tinker protected students who protested at school.

  • B Disagree, because schools can make any rule they want about student speech.

  • C Say that the message and leaving class are separate questions, then check the attendance rule.

Why I chose it

C. The poster’s message and leaving class are two different questions. Checking the attendance rule comes next.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

No, the school can’t take it down because of Tinker v. Des Moines. In that case 1 the Supreme Court said students have free speech at school. The poster is just saying the library should stay open at lunch which is not hurting anybody. We even used a nice photo of the school sign so it looks professional. The principal would be breaking the law if he took it down. This is America and students have rights. Everyone should wear blue Thursday and 2 walk out if they try.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

Students have free speech at school unless it would seriously disrupt school.

Rewrite phrase 2

Wear blue Thursday. Walking out is a different question, because of the attendance rule.
205
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Make a two-column chart comparing the Tinker armbands with Anika’s wear-blue plan, then explain one way they’re alike and one way they’re different.

Use: The U.S. Courts Tinker summary (read aloud) and the poster description.

You’ll make: Chart plus 3–5 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

Notes

206
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

  1. Listen to the Tinker summary. Write what the students did and what the school did.
  2. Write Tinker’s rule in your own words: when can a public school limit student speech?
  3. Fill in the chart for the armbands and the wear-blue plan.
  4. Circle the plan that raises a different question: the walkout.
  5. Write 3 to 5 sentences in the Your draft box. Use “Both ___. But ___.”

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–5 sentences with the frame “Both __. But __.”
  • Say it: Explain to a partner one way the armbands and the wear-blue plan are alike and one way they are different, using the picture cards.
  • Show it: Build the two-column chart with the picture cards (armband, blue shirt, poster, empty classroom) and circle the one that raises a different question.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

What happened in Tinker

Students wore black armbands to protest a war. The school suspended them.

Tinker’s rule in my words

A public school may limit student speech that would seriously disrupt school.
207
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Armbands

Quiet, worn at school, and nobody left class.

Wear-blue plan

Quiet, worn at school, and nobody leaves class.

Your draft

Your sentences

Both ___. But ___.

Both the armbands and wearing blue are quiet messages that students wear at school. But the armbands protested a war, and wearing blue is about the library. The walkout is different, because students would leave class.

Notes

208
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your chart describe Tinker’s facts correctly?

    YesNo
  • Do you name one way the plans are alike and one way they differ?

    YesNo
  • Do you explain why the walkout is a different question?

    YesNo
  • Do you avoid saying students can say anything, or that they have no rights?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo case facts.Names Tinker without its rule.States Tinker’s facts and substantial-disruption test.Adds a second precedent or the walkout exercise accurately.
ReasoningTreats a slogan as the answer.Applies Tinker to everything.Compares facts and separates speech from conduct.Varies facts to show where the precedent stops fitting.
Audience & purposeTells others to break rules.Argues for one side only.Recommends a clear next question for the school.Balances effective expression with respect for process.
RevisionNo change.Softens tone only.Adds the rule’s limit and removes a legal conclusion.Explains how each edit makes the argument more precise.
209
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed my sentence that Tinker protects everything, because a walkout means leaving class.

Notes

210
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then complete each sentence frame below the questions. About 8 minutes.

1 Which changed fact would make Tinker a weaker comparison for the wear-blue plan?

If wearing blue stopped class or caused a big disruption, Tinker would fit less well.

2 Why might it matter whether a poster looks like it comes from the school?

People might think the school wrote it. Schools have more control over speech that looks like theirs.

3 If the poster had Anika’s name and no school logo, what would change?

It would follow the handbook’s name rule and clearly be Anika’s message.

My take

I think Tinker fits ___ best because ___.

I think Tinker fits the wear-blue plan best because it is quiet, like the armbands.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The handbook changed my first guess. The poster needs a name and office approval.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is what the attendance rule says about walkouts.
211
Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 12: When can a school limit what students say?

In this case, a student’s poster asks her school to keep the library open at lunch, and someone in a group chat suggests a walkout. Your student compared a 1969 Supreme Court case with each plan and wrote a short analysis.

Questions to talk about

  1. What rules do schools often have about posters or flyers?
  2. Why might a school treat wearing a color differently from leaving class?
  3. How can a reader tell who made a poster?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

212

Lesson 13Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?

Overview

Students read a story in which Dec’s box of replacement parts arrives half full of packaging. The crew’s “recyclable” cups turn out to be on the city’s not-accepted list. They place items from the supply list on EPA’s waste hierarchy and check them against the city’s accepted-materials list. They then fill in an event materials sheet and propose one change with a way to measure it.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • read numbers in a list
  • sort items into groups
  • write complete sentences that give a reason

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • list items and quantities from the screening supply list
  • place items on the waste hierarchy: reduce, reuse, recycle or throw away
  • choose one change and a way to count whether it worked
  • name one problem the change could cause

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A, B and C, one set per group

Materials, continued

  • A picture hierarchy and a sheet template with the first row filled in

The task in this edition

Task: Make a materials sheet for the next Common Room screening and pick one change to try.

Students make: Materials sheet plus 3–4 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 213): 5 min. Short on time: 5 min.

Key terms (pages 214 and 215): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 218): 10 min. Short on time: 10 min.

Look at the evidence (page 219): 5 min. Short on time: 5 min.

Key idea (pages 220 and 221): 6 min. Short on time: 2 min. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the rest.

Sort the evidence (pages 222 and 223): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 224): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Your task (pages 225 and 226): 15 min. Short on time: 15 min.

Pacing, continued

Check your work (pages 227 and 228): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Check the sheets yourself.

Questions to discuss (pages 229 and 230): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Use question 1 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 231): at home.

Periods: full chapter 73 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

Plan 13

Lesson 13Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 13 plan, continued

Standards, continued

W.7.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

Standards, continued

D2.Civ.13.6-8 Analyze the purposes, carrying out and effects of public policies in different settings. In this case: Students analyze the purposes and consequences of local waste policies.

D4.7.6-8 Assess what you and others can do about local, regional and global problems, considering strategies and likely outcomes. In this case: Students assess their capacity to act through a measurable event change.

Codes of ethics

  • FTC Green Guides (16 CFR Part 260): § 260.12 Recyclable claims
  • AIGA Standards of Professional Practice: The designer’s responsibility to society and the environment
  • IABC Code of Ethics for Professional Communicators: “I do not guarantee results”

Heat map

Opener (page 213): Low

Key terms (pages 214 and 215): Low

Look at the evidence (page 218): Low

Look at the evidence (page 219): Low

Key idea (pages 220 and 221): Medium

Sort the evidence (pages 222 and 223): Low

Heat map, continued

Practice (page 224): Medium

Your task (pages 225 and 226): Low

Check your work (pages 227 and 228): Low

Try it at your school

Change one thing before the next event.

  • Pick one repeated item at a school event: cups, flyers, plates
  • Count how many were used last time
  • Check your city’s recycling list and propose one reduction or reuse option
  • Count again after the event and share results with the organizers

Who to ask: Student council, custodial or facilities staff, a science teacher, your city’s sanitation or recycling office

Safety: Don’t sort through trash with your hands; unsafe items can be hidden. Make sure changes don’t leave out people who need disposable items.

Sources

  • NPR, “Starbucks To Eliminate Plastic Straws In Its Stores By 2020,” July 9, 2018
  • NPR, “Why People With Disabilities Want Bans On Plastic Straws To Be More Flexible,” July 11, 2018
Plan 13b

Lesson 13Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 13 plan, continued

Sources, continued

  • U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), “Sustainable Materials Management: Non-Hazardous Materials and Waste Management Hierarchy,” No date listed
Plan 13c
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?

The last Common Room screening used about 120 cups the city won’t recycle, and a box of parts arrived half full of packaging.

On your ownRead What happened. Underline the number of cups and what the city list says about them. About 5 minutes.

Anika, Dec and Sami react to a round of their tabletop game.

Your role: You’re the one who counts the cups before and after the change. New skill: Count a starting point before you claim a change works.

What happened

It is Tuesday in the theater shop. Dec opens a box of replacement parts. Three separate orders of small LED connectors and switches, placed over one week, arrived together. About half of the box is plastic air pillows and foam.

The supply list from last Friday’s screening at the Common Room shows a second problem. The crew used about 120 single-use cups. The cups are plastic-lined paper and labeled “recyclable.” But the city’s recycling list does not take plastic-lined paper cups.

Dec wants to fix how they order parts before anyone redoes the recycling sign. Anika tracks the parts and the budget. She agrees with Dec, but she wants numbers before anyone says a change saves money. Some people need a disposable cup or a straw, so any plan has to work for them too.

Your question: What could the crew change before the next screening, and how would they know it worked?

213
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example. Then write your first guess in the box. About 5 minutes.

Source reduction Source reduction is preventing waste before it is created, for example by buying less packaging.

En español: reducción en la fuente

In this case: Dec wants to combine the parts orders so less packaging arrives in the first place.

Reuse Reuse is using an item again instead of throwing it away after one use.

En español: reutilización

In this case: Borrowing washable cups from the bookshop is reuse. Washing uses water and someone’s time.

Local acceptance Local acceptance is the list of materials that your own city's recycling or compost program actually takes.

En español: materiales aceptados en tu ciudad

In this case: The cups say “recyclable,” but the crew’s city does not accept plastic-lined paper cups.

Who is involved

Dec

Opened the parts order

“Three orders of tiny connectors in one week. One big box, and half of it’s packaging.”

Anika

Tracks the parts and the budget

“I’m in. But if anyone says it saves money, I want the numbers. Right now we have one box and a guess.”

214
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, what is the best way for the crew to cut waste?

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should put out more recycling bins because the cups say “recyclable.”

Notes

215
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Half a box of air

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • Source reduction: Source reduction is preventing waste before it is created, for example by buying less packaging.
  • Reuse: Reuse is using an item again instead of throwing it away after one use.
  • Local acceptance: Local acceptance is the list of materials that your own city's recycling or compost program actually takes.
  • Proposal: A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet.
  • Trade-off: A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up.

The story: Air pillows and 120 cups

It is Tuesday in the theater shop. Dec opens a box of replacement parts. Three small orders of LED connectors and switches came together in one big box. About half of the box is plastic air pillows and foam. “Three tiny orders,” Dec says. “One giant box.”

There is a second problem. The supply list from last Friday’s screening at the Common Room shows the crew used about 120 single-use cups. The cups say “recyclable.” But the city’s recycling list does not take plastic-lined paper cups.

Dec wants to fix how they order parts before anyone redoes the recycling sign. Anika tracks the parts and the budget. She agrees with Dec, but she wants numbers before anyone says a change saves money. Some people need a disposable cup or a straw, so any plan has to work for them too.

Your role is to count the cups before and after the change.

Stop and think. Why does Dec want to fix the order form before the recycling sign?

Stopping waste before the bin

Source reduction is preventing waste before it is created, for example by buying less packaging. Dec’s idea is source reduction: order the parts together, not every time one breaks, and ask the supplier about packaging.

216
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Stopping waste before the bin, continued

Reuse is using an item again instead of throwing it away after one use. The bookshop has washable cups the crew could borrow. But reuse has costs too. Washing takes water and someone’s time.

A “recyclable” label does not tell you where a cup will go. Local acceptance is the list of materials that your own city’s recycling or compost program actually takes. In Lesson 9, you learned to check an official source for your own area. Here, that source is the city’s list. It does not take plastic-lined cups, and it does not take items labeled compostable either.

Anika’s plan is a test. At one screening, the crew borrows washable cups. They count what they use and compare it with 120. Water and washing time go on the sheet too. That makes it a fair proposal, a word from Lesson 4. A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet. It is also a trade-off: fewer cups in the trash, but more washing. The crew will keep some disposable cups and straws for people who ask.

Stop and think. Why is the word “recyclable” on the cups not enough?

Real companies, real straws

In 2018, Starbucks said it would phase out plastic straws in its stores by 2020 (NPR, July 9, 2018). Two days later, NPR reported that some people with disabilities need flexible plastic straws to drink (NPR, July 11, 2018). Cutting waste works best when it still works for everyone.

Stop and think. What would the crew need to count to know if washable cups worked?

Sources

Real sourceNPRJuly 9, 2018

Starbucks To Eliminate Plastic Straws In Its Stores By 2020

Real sourceNPRJuly 11, 2018

Why People With Disabilities Want Bans On Plastic Straws To Be More Flexible

217
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document. For each one, fill in both boxes. About 10 minutes.

Evidence ASupply list

Screening supply list, last Friday

Single-use cups (plastic-lined paper, labeled “recyclable”): about 120. Paper plates: 80. Printed flyers: 150. Paper straws, on request: 40. Folding chairs: borrowed from the bookshop.

Look closely: Which item did the crew use the most? Could it be reused?

What it shows

The screening used about 120 cups, 80 plates, 150 flyers and 40 straws.

One question I still have

Where did the cups go after the screening?

Evidence BDelivery

The parts order

Delivered Tuesday to the theater shop. Three separate orders of small LED connectors and switches, placed over one week, arrived together. They came in one full box, about half of it plastic air pillows and foam around tiny parts.

Look closely: How many orders came in this one box? Why does that matter?

What it shows

Three small orders came in one big box. About half of it was packaging.

One question I still have

Would one order come with less packaging?
218
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CSanitation guide

City recycling list

Accepted in recycling: metal cans, glass bottles and jars, rigid plastic bottles and containers, flattened cardboard. Not accepted: plastic-lined paper cups, plastic bags and film, foam, items labeled compostable.

Look closely: Find the plastic-lined paper cups. Which list are they on?

What it shows

The city does not recycle plastic-lined paper cups, foam or compostable items.

One question I still have

Where do the items the city won’t accept go?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know how many washable cups the crew could borrow, how much time washing would need, or where the trash goes.

Notes

219
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: source reduction

On your ownRead the key idea and the Professional standards card. Then answer the question in the box. About 6 minutes.

Source reduction is preventing waste before it is created, for example by buying less packaging. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ranks ways to handle waste. Source reduction and reuse come first. Recycling and composting come next, then energy recovery, then treatment and disposal. The EPA also notes that no single approach fits every item or situation.

Reuse is using an item again instead of throwing it away after one use. Borrowing washable cups from the bookshop is one example. Reuse has costs too. Washing takes water and someone’s time, so a fair comparison counts those costs along with the cups.

A “recyclable” label does not tell you where an item will go. Local acceptance is the list of materials that your own city's recycling or compost program actually takes. The crew’s cups say “recyclable,” but their city’s list does not take plastic-lined paper cups. The list does not take items labeled compostable either. So the crew has to check the list before choosing any new cup.

Professional standards

Real sourceLaw or regulationFederal Trade Commission (FTC)

FTC Green Guides (16 CFR Part 260): § 260.12 Recyclable claims

“A product or package should not be marketed as recyclable unless it can be collected, separated, or otherwise recovered from the waste stream through an established recycling program”

In plain words: FTC guidance says a company should call a product recyclable only when recycling programs can collect and process it.

Question: The crew's city rejects plastic-lined paper cups. What else must you know before saying the “recyclable” label breaks the guide?

Your answer

I would need to know ___.

I would need to know if recycling programs in other places accept these cups. One city is not everywhere.
220
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceNPRJuly 9, 2018

Starbucks To Eliminate Plastic Straws In Its Stores By 2020

A throwback to a company cutting waste at the counter, before anything reached a bin.

Real sourceNPRSeptember 11, 2020

How Big Oil Misled The Public Into Believing Plastic Would Be Recycled

Investigation finding less than 10% of plastic has ever been recycled, which is why reduction comes first.

Notes

221
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownFollow each choice to its consequences in the diagram. Then name one view that is missing. About 8 minutes.

Follow each choice to its consequences, including new costs. Which consequence would you measure first, and what would count as success?

Keep buying “recyclable” single-use cups

  1. About 120 cups go to the trash because the city does not accept them

    Who is affected

    The city collection service and the neighborhoods near where waste ends up

Borrow washable cups and run a wash station

  1. Fewer cups in the trash, if people use the washable ones

    Who is affected

    Check: Count cups and bags after the next event and compare with last time

  2. New costs: water, washing time and volunteers

    Who is affected

    Check: Count cups and bags after the next event and compare with last time

Combine parts orders into one shipment

  1. Less packaging arrives before anything reaches a bin

    Who is affected

Notes

222
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The view of people who need a straw is missing. I would ask them what cup or straw works for them.

Notes

223
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose the plan the crew should try and explain why. Then fix the two marked lines. About 6 minutes.

The last screening used about 120 single-use cups, and the city’s recycling list does not take that type. Which plan should the crew try for the next screening?

  • A Compare a washable-cup option, washing time, cost, access and the city list, then test one change.

  • B Buy a different cup labeled “recyclable” and put up a clearer recycling sign.

  • C Stop offering disposable cups and straws, and ask everyone to bring their own.

Why I chose it

A. It compares the options before choosing. It also makes sure the plan works for people who need a disposable cup.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

We should make the screening zero waste. Everyone should bring their own cup and we’ll 1 ban all plastic. We can also put up posters that say “save the planet” so people remember to recycle. Recycling is the best thing you can do for the environment. This will be easy and 2 it will save money too. Last screening there were cups everywhere and the bins were overflowing by the end of the night. People will love it once they get used to it. Let’s start next week!

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

We will keep some cups and straws for people who need them.

Rewrite phrase 2

We will count the cups to see if it saves money.
224
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps. Fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Make a materials sheet for the next Common Room screening and pick one change to try.

Use: The EPA hierarchy graphic and the supply list.

You’ll make: Materials sheet plus 3–4 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Count the items on the supply list in Evidence A. Write the number for each.
  2. Place each item on the hierarchy: reduce, reuse, recycle or throw away.
  3. Check the city list in Evidence C. Does it accept the cups?
  4. Pick one change for the next screening.
  5. Write 3 or 4 sentences in the Your draft box. Say how you would count whether it worked.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–4 sentences with the frame “We use __. We could __. A problem might be __.”
  • Say it: Explain to your group which item you would change, what you would do instead and one problem your change might cause.
  • Show it: Draw the waste hierarchy as a staircase and place each item from the supply list on the step where it is now and the step it could move to.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

225
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Item I will change, and how many were used

Cups: about 120.

Where it is on the hierarchy now

Throw away. The city won’t recycle them.

My change

Borrow washable cups from the bookshop.

Your draft

Your sentences

We use ___. We could ___. A problem might be ___.

We use about 120 single-use cups at a screening. We could borrow washable cups from the bookshop. A problem might be that someone needs a disposable cup, so we would keep some. We would count the cups after the next screening and compare with 120.

Notes

226
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions and mark your level in each rubric row. Then write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your sheet list the items and how many were used?

    YesNo
  • Did you pick a reduce or reuse change?

    YesNo
  • Did you name a problem the change could cause?

    YesNo
  • Did you say how you would count whether it worked?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo data.General claims about recycling.Uses quantities and local rules.Uses quantities, local rules and a before/after plan.
ReasoningTreats one fix as solving everything.Ignores trade-offs.Applies the hierarchy and names a trade-off.Weighs trade-offs including access and cost with a measurement boundary.
Audience & purposeCommands people.Relies on slogans.Specific change organizers can do.Specific, inclusive change with roles assigned.
RevisionNo change.Wording only.Narrows to a measurable change.Explains how narrowing makes success testable.
227
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I added “we would keep some” because some people need a disposable cup.

Notes

228
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question. Then complete each sentence frame below the questions. About 8 minutes.

1 Could a change that reduces waste create an access problem for someone, and how would you find out?

Yes. Someone who needs a straw or a disposable cup could be left out. You could ask people what they need.

2 How does “add more bins” define the problem differently from “order less packaging”?

The phrase “add more bins” means the problem is sorting. The phrase “order less packaging” means the problem starts when you buy.

3 What would the crew need to count before saying a change saves money?

They would count how many cups they use and how much washing costs.

My take

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should borrow washable cups because the city won’t recycle the old ones.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The city list changed my first guess. It does not accept the cups that say “recyclable.”
229
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

My take, continued

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is who will wash the cups.

Notes

230
Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 13: Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?

In this case, a group of friends learns that the cups from their movie night can’t be recycled in their city. Your student planned one change to cut waste before the next event and a way to count whether it worked.

Questions to talk about

  1. How could someone find out what their city or town recycles?
  2. What is one item people often throw away after a party or event?
  3. Why might a rule to cut waste need an exception for some people?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

231

Lesson 14Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?

Content note

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read a story in which Caio’s film recap uses a sampled track and a six-second TikTok clip. Mateo wants to post it tonight with a credit in the caption. They separate attribution, permission and fair use, then apply the U.S. Copyright Office’s four fair-use factors to the crew’s planned use. They then complete a rights log and propose a licensed or original alternative.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a detail in a short text and point to it
  • sort items into two groups and give a reason
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • list each part of a creative project that someone else made
  • explain the difference between giving credit and having permission
  • suggest music the crew is allowed to use

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A and C on half-pages, one set per pair
  • A list of music libraries your school allows students to use

The task in this edition

Task: Make a rights log for the crew’s short film and suggest a way to use music they’re allowed to use.

Students make: Rights log plus 3–4 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 232): 5 min. Short on time: 5 min.

Key terms (pages 233 and 234): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (pages 237 and 238): 12 min. Short on time: 12 min.

Key idea (pages 239 and 240): 8 min. Short on time: skip. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 241): 10 min. Short on time: 3 min. Do the first row together and stop.

Practice (pages 242 and 243): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Pacing, continued

Your task (pages 244 to 246): 20 min. Short on time: 18 min. Fill in the rights log together on the board.

Check your work (pages 247 and 248): 6 min. Short on time: skip. Score the work yourself with the rubric.

Questions to discuss (page 249): 10 min. Short on time: 4 min. Use question 1 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 250): at home.

Periods: full chapter 87 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

Plan 14

Lesson 14Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 14 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

Codes of ethics

  • AIGA Standards of Professional Practice: The designer’s responsibility to other designers
  • RTDNA Code of Ethics: Independence and transparency
  • PRSA Code of Ethics: Competition

Heat map

Opener (page 232): Low

Key terms (pages 233 and 234): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 237 and 238): Low

Key idea (pages 239 and 240): Low

Sort the evidence (page 241): Low

Practice (pages 242 and 243): Low

Your task (pages 244 to 246): Low

Check your work (pages 247 and 248): Low

Try it at your school

Start a rights log for your next project.

  • List every outside clip, image, sound and quote before you edit
  • Record the source and the license or permission for each
  • Use your school’s licensed media or openly licensed libraries when you can

Try it at your school, continued

  • Ask your media teacher or librarian about uses you’re unsure of

Who to ask: School librarian or media specialist, a media or film teacher, a college library’s copyright help page

Safety: Don’t share other people’s creative work as your own. If you get a takedown notice, talk with a trusted adult before responding.

Sources

  • NPR, “TikTok removes music from UMG artists, including Olivia Rodrigo and Taylor Swift,” February 1, 2024
  • U.S. Copyright Office, “Fair Use Index,” No date listed
Plan 14b
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?

Mateo wants to post the crew’s film tonight and credit the song’s artist, but Caio wants to check the license first.

On your ownRead What happened and underline the two pieces of the film that the crew did not make. About 5 minutes.

Caio, Mateo and Rafa laugh as they look at photos on a small digital camera.

Your role: You’re the one who fills in the rights log before the film goes up. New skill: Check permission, not just credit.

What happened

It is Friday night, and Caio, 24, is editing the crew’s festival film. The film is a short recap made from crew footage and interviews. At 9:40 p.m., he saves a rough cut. For 20 seconds, a released song plays under the setup montage. Caio pitched the song up slightly, and the song sets the mood for the whole scene.

The cut borrows one more piece. From 1:40 to 1:46, it shows a six-second clip downloaded from a TikTok post. That post used Stitch, TikTok’s remix tool. The crew did not make the song or the clip.

At 10:02 p.m., Mateo texts the crew chat: “We’ll credit them in the caption. Post tonight?” He wants the film online tonight. Caio asks what the credit gets them, and Mateo does not have an answer. Caio wants to check the license before they post.

Your question: Does a credit give the crew permission to use the song, and what should they do before they post?

232
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 8 minutes.

Attribution Attribution is naming the person who made a work, such as a song, a photo or a video.

En español: atribución

In this case: Mateo’s plan, “We’ll credit them in the caption,” would name the artist. It answers who made the song, not whether the crew may use it.

License A license is permission from a rights holder to use a work under specific terms.

En español: licencia

In this case: The rights log says “permission unknown” for both borrowed pieces. A license from each owner would fill in that column.

Fair use Fair use is a part of U.S. copyright law that allows some uses without permission, judged case by case with four factors.

En español: uso justo

In this case: The crew would weigh the four factors for 20 seconds of a released song used as background mood. No number of seconds settles it.

Who is involved

Caio

Editing the crew’s festival film

“Twenty seconds of that song carries the whole montage. That’s exactly why I can’t just borrow it and hope.”

Mateo

Wanted the film online tonight

“I really texted ‘we’ll credit them, post tonight?’ Then Caio asked what the credit gets us. I didn’t have an answer.”

233
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, do you think a credit in the caption lets the crew use the song?

I think the credit ___ because ___.

I think the credit is enough because it tells people who made the song.

Notes

234
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Credit is not permission

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 4 minutes.

Words to know

  • Attribution: Attribution is naming the person who made a work, such as a song, a photo or a video.
  • License: A license is permission from a rights holder to use a work under specific terms.
  • Fair use: Fair use is a part of U.S. copyright law that allows some uses without permission, judged case by case with four factors.
  • Disclosure: A disclosure is a clear statement that tells people about a relationship or fact they would want to know.

The story: A song that carries the scene

It is Friday night, and Caio is editing the crew’s festival film. It is a short recap made from crew footage and interviews. At 9:40 p.m., he saves a rough cut.

For 20 seconds, a released song plays under the setup montage. Caio pitched it up slightly, and the song sets the mood for the whole scene. The cut borrows one more piece. From 1:40 to 1:46, it shows a six-second clip downloaded from a TikTok post. That post used Stitch, TikTok’s remix tool. The crew did not make the song or the clip.

At 10:02 p.m., Mateo texts the crew chat: “We’ll credit them in the caption. Post tonight?” Caio writes back one question: “Credit gets us what, exactly?” Mateo does not have an answer.

Your role is to fill in the rights log before the film goes up.

Stop and think. Why might Mateo think a credit in the caption is enough?

Two different questions

Attribution is naming the person who made a work, such as a song, a photo or a video. It answers the question “Who made this?” A license is permission from a rights holder to use a work under specific terms. It answers a different question: “Did the owner say yes to this use?” Mateo’s caption would give attribution. It would not give the crew a license.

235
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Two different questions, continued

In Lesson 8, you learned that a disclosure is a clear statement that tells people about a relationship or fact they would want to know. Naming the artist is honest, like a disclosure. But being honest about where something came from is not the same as having permission to use it.

Pitching the song up does not make it the crew’s song either. “It’s still their song, just a little higher,” Caio says.

The crew starts a rights log. It lists each borrowed piece, who made it, where it came from and whether there is permission. Right now, both rows say “permission unknown.” Mateo thought Stitch covered the TikTok clip. But Stitch works inside TikTok. A festival film is somewhere else.

Caio has two backup plans. The crew can use a library track with clear terms, or Dec can record a drum loop the crew owns. Either way, they post Sunday.

Stop and think. What is the difference between attribution and a license?

When the music went silent

In February 2024, a licensing deal between Universal Music Group and TikTok ended. Videos using songs by artists like Taylor Swift and Olivia Rodrigo went silent (NPR, February 1, 2024). Nobody forgot to credit Taylor Swift. The license was the problem.

Fair use is a part of U.S. copyright law that allows some uses without permission, judged case by case with four factors (U.S. Copyright Office, updated July 2026).

Stop and think. Why doesn’t Stitch permission cover a festival film?

Sources

Real sourceNPRFebruary 1, 2024

TikTok removes music from UMG artists, including Olivia Rodrigo and Taylor Swift

Real sourceU.S. Copyright OfficeJuly 2026

Fair Use Index

236
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document, then fill in both boxes under it. About 12 minutes.

Evidence AEdit timeline

Caio’s rough cut, Friday, 9:40 p.m.

0:00–0:18 crew footage, no music. 0:18–0:38 sampled track, pitched up slightly, under the setup montage. 0:38–1:52 crew footage and interviews. 1:40–1:46 a 6-second clip downloaded from a stitched TikTok post.

Look closely: Which two parts of the cut did the crew not make?

What it shows

The film uses 20 seconds of a released song and a six-second TikTok clip.

One question I still have

Who owns the song, and did they say the crew could use it?

Evidence CRights log

Rights log, started Saturday morning

Columns: element, who made it, where it came from, permission or license and date. Row 1: setup-montage music, the recording artist, a streaming download, permission unknown. Row 2: 6-second clip, a TikTok creator, downloaded from TikTok, permission unknown.

Look closely: Which column says “unknown” in both rows?

What it shows

The crew listed the song and the TikTok clip and who made each one.

One question I still have

How can the crew find out if they have permission?
237
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know if a license covers the song or what the TikTok creator agreed to.

Notes

238
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: fair use

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

Credit and permission answer different questions. Attribution is naming the person who made a work, such as a song, a photo or a video. It answers the question “Who made this?” A license is permission from a rights holder to use a work under specific terms. It answers another question: “Did the owner say yes to this use?” Mateo’s caption would give attribution. It would not give the crew a license.

Without a license, the crew could ask whether the use is fair use. Fair use is a part of U.S. copyright law that allows some uses without permission, judged case by case with four factors. The U.S. Copyright Office names the four factors. They are the purpose of the use, the nature of the original work, the amount used and the effect on the original’s market. No number of seconds is automatically safe. Even a short part can count against fair use if it is the most recognizable part of the song.

Platform tools come with their own limits. Stitch lets people remix another person’s video inside TikTok. That permission does not automatically cover a downloaded clip in a film shown somewhere else. Using music the crew records, or a track with a clear license, can avoid the fair-use question. Caio’s two backup plans follow this idea: a library track with clear terms, or a drum loop that Dec records.

Professional standards

Real sourceAIGA, the professional association for design

AIGA Standards of Professional Practice: The designer’s responsibility to other designers

“A professional designer shall not accept instructions from a client that involve infringement of another person’s property rights without permission”

In plain words: Designers who belong to AIGA agree not to use other people's creative work without permission, even when a client asks.

Question: The rights log says “permission unknown” for the track and the TikTok clip. What does Caio need for each row?

239
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

For the song, Caio needs ___. For the clip, he needs ___.

For the song, Caio needs a yes from the song’s owner. For the clip, he needs the TikTok creator’s permission.

In the news

Real sourceCrashCourse (YouTube)May 7, 2015

Copyright, Exceptions, and Fair Use: Crash Course Intellectual Property #3

Explains why giving credit is not the same as permission, and how fair use is weighed.

Real sourceNPRMay 18, 2023

Supreme Court sides against Andy Warhol Foundation in copyright infringement case

Even a famous artist’s new version wasn’t fair use when it served the same purpose as the original.

Notes

240
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownMatch each piece of evidence to the claim it supports, challenges or narrows. About 10 minutes.

Test the crew’s two assumptions against the sources. Which evidence knocks each one down, and what single check could still make the plan work?

EvidenceClaim 1Crediting the artist makes the use okay.Claim 2Twenty seconds is short enough to be fair use.
1 Credit names the creator but grants no permission
Challenges
Neither
2 Copyright Office: no formula makes a set amount safe; the heart of a work matters
Neither
Challenges
3 The sample is background mood, not commentary on the song
Neither
Challenges
4 Stitch permission applies inside TikTok, not to a downloaded clip in another film
Narrows
Neither

Still open

  • Does any license cover this use? Check before posting.

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The TikTok creator’s view is missing. I would ask if the crew can use the clip in their film.
241
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose the plan you would pick and explain why, then fix the two marked lines. About 8 minutes.

Caio’s cut uses about 20 seconds of a released song as background mood for the crew’s festival film. Mateo texts, “We’ll credit them in the caption. Post tonight?” Which plan should the crew choose?

  • A Credit the artist in the caption and post tonight.

  • B Pause the upload. Check the track’s license, and swap in licensed or original music if the license does not cover this use.

  • C Cut the song to ten seconds, since short clips are fair use.

Why I chose it

B. It checks for permission before posting and still has a plan to finish the film. A credit alone does not give permission.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

We’re good to post! 1 We only used like 20 seconds of the song and we’re putting the artist’s name in the caption so they get credit. Plus it’s not like we’re making money off it, it’s just for our page. 2 Everyone uses songs like this on TikTok anyway so it’s fine. We even changed the pitch a little so it’s basically our own version now, and the whole cut is under two minutes. If they don’t like it they can just ask us to take it down.

242
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Improve a draft, continued

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

We used about 20 seconds of the song. No number of seconds is automatically safe.

Rewrite phrase 2

Songs inside TikTok have their own license. Ours is a download, so we must check.

Notes

243
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Make a rights log for the crew’s short film and suggest a way to use music they’re allowed to use.

Use: The case scenario and a kid-friendly summary of the Copyright Office page.

You’ll make: Rights log plus 3–4 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

Notes

244
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

  1. Circle each part of the rough cut in Evidence A that the crew did not make.
  2. Write who made each part, using the rights log in Evidence C.
  3. Mark each part with a check for permission or a question mark for unknown.
  4. Choose music the crew is allowed to use in place of the song.
  5. Write 3 or 4 sentences in the Your draft box that explain your plan.
  6. Check that your sentences say what credit does and what permission means.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–4 sentences with the frame “Credit tells people __. Permission means __.”
  • Say it: Explain to a partner the difference between giving credit and having permission, using the song in Caio’s film as your example.
  • Show it: Fill the rights log as a picture table: a small drawing of each clip or sound, who made it and a check or question mark for permission.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

Borrowed part 1, and who made it

The song, 20 seconds. The recording artist made it.

Permission for part 1

? Unknown. A credit does not give permission.

Borrowed part 2, and who made it

The six-second TikTok clip. A TikTok creator made it.

Permission for part 2

? Unknown. Stitch covers remixes inside TikTok.
245
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Music the crew is allowed to use

A library track with clear terms or Dec’s own drum loop

Your draft

Credit tells people ___. Permission means ___.

Credit tells people who made the song. Permission means the owner said yes to how we use it. We have credit but no permission yet. We should use a library track with clear terms or record our own music.

Notes

246
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 6 minutes.

  • Does your rights log list both borrowed parts?

    YesNo
  • Does it say who made each part?

    YesNo
  • Do your sentences explain credit and permission separately?

    YesNo
  • Does your plan avoid promising that the use is legal?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceRelies on myths.Cites credit as permission.Uses the four factors or license terms.Uses factors, license terms and platform differences.
ReasoningAssumes any use is fine.Applies one factor.Separates credit, permission and fair use.Weighs factors honestly and chooses a lower-risk path.
Audience & purposeIgnores the artist.Considers only the crew.Considers the artist and the audience.Balances creative goals with respect for the original creator.
RevisionNo change.Adds a credit.Replaces myths with a rights plan.Explains each step and a realistic alternative.
247
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed “credit is enough” to “we need permission” because credit only names the artist.

Notes

248
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete each sentence frame. About 10 minutes.

1 Caio pitched the song up slightly. Does changing a song make it a new work? Why or why not?

No. It is still their song, only a little higher. Changing the pitch does not give the crew permission.

2 Mateo says the TikTok clip goes in the rights log as “unknown.” What would the crew need to find out to fill in that row?

Who made the clip, and whether that person says the crew can use it in their film.

My take

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should check the license before posting because a credit does not give permission.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The rights log changed my first guess. It says “permission unknown” for both pieces.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is who owns the song, the artist or someone else.
249
Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 14: Does giving credit let the crew use the song?

In this case, a group of friends wants to post a short film that uses 20 seconds of a released song. Your student compared giving credit with getting permission, then planned what the crew should do before posting.

Questions to talk about

  1. What is the difference between giving credit and getting permission?
  2. Why might a short part of a song still need permission?
  3. Where could a student find music they have permission to use?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

250

Lesson 15Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?

Content note

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read a story in which a studio offers Rafa an unpaid summer internship running its inbox. The studio says college credit makes it legal. They read the listing, the studio’s reply and Gia’s questions, and they apply the seven factors in the Department of Labor’s Fact Sheet #71. They then write Rafa’s email asking the studio about the learning plan and supervision.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • underline key words in a short text
  • sort examples into two groups
  • write a question that asks for a fact

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • separate learning tasks from working tasks in a job listing
  • decide whether an offer looks more like school or a job, with a reason
  • write one question Rafa should ask before saying yes

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Task cards cut from the listing, one set per pair
  • Evidence A and C on half-pages

The task in this edition

Task: Sort the internship’s daily tasks into “learning” and “working,” then tell a partner whether it looks more like school or a job.

Students make: Sorted chart plus 3–4 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 251): 5 min. Short on time: 5 min.

Key terms (pages 252 and 253): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (pages 256 and 257): 12 min. Short on time: 12 min.

Key idea (pages 258 and 259): 8 min. Short on time: skip. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 260): 10 min. Short on time: 3 min. Do the first row together and stop.

Practice (page 261): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Pacing, continued

Your task (pages 262 and 263): 20 min. Short on time: 18 min. Sort the task cards together on the board.

Check your work (pages 264 and 265): 6 min. Short on time: skip. Score the work yourself with the rubric.

Questions to discuss (page 266): 10 min. Short on time: 4 min. Use question 3 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 267): at home.

Periods: full chapter 87 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

Plan 15

Lesson 15Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 15 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

Standards, continued

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

Codes of ethics

  • NACE Principles for Ethical Professional Practice: 4. Comply with laws
  • ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct: Rule 4.1 Truthfulness in Statements to Others
  • ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct: Rule 4.3 Dealing with Unrepresented Person

Heat map

Opener (page 251): Low

Key terms (pages 252 and 253): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 256 and 257): Low

Key idea (pages 258 and 259): Low

Sort the evidence (page 260): Low

Practice (page 261): Low

Your task (pages 262 and 263): Low

Check your work (pages 264 and 265): Low

Try it at your school

Ask what the work is before you accept it.

  • Before accepting any internship, ask for duties, hours, supervision and pay in writing

Try it at your school, continued

  • Take the offer to your school counselor or college career center
  • Check your state labor department’s page on minimum wage and youth work
  • Compare the offer with your other commitments before deciding

Who to ask: School counselor, college career center, work-permit officer where your state uses them, state labor department

Safety: If you’re under 18, federal and state rules limit hours and certain jobs. Involve a trusted adult before accepting any work arrangement.

Sources

  • U.S. Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit, via Justia, “Glatt v. Fox Searchlight Pictures,” 2016
  • U.S. Department of Labor, Wage and Hour Division, “Fact Sheet #71: Internship Programs Under the Fair Labor Standards Act,” No date listed
Plan 15b
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?

A studio offers Rafa an unpaid summer internship running its customer inbox and says college credit makes it legal.

On your ownRead What happened and underline what Rafa would do all summer. About 5 minutes.

Nexo, one of the crew’s companions, points to where a meeting and a work shift overlap on a calendar. Rafa’s internship would take time from his shifts at the family shop.

Your role: You’re the one who checks each factor of the test before Rafa says yes. New skill: Apply a legal test factor by factor.

What happened

Rafa, 18, is a first-year college student who commutes to class and helps at his family’s shop. In April, a studio posted a listing on the campus job board for a “Summer Editing Intern.” The internship is unpaid. The listing says the intern will run the customer inbox all summer. Rafa reads it twice, looking for the editing.

On Tuesday at 11:20 a.m., the studio answers Rafa’s message. The email says college credit makes it “totally legal” not to pay him. It also asks him to start right after finals.

At lunch, Rafa talks it over with Gia, who fits café shifts around her classes. Gia asks whether the studio paid someone to run the inbox last year. Rafa says the studio’s assistant ran it. Taking the internship would also cost Rafa paid shifts at the shop. He has not said yes yet.

Your question: Is the internship mainly training for Rafa or unpaid work for the studio, and what should he ask before he decides?

251
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 8 minutes.

Primary beneficiary test The primary beneficiary test is how the U.S. Department of Labor decides whether an intern at a for-profit company is an employee.

En español: prueba del beneficiario principal

In this case: The studio gets its customer inbox answered all summer. Rafa asks what he would learn and who would train him.

Fair Labor Standards Act The Fair Labor Standards Act is a federal law that sets minimum wage and overtime rules for most workers.

En español: Ley de Normas Justas de Trabajo

In this case: If Rafa counts as an employee under this law, the studio must pay him at least the minimum wage.

Academic credit Academic credit is credit toward a degree that a school gives for approved work, such as an internship.

En español: créditos académicos

In this case: The studio says credit makes the unpaid role “totally legal.” Credit is one factor out of seven.

Who is involved

Rafa

Offered an unpaid summer internship

“The listing says ‘Summer Editing Intern.’ Then it says I’d run the customer inbox all summer. I read it twice looking for the editing.”

Gia

Talking the offer over with Rafa

“I almost said ‘take it, it’ll look good.’ Easy for me to say. I’m not the one giving up a summer.”

252
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, is Rafa’s offer more like training or more like a job?

I think it is more like ___ because ___.

I think it is more like training because it is called an internship.

Notes

253
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Looking for the editing

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Primary beneficiary test: The primary beneficiary test is how the U.S. Department of Labor decides whether an intern at a for-profit company is an employee.
  • Fair Labor Standards Act: The Fair Labor Standards Act is a federal law that sets minimum wage and overtime rules for most workers.
  • Academic credit: Academic credit is credit toward a degree that a school gives for approved work, such as an internship.
  • Compensation: Compensation is all the pay and benefits a worker receives, including hourly rates, bonuses and overtime.

The story: An internship with a catch

Rafa is 18. He is in his first year of college, commutes to class and helps at his family’s shop. In April, a studio posts a listing on the campus job board: “Summer Editing Intern (unpaid).” The listing says the intern will run the customer inbox all summer. Rafa reads it twice, looking for the editing.

On Tuesday at 11:20 a.m., the studio answers his message. “Since interns get college credit, it’s totally legal for us not to pay,” the email says. The studio wants him to start right after finals.

At lunch, Rafa talks it over with Gia. She asks a sharp question: didn’t the studio pay someone to run the inbox last year? Yes, Rafa says. Their assistant did. Taking the internship would also cost Rafa paid shifts at the shop.

Your role is to check each part of the test before Rafa says yes.

Stop and think. Why does Rafa read the listing twice?

A test with seven parts

The primary beneficiary test is how the U.S. Department of Labor decides whether an intern at a for-profit company is an employee. It asks who mainly benefits from the internship, the intern or the company. An intern who counts as an employee must be paid under the Fair Labor Standards Act. That is a federal law that sets minimum wage and overtime rules for most workers.

254
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

A test with seven parts, continued

The test has seven factors. They include training, links to coursework or academic credit, the school calendar and how long the learning lasts. Academic credit is credit toward a degree that a school gives for approved work, such as an internship. Another factor asks whether the intern’s work adds to paid workers’ work or replaces it. No single factor decides the test.

So the studio’s email does not settle anything. Rafa put it well: “Credit is one factor out of seven. So that’s one. What about the other six?”

In Lesson 12, you compared facts to a court case. Here, you compare facts to a test, one factor at a time. Some facts point one way. The main job is the inbox, and a paid assistant did it last year. Other facts are missing. Who trains Rafa? How many hours a week? In Lesson 11, you learned that compensation is all the pay and benefits a worker receives. Here, the offer includes none.

Gia almost told Rafa to take it because it would look good. Then she stopped. “Easy for me to say,” she admits. She is not the one giving up a summer. She leaves the decision to him.

Stop and think. Why doesn’t college credit settle whether Rafa should be paid?

Real interns who sued

Two unpaid interns on the 2010 film Black Swan sued Fox Searchlight. They said they should have been paid. In 2015, a federal appeals court said the question is who is the primary beneficiary of the internship (LAist, July 2, 2015). That is the test used today.

Stop and think. What questions should Rafa ask the studio before he decides?

Sources

Real sourceLAist (AirTalk)July 2, 2015

Appeals court reverses ‘Black Swan’ interns’ victory over Fox

Notes

255
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document, then fill in both boxes under it. About 12 minutes.

Evidence AJob listing

Studio listing on the campus job board, April

“Summer Editing Intern (unpaid). Join our fast-paced studio! You’ll run the customer inbox all summer, help with client files and get great exposure to the industry. College credit available.”

Look closely: Which words describe learning? Which words describe work?

What it shows

Rafa would run the customer inbox all summer for no pay.

One question I still have

What editing would Rafa learn, and who would teach him?

Evidence CChat

Gia and Rafa, Tuesday lunch

Gia: Didn’t they pay someone to do the inbox last year?

Rafa: Yeah, their assistant.

Gia: And it’s your summer, not theirs. What about your shifts at the shop?

Look closely: Who ran the customer inbox last year? Was that person paid?

What it shows

Last year, a paid assistant ran the customer inbox.

One question I still have

How many paid shifts at the shop would Rafa lose?
256
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know who would train Rafa, how many hours he would work or if his school gives credit.

Notes

257
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: the primary beneficiary test

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

A job title does not show how the work is arranged. The primary beneficiary test is how the U.S. Department of Labor decides whether an intern at a for-profit company is an employee. It asks whether the intern or the employer mainly benefits from an unpaid internship. An intern who counts as an employee must be paid under the Fair Labor Standards Act. The Fair Labor Standards Act is a federal law that sets minimum wage and overtime rules for most workers.

The Department of Labor’s Fact Sheet #71 lists seven factors. They include training, links to coursework or academic credit, the school calendar and how long the learning lasts. Academic credit is credit toward a degree that a school gives for approved work, such as an internship. Another factor is whether the intern’s work adds to paid employees’ work or replaces it. The test is flexible, and no single factor decides it.

So the studio’s email does not settle the question. Calling a job an internship does not decide it. Neither does college credit, or an intern agreeing to work for no pay. The test also has limits. It applies to for-profit employers, and state rules may differ. To apply the test, you need facts about the duties, training, supervision and hours.

Professional standards

Real sourceNational Association of Colleges and Employers (NACE)

NACE Principles for Ethical Professional Practice: 4. Comply with laws

“Comply with laws … associated with local, state, and federal entities”

In plain words: Career offices and employer recruiters who belong to NACE agree to follow federal, state and local laws.

Question: The campus job board lists the internship. What should the career office ask the studio about the seven DOL factors?

Your answer

The career office should ask ___.

The career office should ask who trains the intern and whether a paid worker did this job before.
258
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourcePBS NewsHour (YouTube)August 26, 2023

Why unpaid internships still exist despite hardships for young workers

Reports that nearly half of U.S. interns were unpaid in 2022 and who can afford to take those jobs.

Real sourceNPRMay 18, 2013

Internships: Low-Paid, Unpaid Or Just Plain Illegal?

Explains when an unpaid internship can break wage law, using the ‘Black Swan’ intern lawsuit.

Notes

259
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownMatch each piece of evidence to the claim it supports or challenges, and mark what is still unknown. About 10 minutes.

Test the studio’s claim against the factor list. Which evidence points toward training, which toward a job, and what is still unknown?

EvidenceClaim 1College credit makes the unpaid internship legal.Claim 2The role looks more like a job than training.
1 DOL: credit is one of seven factors, and no single factor decides
Challenges
Neither
2 The listing: Rafa runs the customer inbox all summer
Neither
Supports
3 A paid assistant ran the inbox last year
Neither
Supports
4 The role is openly unpaid and offers credit (factors 1 and 3)
Neither
Challenges

Still open

  • Is there a learning plan, and who supervises?

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The assistant who ran the inbox last year is missing. I would ask what that job was like.
260
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what Rafa should do next and explain why, then fix the two marked lines. About 8 minutes.

The studio’s unpaid internship has Rafa running its customer inbox all summer, the job a paid assistant did last year. The studio says college credit makes it legal. What should Rafa do next?

  • A Accept the studio’s answer, since college credit settles the question.

  • B Ask for the learning plan, supervision, schedule and how the role relates to paid employees’ work.

  • C Tell the studio that unpaid internships are against the law.

Why I chose it

B. It asks for the facts that show whether Rafa would learn or only work. A and C both decide too fast.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Hi, thanks so much for the offer! I’m really excited about this opportunity and I know it will look great on my résumé. I just wanted to ask 1 if this is legal since it’s unpaid? My friend said unpaid internships aren’t allowed. Also how many hours is it? 2 I can start whenever you need me. I really want to get into editing and this seems like a good way in. Let me know! Thank you again for thinking of me, Rafa

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

Who would train me, and what would I learn each week?

Rewrite phrase 2

Before I agree to a start date, could you tell me the weekly hours?
261
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Sort the internship’s daily tasks into “learning” and “working,” then tell a partner whether it looks more like school or a job.

Use: The listing and a kid-friendly summary of the seven factors.

You’ll make: Sorted chart plus 3–4 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Underline each task Rafa would do in the listing in Evidence A.
  2. Sort each task into the Learning box or the Working box.
  3. Count the tasks in each box and circle the bigger box.
  4. Tell a partner whether the offer looks more like school or a job.
  5. Write 3 or 4 sentences in the Your draft box, ending with one question for the studio.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 3–4 sentences with the frame “Most of the tasks are __, so __.”
  • Say it: Tell a partner whether the internship looks more like school or a job, using two task cards as your proof.
  • Show it: Sort the task cards into two columns, learning and working, and star the task Rafa would do most.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

262
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Learning

“Great exposure” and college credit, but no teacher is named.

Working

Run the customer inbox all summer. Help with client files.

Your draft

Most of the tasks are ___, so ___.

Most of the tasks are working, so the offer looks more like a job. Rafa would run the customer inbox all summer. A paid assistant did that last year. Rafa should ask who would teach him editing.

Notes

263
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 6 minutes.

  • Did you sort every task from the listing?

    YesNo
  • Do your sentences give a reason from the evidence?

    YesNo
  • Do you end with a question Rafa could ask?

    YesNo
  • Did you avoid saying the internship is illegal?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceRelies on rumor.Mentions pay only.Asks about several factors.Asks about factors and notes what the credit claim doesn’t settle.
ReasoningDeclares legal or illegal.Asks for a verdict.Gathers facts before deciding.Connects each question to a reason it matters.
Audience & purposeGives away leverage or accuses.Polite but vague.Specific, respectful questions.Specific questions plus Rafa’s own constraints.
RevisionNo change.Tone only.Replaces rumor with factor-based questions.Explains how each question helps Rafa decide.
264
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed “it’s illegal” to a question about training, because we don’t know the facts yet.

Notes

265
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete each sentence frame. About 10 minutes.

1 What would count as evidence that the promised training is happening?

A person teaching Rafa editing, a plan of what he will learn and time set aside for learning.

2 If Rafa’s school grants credit, does that settle whether the studio should pay him? Why or why not?

No. Credit is only one factor. Training and whether Rafa replaces a paid worker matter too.

My take

I think Rafa should ___ because ___.

I think Rafa should ask questions before saying yes because the listing is mostly inbox work.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The chat changed my first guess. A paid assistant did the inbox job last year.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is who would teach Rafa editing.
266
Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 15: Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?

In this case, a college student is offered an unpaid summer internship, and the studio says college credit makes that legal. Your student compared the offer with a federal test and wrote questions to ask before saying yes.

Questions to talk about

  1. What questions would you ask before accepting an unpaid internship?
  2. How can someone tell whether a role is mostly learning or mostly work?
  3. Who can help a student check a job or internship offer?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

267

Lesson 16Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?

Content note

This case involves disability access and a request for an exception to a building rule. No student should share their own disability, health information or housing situation, so keep the discussion on Sami’s building.

This case explains general rules. It is not legal advice for your situation.

Overview

Students read a short story in which an unsigned notice says a building’s rear door will be locked at 8 p.m. That step-free door is the only one Sami can use. Students compare the notice with last year’s house rules and the entrance plan, and they map how the rule affects different residents. They read HUD’s Fair Housing Act overview as a source of questions, then rewrite the notice or write Sami’s question to the building manager.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a detail in a short text and point to it
  • compare two short texts
  • write clear sentences for a reader

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • name what a notice leaves out

Objectives, continued

  • identify what changed between two building rules
  • rewrite a notice so residents know what changed, when and whom to ask
  • include residents who need step-free access

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A and B side by side, with the changes highlighted
  • A clear school notice to use as a model

The task in this edition

Task: Rewrite the building notice so every resident knows who wrote it, what changed, when and who to ask.

Students make: Rewritten notice, 60–90 words

Pacing

Opener (page 268): 5 min. Short on time: 5 min.

Key terms (pages 269 and 270): 7 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 273): 10 min. Short on time: 9 min. Read Evidence B aloud; students fill in the boxes for Evidence A.

Pacing, continued

Look at the evidence (page 274): 5 min. Short on time: 4 min. Students fill in only the “What it shows” box.

Key idea (pages 275 and 276): 8 min. Short on time: skip. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 277): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Do the first row together and stop.

Practice (pages 278 and 279): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Your task (pages 280 and 281): 20 min. Short on time: 18 min. Fill in the planner together on the board.

Check your work (pages 282 and 283): 6 min. Short on time: skip. Score the notices yourself with the rubric.

Questions to discuss (page 284): 10 min. Short on time: 3 min. Use question 1 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 285): at home.

Periods: full chapter 87 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

Plan 16

Lesson 16Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 16 plan, continued

Standards, continued

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

Standards, continued

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

Codes of ethics

  • ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct: Rule 3.1 Meritorious Claims and Contentions
  • Credo for Ethical Communication: “We strive to understand and respect other communicators' intent…” (one of nine unnumbered principles)

Heat map

Opener (page 268): Medium

Key terms (pages 269 and 270): Low

Look at the evidence (page 273): Low

Look at the evidence (page 274): Low

Key idea (pages 275 and 276): Low

Sort the evidence (page 277): Medium

Practice (pages 278 and 279): Low

Heat map, continued

Your task (pages 280 and 281): Low

Check your work (pages 282 and 283): Low

Try it at your school

Ask who wrote the rule before you argue about it.

  • When a new rule is posted where you live or at school, write down the date and take a photo
  • Look for who issued it and what document it changes
  • Ask a trusted adult to help you ask the building manager or office
  • Find your city’s or county’s tenant or housing help page with an adult

Who to ask: A parent or guardian, the building manager, a local tenant or housing help line, a school social worker

Safety: Don’t post neighbors’ names, unit numbers or private situations online. Let adults handle lease disputes.

Sources

  • Gothamist, “Brooklyn Landlord Does An About Face On Facial Recognition Plan,” November 21, 2019
Plan 16b

Lesson 16Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 16 plan, continued

Sources, continued

  • Legal Services NYC, “Brooklyn tenants file legal opposition to landlord’s application to install facial recognition entry system in building,” May 1, 2019
  • U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD), “Fair Housing Act overview,” No date listed
Plan 16c
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?

An unsigned notice says the building’s only step-free door locks at 8 p.m., and Sami’s workshop runs later.

On your ownRead What happened and underline the two changes the notice announces. About 5 minutes.

Mari hands a yellow sheet to Sami across a white table while Caio listens. This scene comes from Lesson 4.

Your role: You’re the one who photographs the notice and writes down when and where it was found. New skill: Find who has the authority to make a rule.

What happened

It is Monday morning in Sami’s apartment building. A new notice is posted beside the common-room door. It says the rear door will be locked at 8:00 p.m. every night. It also says the common room is “for resident social use only,” with “NO BUSINESS USE” in capital letters. The notice has no name, no date and no contact.

That rear door matters to Sami, who lives in apartment 3B and uses a manual wheelchair. It is the building’s only step-free entrance. The front entrance has four steps and no ramp. Sami also runs a workshop in the common room, and it goes past 8 p.m.

Caio reads last year’s house rules beside the notice. Those rules let residents reserve the common room for classes and resident-run workshops. The new notice does not say whether it replaces them. Before anyone starts arguing, Sami photographs the notice and writes down when and where she found it.

Your question: Who has the authority behind this notice, and what should Sami ask the building manager?

268
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 7 minutes.

Authority Authority is the power a person or group has to make or change a particular rule or decision.

En español: autoridad

In this case: The notice uses bold type and capital letters but names no issuer. Sami has to find out who has the power to make this rule.

Reasonable accommodation A reasonable accommodation is a change to a rule or practice that gives a person with a disability equal use of a place.

En español: acomodo razonable

In this case: Sami could ask the building for a key fob for the rear door, so she can get in after 8 p.m.

Documentation Documentation is a record, such as a photo, a note or an email, that shows what was said or done and when.

En español: documentación

In this case: Sami photographs the notice and writes down when and where she found it, before anyone argues about what it said.

Who is involved

Sami

Lives in 3B and runs a workshop in the common room

“Rear door locked at 8. That’s the only door I can get through. My workshop runs later. So, questions. Plural.”

Caio

Reading last year’s house rules beside the notice

“All caps, bold, no name, no date. Somebody made it look official. I still don’t know who.”

269
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, should Sami follow the new notice?

I think Sami should ___ because ___.

I think Sami should ignore it because nobody signed it.

Notes

270
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

The notice with no name

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Authority: Authority is the power a person or group has to make or change a particular rule or decision.
  • Reasonable accommodation: A reasonable accommodation is a change to a rule or practice that gives a person with a disability equal use of a place.
  • Documentation: Documentation is a record, such as a photo, a note or an email, that shows what was said or done and when.
  • Decision-maker: A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice.
  • Barrier: A barrier is something that blocks or limits a person from taking part.

The story: A new sign by the door

On Monday morning, a new notice appears beside the common-room door in Sami’s apartment building. In bold capital letters, it says the rear door will be locked at 8:00 p.m. every night. It also says the common room is “for resident social use only.” At the bottom: “NO BUSINESS USE.”

The notice has no name, no date and no contact. That matters to Sami. She lives in apartment 3B and uses a manual wheelchair. The rear door is the building’s only step-free entrance. The front entrance has four steps and no ramp. Sami also runs a workshop in the common room, and it goes past 8 p.m.

Before anyone starts arguing, Sami takes a photo of the notice. She writes down when and where she found it. Caio brings last year’s house rules to compare.

Your role is to help Sami keep a clear record of what the notice says and when it appeared.

Stop and think. Why does Sami take a photo before anyone argues about the notice?

Who made this rule?

Authority is the power a person or group has to make or change a particular rule or decision. Bold type and capital letters do not show who has that power. As Caio says, somebody made it look official. He still does not know who.

271
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Who made this rule?, continued

In Lesson 4, you learned that a decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice. Sami needs to find out who the decision-maker is here. In Lesson 1, you learned to find the original source. Last year’s house rules say residents may reserve the common room for “gatherings, classes and resident-run workshops.” The new notice does not say whether it replaces those rules. It also never says what “business use” means.

In Lesson 10, you learned that a barrier is something that blocks or limits a person from taking part. A locked rear door would be a barrier for Sami after 8 p.m. Documentation is a record, such as a photo, a note or an email, that shows what was said or done and when. Sami’s photo and note are documentation.

Sami keeps two questions apart. Who has the authority behind this notice? And how does she get in after 8? A reasonable accommodation is a change to a rule or practice that gives a person with a disability equal use of a place. For Sami, a key fob for the rear door could work. Neither Sami nor Caio calls the notice illegal. They do not know enough yet.

Stop and think. What is missing from the notice that a real building rule should include?

Real tenants, real doors

In 2018 and 2019, tenants in a Brooklyn apartment complex learned their landlord wanted to install a face-scanning entry system. Because the change needed a state agency’s permission, the tenants had a place to object. In November 2019, the landlord dropped the plan (Gothamist, November 21, 2019).

Stop and think. What two questions does Sami keep separate, and why?

Sources

Real sourceGothamistNovember 21, 2019

Brooklyn Landlord Does An About Face On Facial Recognition Plan

272
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document, then fill in both boxes under it. About 10 minutes.

Evidence APosted notice

Unsigned notice by the common-room door, found Monday morning

NOTICE TO ALL RESIDENTS. Effective immediately, the rear door will be locked at 8:00 p.m. nightly. The common room is for resident social use only. NO BUSINESS USE.

Look closely: Which features give the notice an official look? What is missing?

What it shows

The rear door locks at 8:00 p.m., and business use of the common room is banned.

One question I still have

Who wrote this notice, and when?

Evidence BHouse rules (excerpt)

Last year’s house rules, given out at lease signing

“Residents may reserve the common room for gatherings, classes and resident-run workshops. Reservations are made through the building office.”

Look closely: What did last year’s rules allow in the common room?

What it shows

Last year, residents could reserve the room for resident-run workshops.

One question I still have

Are last year’s rules still in effect?
273
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CEntrance plan

Building entrance plan from the lobby directory

Front entrance: four steps, no ramp. Rear door: step-free, opens to the elevator hallway. Side door: service use only.

Look closely: Which entrance is step-free? What happens to it after 8 p.m.?

What it shows

The rear door is the only entrance without steps.

One question I still have

How would Sami get in after 8 p.m.?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know who wrote the notice, if it replaces last year’s rules or how Sami gets in after 8.

Notes

274
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: authority

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

A building rule should name who made it, give a date and list a contact. This notice has none of them. Authority is the power a person or group has to make or change a particular rule or decision. Bold type and capital letters do not show who has that power. An unsigned notice is not automatically invalid, either. Sami has to find out who issued it and which document it claims to change.

A landlord’s policy and the law are different sources of rules. The Fair Housing Act is a federal law. HUD, the federal housing department, says it bars housing discrimination based on race, color, religion, sex, national origin, familial status or disability. It covers most housing, with some exceptions. Under the Act, a person with a disability can ask a building for a reasonable accommodation. A reasonable accommodation is a change to a rule or practice that gives a person with a disability equal use of a place. For Sami, that could be a key fob for the rear door.

Sami cannot yet say the notice breaks the law. She does not know who wrote it, whether it replaces the house rules or how the building handles access requests. Whether a building grants an accommodation also depends on the facts. Documentation helps her keep those facts straight. Documentation is a record, such as a photo, a note or an email, that shows what was said or done and when. Her photo of the notice, with the date and place she found it, is documentation.

Professional standards

Adapted from a real sourceAmerican Bar Association (ABA), Center for Professional Responsibility

ABA Model Rules of Professional Conduct: Rule 3.1 Meritorious Claims and Contentions

Summary: Summary, not a quotation: a lawyer may not bring or defend a proceeding, or argue an issue in it, without a basis in law and fact that is not frivolous. The ABA comment says lawyers must first learn the facts and the applicable law.

In plain words: Before lawyers bring a claim, they must have facts and law that support it.

Question: Before claiming a Fair Housing Act violation, what should Sami learn about the notice’s author and the building’s access process?

275
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

Before Sami says the notice breaks the law, she needs to know ___.

Before Sami says the notice breaks the law, she needs to know who wrote it and if the building will let her in.

In the news

Real sourceGothamistNovember 21, 2019

Brooklyn Landlord Does An About Face On Facial Recognition Plan

A throwback about a door rule: the landlord needed state permission to change how tenants got in, and tenants used that process to object.

Real sourceHUD (YouTube)January 31, 2014

The Federal Fair Housing Act and Reasonable Accommodations

HUD explains how a person with a disability can ask for an exception to a building rule.

Notes

276
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownFill in each box of the map: who decides, which rules apply, who is affected and where to ask. About 8 minutes.

Map who made this rule, which rules it has to fit, who it affects and where residents can take a question. Which box is still empty?

Lock the rear door at 8 p.m. and ban business use of the common room

Who decides

Unknown issuer: the owner, the manager or someone else?

Under which rule

Last year’s house rules allowed resident-run workshops

Fair Housing Act: disability is a protected characteristic

Who lives with it

Sami and other residents who need the only step-free entrance

Your way in
A local tenant or housing help line, or HUD for a fair-housing concern

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The person who wrote the notice is missing. I would ask why the door is locked at 8.
277
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what Sami should do first and explain why, then fix the two marked lines. About 8 minutes.

The notice says the rear door, the building’s only step-free entrance, locks at 8 p.m. It also bans “business use” of the common room. It has no name, no date and no contact. What should Sami do first?

  • A Ignore it until someone signs it, since an unsigned notice may not be official.

  • B Photograph it, compare it with last year’s house rules and ask the manager who issued it and how residents get in after 8.

  • C Post online that the building is breaking disability law.

Why I chose it

B. Sami keeps a record and asks two questions: who wrote it and how she gets in. A and C decide too fast.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Hi, I saw the notice about the common room and rear door. 1 This is illegal and discriminatory against disabled people like me. You can’t just make rules like this without asking. Nobody signed it and nobody told us it was coming, so I don’t even know if it’s real. I’m going to keep using the room for my workshop because the old rules said I could. A lot of neighbors are upset too. 2 Please take the notice down. Sami, 3B

278
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Improve a draft, continued

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

I use a wheelchair, and the rear door is the only entrance without steps.

Rewrite phrase 2

Could I get a key fob so I can use the rear door after 8?

Notes

279
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Rewrite the building notice so every resident knows who wrote it, what changed, when and who to ask.

Use: The notice and a short excerpt from the older house rules.

You’ll make: Rewritten notice, 60–90 words

Time: 45 minutes

  1. List what the notice in Evidence A leaves out.
  2. Compare it with last year’s rules in Evidence B and write what changed.
  3. Find the step-free door on the entrance plan in Evidence C.
  4. Rewrite the notice in 60 to 90 words in the Your draft box.
  5. Add one line that tells residents who need the step-free door how to get in after 8 p.m.
  6. Leave a blank for the name of whoever issued the notice.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write the 60–90 word notice with the checklist, including one line about getting in after 8 p.m.
  • Say it: Read your rewritten notice aloud to a partner who plays a resident using the step-free door; answer the one question they ask.
  • Show it: Redesign the notice as a poster with five labeled boxes: who, what changed, when, who it affects, who to ask.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

280
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

What the notice leaves out

Who wrote it, the date, a contact and what “business use” means.

What changed from last year

Workshops were allowed. Now the room is for social use only.

The step-free door

The rear door. It will be locked at 8:00 p.m.

Your draft

Notice from ___.

Notice from ___ (name and title), dated ___. Starting ___, the rear door will be locked at 8:00 p.m. The common room will be for social use only. “Business use” means ___. Residents who need the step-free rear door after 8 p.m. can ask the building office for a way in. Questions? Contact the building office.
281
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 6 minutes.

  • Does your notice have a space for who issued it and the date?

    YesNo
  • Does it say what changed and when?

    YesNo
  • Does it give a contact?

    YesNo
  • Does it tell residents who need the step-free door how to get in after 8 p.m.?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo specifics from the notice.Mentions the notice generally.Quotes the notice and older rule.Quotes both and names what is still unknown.
ReasoningDeclares a legal violation.Complains without a clear need.Connects the rule to a concrete effect.Separates the communication problem from the legal question.
Audience & purposeHostile or vague.Polite but no request.Specific request the manager can act on.Specific request plus questions that clarify authority.
RevisionNo change.Tone edits only.Replaces the conclusion with a question and request.Explains how each change makes a yes more likely.
282
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed “Contact: the landlord” to “the building office,” because that is where reservations go.

Notes

283
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete each sentence frame. About 10 minutes.

1 Which missing fact would most change how you see the notice?

Who wrote it. Then Sami would know if it is a real rule and whom to ask for help.

2 The notice bans “business use” without saying what that means. What would you need to know to decide whether Sami’s workshop counts?

What “business” means, and whether Sami charges money for her workshop.

My take

I think Sami should ___ because ___.

I think Sami should ask the manager who wrote the notice because it has no name on it.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The entrance plan changed my first guess. The rear door is the only entrance without steps.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is whether last year’s rules still count.
284
Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 16: Who wrote the new building rule?

In this case, an unsigned notice in an apartment building says the only step-free door will lock at 8 p.m. Your student compared the notice with last year’s building rules and practiced asking who made the new rule.

Questions to talk about

  1. What should a clear building or school notice include?
  2. Whom can people ask when a posted rule is unclear?
  3. Why might someone keep a photo of a notice with the date?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

285

Lesson 17Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?

Overview

Students read a short story in which the crew has ten free workshop seats and thirty people who want one. They compare three options, first come, a lottery and a needs-based rubric, and apply two ethical lenses from the Markkula Center framework. They then write a note that explains one method to the people affected, names its strongest objection and revises it.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • name who is affected by a simple choice
  • give one reason for an opinion
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • explain that every way of sharing ten seats leaves some people without one
  • name who gains and who carries the cost under each of the three options
  • write a note of 4 to 6 sentences that gives a method, a reason, a cost and one fix

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A, B and C on half-pages, one set per group

Materials, continued

  • Role cards for the group discussion: facilitator, recorder, questioner

The task in this edition

Task: Hold a small-group discussion, then write a short note to the thirty students explaining how the ten seats will be given out.

Students make: Note, 4–6 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 286): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud while students follow along.

Key terms (pages 287 and 288): 6 min. Short on time: 2 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (page 291): 10 min. Short on time: 8 min. Read Evidence A and B aloud. Students fill in only the What it shows boxes.

Look at the evidence (page 292): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the whiteboard aloud. Students circle one cost for each option.

Key idea (pages 293 and 294): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Sort the evidence (page 295): 10 min. Short on time: 3 min. Do the first-come row together and stop.

Practice (page 296): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Pacing, continued

Your task (pages 297 and 298): 20 min. Short on time: 20 min.

Check your work (pages 299 and 300): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Score the notes with the success list yourself.

Questions to discuss (page 301): 10 min. Short on time: 5 min. Hold the group discussion on question 2 only.

Talk about this case at home (page 302): at home.

Periods: full chapter 89 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

Plan 17

Lesson 17Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 17 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

Standards, continued

D2.Civ.7.6-8 Apply civic virtues and democratic principles at school and in the community. In this case: Students apply civic virtues like fairness in a club decision.

D2.Civ.10.6-8 Explain how personal interests, civic virtues and democratic principles matter when people address public problems. In this case: Students explain how personal interests shape views of the best option.

Codes of ethics

  • The Belmont Report: B. Basic Ethical Principles: 3. Justice
  • The Belmont Report: C. Applications: 1. Informed Consent
  • ASPA Code of Ethics: 4. Strengthen social equity.

Heat map

Opener (page 286): Low

Key terms (pages 287 and 288): Low

Look at the evidence (page 291): Low

Look at the evidence (page 292): Low

Key idea (pages 293 and 294): Low

Sort the evidence (page 295): Medium

Practice (page 296): Low

Your task (pages 297 and 298): Low

Check your work (pages 299 and 300): Low

Try it at your school

Ask how your school decides who gets limited spots.

  • Pick one limited resource at school: a class, a trip, a club seat
  • Find out the selection method and whether it’s published
  • Ask who the method helps and who it might leave out
  • Suggest publishing criteria in advance if they aren’t

Who to ask: Club advisor, activities director, school counselor, student council

Safety: Never ask classmates to share financial or personal information for a needs-based process. Adults should handle that privately.

Sources

  • Ticketmaster, “The Eras Tour onsale explained,” November 19, 2022
  • Markkula Center for Applied Ethics, Santa Clara University, “A Framework for Ethical Decision Making,” No date listed
Plan 17b
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?

Thirty people want ten free workshop seats, and the crew must choose a fair way to decide who gets them.

On your ownRead What happened and underline the sentence that tells how many people want a seat. About 6 minutes.

Duda holds up a phone and points at a blank card on a bulletin board.

Your role: You’re the one who writes down the rule before the crew picks the ten names. New skill: Set fair criteria before choosing.

What happened

The crew has ten free seats for a workshop, and thirty people want one. The crew opened a sign-up sheet on Monday at 9 a.m. Twenty-two names were on it before 10 a.m. By Wednesday, the sheet has thirty names.

The sheet says only “How seats will be chosen: to be announced.” The crew has argued about the rule since dinner on Sunday. Gia is running the sign-up. She wants to give the seats to the first ten names, because that is simple and fast. Mateo suggests a lottery instead.

Anika, 16, is at rehearsal most days, and she checks her phone after rehearsal ends. Under first-come, she would see the message after the seats were gone. A third option on the crew’s whiteboard would give seats to people who cannot afford the paid version of the workshop. That option would ask people for personal information.

Every method seats exactly ten people. The crew has to decide which ten, and then explain the rule to all thirty.

Your question: How should the crew choose who gets the ten seats, and how should they explain the choice to all thirty people?

286
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Criteria Criteria are the standards or reasons a group uses to make a decision.

En español: criterios

In this case: The sheet says “How seats will be chosen: to be announced.” Twenty-two names arrived before 10 a.m. Monday, before the crew stated any criteria.

Trade-off A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up.

En español: compensación entre opciones

In this case: First-come is fast for Gia to run but favors whoever sees the message first. A lottery gives everyone the same chance but needs a sign-up window and a drawing.

Equity Equity is a way of sharing that adjusts for different needs so everyone gets a fair chance.

En español: equidad

In this case: Option C would give seats to people who cannot afford the paid version of the workshop. It would also ask applicants for personal information.

Who is involved

Gia

Running the sign-up

“First ten to reply get a seat. It’s simple, I can post it tonight, and I have a shift at seven.”

Anika

Checks her phone after rehearsal

“By the time I see the message, ten people will have answered. I don’t even need a seat. I just want to know how you’re picking.”

287
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, how do you think the crew should choose who gets the ten seats?

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should hold a lottery because it gives everyone the same chance.

Notes

288
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Ten seats, thirty names

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Criteria: Criteria are the standards or reasons a group uses to make a decision.
  • Trade-off: A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up.
  • Equity: Equity is a way of sharing that adjusts for different needs so everyone gets a fair chance.
  • Consent: Consent is permission a person gives for something specific, such as sharing a record with a named person.

The story: The sheet fills up fast

The crew has ten free seats for a workshop. Thirty people want one. The crew opened a sign-up sheet on Monday at 9 a.m. Twenty-two names were on it before 10 a.m. By Wednesday, there are thirty. The sheet still says, “How seats will be chosen: to be announced.”

Gia is running the sign-up. She wants to give the seats to the first ten names. It is simple, she can post it tonight and she has a shift at seven. Mateo suggests a lottery instead. A third idea on the whiteboard would give seats to people who cannot afford the paid version of the workshop.

Anika is 16 and at rehearsal most days. She checks her phone after rehearsal ends. “By the time I see the message, ten people will have answered,” she says. “I don’t even need a seat. I just want to know how you’re picking.”

Your role is to write down the rule before the crew picks the ten names.

Stop and think. Why did most names arrive in the first hour, before any rule was posted?

Every rule has a cost

Any way of giving out ten seats to thirty people leaves twenty people without one. In Lesson 4, you learned that a trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up.

289
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Every rule has a cost, continued

Look at the three options on the whiteboard. First come, first served is fast, but it favors whoever sees the message first. A lottery gives everyone the same chance, but it takes more work, and it does not consider need. A needs-based option helps people who cannot afford the paid workshop. Equity is a way of sharing that adjusts for different needs so everyone gets a fair chance. But that option asks people to share personal information. In Lesson 6, you learned that consent is permission a person gives for something specific. Applicants would need to agree to share that information, and the crew would need to protect it.

Criteria are the standards or reasons a group uses to make a decision. The crew should write its criteria down before anyone is chosen. Then everyone knows the rule ahead of time. Even people who do not get a seat may accept the result if the rule was clear. If the crew picks a rule after seeing the names, people may wonder if it was chosen to favor someone.

Anika is not asking the plan to revolve around her. “Just don’t tell me nobody loses out,” she says, “because I would.” Gia admits she mostly wanted the job off her list.

Stop and think. Which option would you choose, and who would it leave out?

How real sellers choose

In November 2022, more than 3.5 million people registered for presale codes for Taylor Swift’s Eras Tour. Ticketmaster says about 1.5 million got codes. The other 2 million went on a waitlist (Ticketmaster, November 19, 2022). Someone chose a method for deciding who got a chance.

Stop and think. Why should the crew write down its rule before choosing names?

Sources

Real sourceTicketmasterNovember 19, 2022

The Eras Tour onsale explained

290
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document and write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 10 minutes.

Evidence ASign-up sheet

The workshop sign-up sheet

“Free workshop: 10 seats. Add your name to show interest. How seats will be chosen: to be announced.” The sheet opened Monday at 9 a.m. By Wednesday it had thirty names. The first 22 names were added before 10 a.m. on Monday.

Look closely: When did most names arrive, and what rule was posted then?

What it shows

Thirty people want ten seats. The first 22 signed up before 10 a.m. Monday.

One question I still have

Who signed up later, and why did they see the sheet late?

Evidence BGroup-chat thread

The crew’s thread, Sunday at 8:30 p.m.

Gia: first come is easiest to run, we just take the top ten.

Anika: I’m at rehearsal most days, I’d see it after it’s full.

Mateo: lottery?

Gia: then we need a sign-up window and someone to run the drawing.

Look closely: Which cost does each person name? Which cost does nobody name?

What it shows

First-come is easy for Gia. Anika would see the message too late.

One question I still have

What do the thirty people on the sheet think?
291
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

Evidence CWhiteboard

Three options on the whiteboard

A. First come, first served: fast to run; favors whoever sees it first. B. Lottery after a three-day sign-up: equal chance for everyone; needs a sign-up window and a drawing. C. Needs-based rubric: prioritizes people who can’t afford the paid version; needs personal information and someone to judge it.

Look closely: Underline the cost the crew wrote for each option.

What it shows

Three options, each with a good side and a cost.

One question I still have

Who would see people’s personal information in option C?

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know how many people need a seat the most, or if the crew can hold a second session.

Notes

292
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: fair criteria

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

Any way of giving out ten seats to thirty people leaves twenty people without one. A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up. First-come is fast, but it favors people who see the message first. A lottery gives everyone the same chance, but it does not consider need. A needs-based rubric aims at equity by helping people who cannot afford the paid version, but applicants must share personal information. Each option has a cost, so the crew has to choose which cost to accept.

Criteria are the standards or reasons a group uses to make a decision. When the crew states its criteria early, everyone knows the rule before anyone is chosen. Even people who do not get a seat may accept the result if the rule was clear in advance. If the crew picks a rule after seeing the names, people may wonder whether it was chosen to favor someone.

The Markkula Center for Applied Ethics at Santa Clara University suggests looking at a decision through several ethical lenses. They include consequences, rights, fairness, the common good, character and care. The lenses can point toward different options, and they do not add up to one automatic score. A strong decision explains which concern matters most in this case, who carries the cost and what could reduce it.

Professional standards

Adapted from a real sourceNational Commission for the Protection of Human Subjects of Biomedical and Behavioral Research; published by the U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare

The Belmont Report: B. Basic Ethical Principles: 3. Justice

Summary: Summary, not a quotation: the report treats justice as fairness in distribution and lists five widely accepted ways to share benefits and burdens: an equal share, individual need, individual effort, societal contribution and merit.

In plain words: The Belmont Report, written for research with people, lists several fair ways to share limited benefits, such as equal shares or need.

Question: Which whiteboard option comes closest to “an equal share,” and which comes closest to “individual need”?

293
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

The option closest to an equal share is ___. The option closest to need is ___.

The option closest to an equal share is B, the lottery. The option closest to need is C, the needs-based rubric.

In the news

Real sourceNPRDecember 20, 2020

The Ethics Of Who Gets The COVID-19 Vaccine And When

A bioethicist explains how leaders chose who went first when there wasn’t enough for everyone.

Real sourceScientific AmericanSeptember 3, 2020

How to Decide Who Should Get a COVID-19 Vaccine First

Lays out competing criteria such as risk, fairness and benefit, the same lenses the crew uses.

Notes

294
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownFollow each option to its effects and write who carries the cost in each box. About 10 minutes.

Follow each method to its consequences. Who carries the cost under each one, and what makes the chosen process legitimate to the twenty who lose?

First come, first served

  1. The ten fastest responders get seats; people at rehearsal or work see the sign-up late

    Who is affected

    Anika and others who check messages late

Lottery after a three-day sign-up

  1. Each of the thirty has the same chance, and need is not considered

    Who is affected

Needs-based rubric

  1. Those with the greatest need are prioritized; applicants must share personal information

    Who is affected

    Applicants asked to disclose their finances

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The people on the sign-up sheet are missing. I would ask them how they want the seats given out.
295
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose the note you would send, explain why and fix the two marked phrases. About 8 minutes.

Gia is drafting a note to the thirty people on the sign-up sheet. Which sentence could the crew defend?

  • A “We picked the fairest method, so nobody loses out.”

  • B “We’re holding a lottery so everyone has the same chance. A lottery doesn’t favor people with the most need, so we’re looking into a second session.”

  • C “Seats go to the first ten names on the sheet, because those people wanted it most.”

Why I chose it

B. It names the lottery, the reason and its cost. It also says what the crew will do about that cost. A and C are not accurate.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

We should do first come first served because 1 it’s the most fair. Everyone has the same chance to sign up and if you really want it you’ll sign up fast. It’s simple and 2 nobody can complain because they had the same opportunity as everyone else. Also it’s way less work for us than reading thirty applications or doing some random drawing. The people who don’t get in can just come to the next workshop whenever we have one. This is obviously the best way.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

First-come is the fastest way to give out the seats.

Rewrite phrase 2

Anika could complain, because she sees messages after rehearsal.
296
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Hold a small-group discussion, then write a short note to the thirty students explaining how the ten seats will be given out.

Use: The three options and Gia and Anika’s perspectives.

You’ll make: Note, 4–6 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read the three options on the whiteboard in Evidence C.
  2. Fill in the chart: who gains and who pays a cost under each option.
  3. Discuss your choice in your group, using your role card.
  4. Write your choice and your reason in the planner.
  5. Write a note of 4 to 6 sentences in the Your draft box.
  6. Add one change that helps people who do not get a seat.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write a 4–6 sentence note with the frame “We chose __ because __. This is hard for __.”
  • Say it: In your group, take a role (facilitator, recorder or questioner) and explain aloud which method you picked and who it is harder for.
  • Show it: Fill the who-gains, who-pays chart for all three options, with a simple icon for each person affected.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

297
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

First come, first served: who gains, who pays

Gains: ___. Pays: ___.

Gains: people who see it first. Pays: Anika.

Lottery: who gains, who pays

Gains: ___. Pays: ___.

Gains: all thirty get the same chance. Pays: people in need.

Needs-based rubric: who gains, who pays

Gains: ___. Pays: ___.

Gains: people who cannot afford the paid workshop. Pays: everyone who must share personal information.

My choice and my reason

We chose ___ because ___.

We chose a lottery because everyone on the sheet gets the same chance.

Your draft

We chose ___ because ___. This is hard for ___.

We chose a lottery after a three-day sign-up because everyone gets the same chance. This is hard for people who cannot afford the paid workshop, because a lottery does not look at need. It is also hard for the twenty people who do not get a seat. We will try to plan a second session for them.
298
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your note say how the seats will be given out?

    YesNo
  • Does it give a reason?

    YesNo
  • Does it name who the choice is harder for?

    YesNo
  • Does it offer one fix?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo reference to who is affected.Mentions people vaguely.Names specific people and effects from the case.Uses case facts to show who gains and who pays.
ReasoningClaims an option is obviously best.Gives one reason only.Uses a lens and names the strongest objection.Uses two lenses and proposes a revision tied to the objection.
Audience & purposeIgnores the twenty who miss out.Mentions them briefly.Explains the process to all applicants.Builds legitimacy by publishing criteria and a remedy.
RevisionNo change.Wording only.Adds a named cost and revision.Explains how the revision addresses the objection.
299
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I added who the lottery is hard for, because my first note said nobody loses.

Notes

300
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete the sentence frames. About 10 minutes.

1 Whose view would most challenge the option you prefer?

If I pick first-come, Anika would challenge it. She sees messages after rehearsal.

2 Anika says she does not need a seat. What is she asking the crew for?

She wants to know how the crew is picking. She wants them to be honest that she would lose out.

3 What would make the twenty people without seats accept the result as fair?

Tell everyone the rule before picking anyone. Then plan a second session if the crew can.

My take

I think the crew should use ___ because ___.

I think the crew should use a lottery because everyone gets the same chance.

This choice is harder for ___.

This choice is harder for people who cannot pay for the paid workshop.

One change that would help is ___.

One change that would help is a second session for people who do not get a seat.
301
Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 17: How should the crew give out ten free seats?

In this case, a group of friends has ten free workshop seats and thirty people who want one. Your student compared three ways to choose and wrote a note that explains the choice and who carries its cost.

Questions to talk about

  1. When something is limited, like tickets or seats, what makes a way of choosing feel fair?
  2. Why might it help to announce a rule before anyone signs up?
  3. What is one kind way to tell people they were not picked?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

302

Lesson 18Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?

Overview

Students read a short story in which the theater curtain at Dec and Anika’s school will not close. Meanwhile, a social post points to the district’s $48 million budget. Students label a proposed-budget excerpt by year, stage and units, explain why the post compares a total with a per-pupil figure and map who decides. They then write a budget question and a 60-second comment for the school board.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a label on a document
  • tell a total from an amount for each person
  • write a polite question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • label a budget document’s year, stage and units
  • connect the torn curtain to one specific budget line
  • write a question of 2 or 3 sentences that the school board can answer

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A and C on half-pages, one set per pair

Materials, continued

  • A source-card template: year, stage, units, line

The task in this edition

Task: Make a source card for the district budget and write one question the theater crew could bring to the school board.

Students make: Source card plus a 2–3 sentence question

Pacing

Opener (page 303): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud while students follow along.

Key terms (pages 304 and 305): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (pages 308 and 309): 12 min. Short on time: 10 min. Read the budget note aloud. Students fill in only the What it shows boxes.

Key idea (pages 310 and 311): 8 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 312): 8 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 313): 8 min. Short on time: 5 min. Vote on the three options and skip the marked draft.

Pacing, continued

Your task (pages 314 and 315): 18 min. Short on time: 16 min. Fill in the source card together, then students write the question.

Check your work (pages 316 and 317): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Check the questions with the success list yourself.

Questions to discuss (page 318): 8 min. Short on time: 4 min. Use question 2 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 319): at home.

Periods: full chapter 79 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

Plan 18

Lesson 18Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 18 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

Standards, continued

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D2.Civ.4.6-8 Explain the powers and limits of the branches of government, public officials and agencies at different levels. In this case: Students explain the powers of local school boards compared with state and federal governments.

Codes of ethics

  • ASPA Code of Ethics: 5. Fully Inform and Advise.
  • SPJ Code of Ethics: Seek Truth and Report It
  • Credo for Ethical Communication: “We advocate truthfulness, accuracy, honesty, and reason…” (one of nine unnumbered principles)

Heat map

Opener (page 303): Low

Key terms (pages 304 and 305): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 308 and 309): Low

Key idea (pages 310 and 311): Low

Sort the evidence (page 312): Low

Practice (page 313): Low

Your task (pages 314 and 315): Low

Heat map, continued

Check your work (pages 316 and 317): Low

Try it at your school

Find one line in your school’s budget.

  • With a teacher or advisor, find your district’s budget on its website
  • Label the document’s year and stage
  • Find one line connected to something you use (facilities, arts, technology)
  • Ask your student council how students can submit a budget question or comment

Who to ask: Student council advisor, school business office, school board clerk, principal

Safety: Get permission before photographing spaces or people at school. Stick to observed facts when posting about budgets.

Sources

  • ABC, “About Abbott Elementary,” No date listed
  • National Center for Education Statistics, “Revenue sources for public schools by state, 2022–23 (Digest table 235.20),” No date listed
Plan 18b
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?

The district’s proposed budget is $48 million, the school theater curtain won’t close, and Dec wants to ask the school board about it.

On your ownRead What happened and underline the three dollar amounts. About 6 minutes.

Anika, Dec and Mari test a small light circuit in a theater workshop, with Pauta beside them.

Your role: You’re the one who works out the per-student number before anyone repeats the post. New skill: Compare numbers on the same scale.

What happened

The curtain in the school theater is torn, and it no longer closes all the way. Dec, 17, pulls that curtain at every show. He and Anika, 16, are on the theater crew. The facilities office gave the theater advisor a quote to replace the curtain: $6,800.

Mari, 19, is helping them prepare a question for the school board. They find the district’s proposed budget for next school year. The total is $48 million for a projected 3,200 students. One line sets aside $310,000 for building repairs at all schools. A note says the figures may change before the board adopts the budget.

On Tuesday at 6:10 p.m., a post starts going around. It compares the district’s $48 million with another district, Westbrook, at $21,000 per student. “And they can’t fix ONE curtain??” it asks. Dec has a photo of the torn curtain. He wants to be the one who asks the board about it.

Your question: What can the $48 million total tell Dec about the curtain, and what should he ask the school board?

303
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Revenue Revenue is money that comes into a government or an organization, such as taxes and grants.

En español: ingresos

In this case: NCES reports that public schools get revenue from federal, state and local sources. That national data cannot show what Dec’s district spends on a curtain.

Expenditure An expenditure is money that a government or an organization spends.

En español: gasto

In this case: The $48 million is a proposed plan for next school year. It lists planned expenditures, but none of that money has been spent yet.

Per-pupil amount A per-pupil amount is a total divided by the number of students, so that districts of different sizes can be compared.

En español: monto por estudiante

In this case: $48,000,000 ÷ 3,200 students = $15,000 per student. Westbrook’s $21,000 is already per student, but its year and stage are unknown.

Who is involved

Mari

Helping the theater crew with a budget question

“Forty-eight million dollars, and the curtain still won’t close. Ay, bendito. Before we get mad at the big number, which line is supposed to fix it?”

Dec

Pulls the curtain at every show

“I pull that curtain every show. It doesn’t close all the way anymore. That part I can show you.”

304
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, why do you think the theater curtain is still not fixed?

I think the curtain is not fixed because ___.

I think the curtain is not fixed because the district spends its money on other needs.

Notes

305
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

$48 million and one torn curtain

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Revenue: Revenue is money that comes into a government or an organization, such as taxes and grants.
  • Expenditure: An expenditure is money that a government or an organization spends.
  • Per-pupil amount: A per-pupil amount is a total divided by the number of students, so that districts of different sizes can be compared.
  • Proposal: A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet.
  • Decision-maker: A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice.

The story: The curtain that won’t close

The curtain in the school theater is torn, and it no longer closes all the way. Dec, 17, pulls that curtain at every show. He and Anika, 16, are on the theater crew. The facilities office has priced a new curtain at $6,800.

Mari, 19, is helping them prepare a question for the school board. They find the district’s proposed budget for next school year. The total is $48 million for a projected 3,200 students. One line sets aside $310,000 for building repairs at all schools.

On Tuesday at 6:10 p.m., a post starts going around. It compares the district’s $48 million with another district, Westbrook, at $21,000 per student. “And they can’t fix ONE curtain??” it asks.

Mari’s first question is simple: where are those numbers from? Your role is to work out the per-student number before anyone repeats the post.

Stop and think. Why is comparing $48 million with $21,000 per student unfair?

Same scale, fair comparison

In Lesson 11, you learned to compare two things on the same terms. The post does not. It compares a total for a whole district with an amount per student. That is like comparing a whole pizza with one slice.

306
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Same scale, fair comparison, continued

A per-pupil amount is a total divided by the number of students, so that districts of different sizes can be compared. Do the math: $48,000,000 divided by 3,200 students is $15,000 per student. Now the two numbers are on the same scale. Even so, the comparison is not complete. Nobody knows Westbrook’s budget year or stage.

An expenditure is money that a government or an organization spends. Revenue is money that comes into a government or an organization, such as taxes and grants. The budget is marked “proposed.” In Lesson 4, you learned that a proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet. The figures may change before the board adopts the budget.

In Lesson 5, you read a pay statement line by line. A budget works the same way. Mari looks for the line that might pay for a curtain. The building repairs line is one guess. Dec starts with what he can show: the curtain, his photo and the $6,800 quote. “I don’t know where the money went,” he says, “so I’m not guessing.”

In Lesson 4, you also learned that a decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice. Here, the school board adopts the budget. So Dec’s question goes to the board: which line pays for stage equipment, and when does the board hear requests?

Stop and think. What does the word “proposed” tell you about the budget?

A TV show asks the same question

In the first episode of the TV comedy Abbott Elementary (ABC, December 7, 2021), teachers need rugs and supplies. The principal gets money and spends it on a new sign instead. The money existed. The question is which line it was in, and who decided.

Stop and think. Why does Dec start with his photo and the quote instead of guessing?

Sources

Real sourceABCNo date listed

About Abbott Elementary

307
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document and write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 12 minutes.

Evidence ABudget excerpt

The proposed budget for next school year

PROPOSED BUDGET, NEXT SCHOOL YEAR. Total proposed budget: $48,000,000. Projected enrollment: 3,200 students. Facilities, building repairs (all schools): $310,000. Note: figures are proposed and may change before the board adopts the budget.

Look closely: Circle the year, the stage and the unit for each number.

What it shows

It is a plan for next year: $48 million for 3,200 students.

One question I still have

Does the $310,000 for repairs cover a stage curtain?

Evidence CRepair quote

The facilities quote for a new curtain

Stage curtain replacement, main auditorium: remove the torn curtain, supply and install a flame-retardant replacement. Total: $6,800.

Look closely: What does the quote confirm, and who received it?

What it shows

A new curtain would cost $6,800.

One question I still have

Which budget line would pay for it?
308
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know if the repair money covers a curtain, or who decides which repairs come first.

Notes

309
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: per-pupil amounts

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 8 minutes.

Before you compare two budget numbers, check three labels: the year, the stage and the unit. An expenditure is money that a government or an organization spends. A proposed budget is a plan for expenditures. An adopted budget is the plan the board approves. Actual spending is what the district really spent. The $48 million is a proposed total for the whole district. The Westbrook figure is an amount per student.

A per-pupil amount is a total divided by the number of students, so that districts of different sizes can be compared. Dec’s district proposes $48,000,000 for a projected 3,200 students. That works out to $15,000 per student. The comparison is still not complete, because Westbrook’s budget year and stage are unknown. A per-pupil figure also cannot show whether either district has enough for its students’ needs.

Revenue is money that comes into a government or an organization, such as taxes and grants. The National Center for Education Statistics (NCES) reports that public schools get revenue from federal, state and local sources. The mix differs from state to state. National data like this gives context, but it cannot say what one district spends on a curtain. In most states, an elected local school board adopts the budget within state and federal rules. That is why Dec’s question should name one budget line, one need and the board’s next chance to hear requests.

Professional standards

Real sourceAmerican Society for Public Administration (ASPA)

ASPA Code of Ethics: 5. Fully Inform and Advise

“Provide accurate, honest, comprehensive, and timely information and advice to elected and appointed officials and governing board members”

In plain words: ASPA members agree to give decision-makers, such as school board members, accurate and complete information.

Question: The $6,800 curtain quote went to the theater advisor. What should the board see to rank that repair?

310
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Professional standards, continued

Your answer

The board should see ___.

The board should see the $6,800 quote, a photo of the torn curtain and the budget line that could pay for it.

In the news

Real sourceNPRApril 18, 2016

Why America's Schools Have A Money Problem

Explains how local property taxes make school budgets very different from one district to the next.

Real sourceChalkbeatMay 28, 2026

A financial reckoning is hitting America’s public schools

Big districts are making cuts, showing how a huge budget can still leave little for extras like a stage curtain.

Notes

311
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownTrace the curtain request from the photo to the vote and fill in each box. About 8 minutes.

Trace the curtain request from the photo to the vote. Who ranks it, who adopts the budget, which rules limit them, and where can students speak?

Fund the $6,800 curtain replacement next year

Who decides

The elected local school board, which adopts the budget

The facilities office, which ranks repair requests (how is still unknown)

Under which rule

State and federal rules and funding streams set limits on district budgets

Proposed building-repairs line: $310,000 for all schools

Who lives with it
Your way in
A written question or public comment before the budget is adopted

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The school board’s view is missing. I would ask which line pays for stage repairs.
312
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what the crew should do first, explain why and fix the two marked phrases. About 8 minutes.

A post compares the district’s $48 million total with Westbrook’s $21,000 per student. Someone reposts it and adds “we get way less.” What should the crew do first?

  • A Share it. Both figures are in dollars, and the curtain really is torn.

  • B Check that both figures use the same year, budget stage and units before comparing them.

  • C Divide $48 million by 3,200 students, and post that the district is underfunded.

Why I chose it

B. One number is a total and one is per student. You have to check the year, the stage and the units before you compare them.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Our district has a 1 $48 million budget but our theater curtain is ripped and gross. That’s so much money and they can’t even fix one curtain? It has been like this since before any of us joined the crew and it keeps getting worse every show. Where is all the money going? Other districts get way more. I saw a post that said so. We deserve better and 2 the board needs to explain themselves. We are honestly tired of waiting for this.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

Our district has a proposed $48 million budget for next year.

Rewrite phrase 2

Could the board tell us which line pays for stage repairs?
313
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

Make a source card for the district budget and write one question the theater crew could bring to the school board.

Use: A one-page budget excerpt with the facilities line and a photo of the curtain.

You’ll make: Source card plus a 2–3 sentence question

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read the top of the budget in Evidence A. Write its year and stage on the source card.
  2. Check the units. Write whether $48 million is a total or a per-student number.
  3. Find the line that might pay for repairs. Copy it onto the card.
  4. Write a question of 2 or 3 sentences in the Your draft box.
  5. Name the curtain, the $6,800 quote and the budget line in your question.
  6. Read your question aloud and check that it blames no one.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 2–3 sentences with the frame “The budget says __. We noticed __. Could the board explain __?”
  • Say it: Practice asking your board question aloud in 30 seconds, holding up the photo of the curtain.
  • Show it: Build the source card as sticky notes on the budget excerpt: year, stage, units and the line that might pay for the curtain.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

314
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

Year

Next school year

Stage

Proposed

Units

Total for the district

The line that might pay for the curtain

Building repairs, all schools: $310,000

Your draft

The budget says ___. We noticed ___. Could the board explain ___?

The proposed budget for next year sets aside $310,000 for building repairs at all schools. We noticed the theater curtain is torn and does not close all the way, and a new one costs $6,800. Could the board explain which budget line pays for stage repairs?

Notes

315
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your question say the budget is proposed and for next year?

    YesNo
  • Does it name the curtain and the $6,800 quote?

    YesNo
  • Does it name one budget line?

    YesNo
  • Does it ask without blaming anyone?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceUses an unlabeled total.Uses a figure without year or stage.Labels year, stage and line and cites the need.Adds a repair quote and notes what the figures can’t show.
ReasoningAssumes waste or theft.Compares mismatched numbers.Links the need to a specific budget line.Explains process questions: ranking, timing, decision-maker.
Audience & purposeAccuses the board.Complains without a request.Asks a question the board can answer.Asks a question and offers a concrete way for students to contribute.
316
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

How your work is scored, continued

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
RevisionNo change.Removes insults only.Adds labels and a specific line.Explains how each change makes an answer more likely.

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I took out my guess about wasted money, because we don’t know where the money went.

Notes

317
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete the sentence frames. About 8 minutes.

1 Dec wants to ask the board himself. Why might it matter who brings the question?

Dec pulls the curtain every show. He can say what is wrong because he sees it himself.

2 What else would you want to know before saying one district gets less than another?

I would want both numbers per student, from the same year.

My take

I think Dec should ask ___ because ___.

I think Dec should ask which line pays for the curtain because the total does not say.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The evidence that changed my first guess is the word “proposed” on the budget.

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is who decides which repairs come first.
318
Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 18: Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?

In this case, a group of friends reads a school district budget to find out why a torn theater curtain has not been fixed. Your student checked what the numbers mean and wrote a clear question for the school board.

Questions to talk about

  1. Where do you think a school’s money comes from?
  2. Why can it be misleading to compare a total with an amount per person?
  3. Who would you ask if something at school needed fixing?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

319

Lesson 19Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?

Overview

Students read a short story in which Gia wants to speak against a proposal to close the park’s lighted courts at 8 p.m. They read the parks committee agenda, the comment instructions and a nearby resident’s comment. They find the item, the deciding body, the deadline and the time limit. They then cut Gia’s three-page draft into a timed comment that makes one specific request.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a number and a time in a short document
  • tell something they saw from something they feel
  • read a short text aloud to a partner

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • find the agenda item, the deciding body and the time limit
  • build a comment from four parts: the item, what I saw, why it matters and what I ask
  • make one request the parks committee can act on
  • deliver the comment in 60 seconds or less

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student

Materials, continued

  • Evidence A and B on half-pages, one set per pair
  • A timer for each pair

The task in this edition

Task: Write and practice a 60-second comment for the parks committee about the court hours.

Students make: 60-second comment (about 130 words)

Pacing

Opener (page 320): 5 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud and go straight to the key terms.

Key terms (pages 321 and 322): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (pages 325 and 326): 10 min. Short on time: 8 min. Read Evidence A and B aloud. Students fill in only the What it shows boxes.

Key idea (pages 327 and 328): 6 min. Short on time: 2 min. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 329): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 330): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Vote on the three openings and skip the marked draft.

Pacing, continued

Your task (pages 331 to 333): 8 min. Short on time: 8 min.

Your draft (page 334): 12 min. Short on time: 12 min.

Check your work (pages 335 and 336): 5 min. Short on time: skip. Check each comment against the four success points yourself.

Questions to discuss (pages 337 and 338): 8 min. Short on time: 4 min. Use question 4 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 339): at home.

Periods: full chapter 72 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

Plan 19

Lesson 19Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 19 plan, continued

Standards, continued

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.1 Write an argument for a claim, backed by clear reasons and relevant evidence.

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

Standards, continued

D2.Civ.2.6-8 Explain the roles citizens play, such as voters, jurors, taxpayers, petitioners and protesters. In this case: Students explain the role of residents as commenters in local government.

Codes of ethics

  • ASPA Code of Ethics: 3. Promote democratic participation.
  • Credo for Ethical Communication: “We endorse freedom of expression, diversity of perspective, and acknowledgement of dissent…” (one of nine unnumbered principles)
  • SPJ Code of Ethics: Minimize Harm

Heat map

Opener (page 320): Low

Key terms (pages 321 and 322): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 325 and 326): Low

Key idea (pages 327 and 328): Low

Sort the evidence (page 329): Medium

Practice (page 330): Medium

Your task (pages 331 to 333): Low

Your draft (page 334): Low

Check your work (pages 335 and 336): Low

Try it at your school

Find your next local agenda.

  • With a trusted adult, find the website for your city council, school board or parks board
  • Open the next meeting agenda and find one item that affects you
  • Read the public-comment instructions: sign-up, time limit, written option
  • Draft a practice comment and decide with your adult whether to submit it

Who to ask: Clerk of the council or school board, a civics teacher, a student representative to the board if your district has one

Safety: Public comments and names may be published. Leave out addresses, phone numbers and anyone else’s private story. Attend meetings with a trusted adult.

Sources

  • Peacock, “Parks and Recreation,” No date listed
  • Seattle City Council, “Public Comment,” No date listed
Plan 19b
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?

Gia has two minutes to speak to the parks committee about the court lights, but her draft is three pages long.

On your ownRead What happened and underline the sentence that says what item 4 proposes. About 5 minutes.

Gia and Mateo sit on a front stoop, each holding pages of notes.

Your role: You’re the one holding the timer and listening for the request. New skill: Fit a request to the body’s remit and time limit.

What happened

It is Tuesday, 5:40 p.m. The parks committee meets at 6. Item 4 on its agenda is a proposal to turn off the park’s court lights at 8 p.m. The reason given is complaints about evening noise from nearby residents.

Gia, 21, wants to speak against item 4. It is her first time speaking at a public meeting. Each speaker gets two minutes. On Monday night, Gia wrote a three-page draft. When she reads page one out loud, it takes two minutes and forty seconds.

Mateo, 22, is timing her from a bench. He follows every word, but he cannot tell what she wants the committee to do. The draft also mentions a friend’s private situation, and page two is about the bus. Everything Gia says will become part of the public record, along with her name.

Your question: What should Gia keep in her two-minute comment, and what should she cut?

320
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Agenda item An agenda item is one topic listed on a meeting’s official schedule of business.

En español: punto del orden del día

In this case: Item 4, “Evening court hours,” proposes turning off the court lights at 8:00 p.m. Its action is a committee recommendation to the full council.

Remit A remit is the set of matters that a committee or other body is responsible for and can act on.

En español: competencia

In this case: The parks committee can recommend court hours. It cannot change bus routes, so page two of Gia’s draft belongs with a different body.

Public record A public record is information a government keeps that anyone can ask to see, such as meeting comments.

En español: registro público

In this case: Comments and speakers’ names become part of the public record. That is why Gia leaves her friend’s private situation out of her comment.

Who is involved

Gia

Speaking at a public meeting for the first time

“I timed page one out loud. Two minutes forty. There are three pages.”

Mateo

Timing Gia’s practice run from a bench

“I followed all of it. I still couldn’t tell you what she wants them to do.”

321
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, what do you think Gia should say in her two minutes?

I think Gia should say ___ because ___.

I think Gia should say why the park matters because she goes there all the time.

Notes

322
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

Two minutes at the microphone

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Agenda item: An agenda item is one topic listed on a meeting’s official schedule of business.
  • Remit: A remit is the set of matters that a committee or other body is responsible for and can act on.
  • Public record: A public record is information a government keeps that anyone can ask to see, such as meeting comments.
  • Proposal: A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet.
  • Decision-maker: A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice.

The story: Three pages, two minutes

It is Tuesday at 5:40 p.m. The parks committee meets at 6. Item 4 on its agenda is a proposal to turn off the park’s court lights at 8 p.m. The reason given is complaints about evening noise from nearby residents.

Gia, 21, wants to speak against item 4. It is her first time speaking at a public meeting. Each speaker gets two minutes. On Monday night, she wrote a three-page draft. When she reads page one out loud, it takes two minutes and forty seconds.

Mateo is timing Gia from a bench. He follows every word, but he cannot tell what she wants the committee to do. So he asks her one question: “If they only remember one sentence, what is it?”

Your role is to hold the timer and listen for the request.

Stop and think. Why can’t Mateo tell what Gia wants, even though he followed every word?

What the committee can do

An agenda item is one topic listed on a meeting’s official schedule of business. Item 4 is only about the court lights and closing time. Gia’s draft says, “Please don’t close the park.” But nobody is closing the park. It is the lights at 8 p.m.

323
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

What the committee can do, continued

A remit is the set of matters that a committee or other body is responsible for and can act on. Page two of Gia’s draft is all about the bus. The bus is a real problem, but the parks committee cannot change bus routes. In Lesson 10, you learned to take a problem to the office responsible. The bus question belongs somewhere else.

In Lesson 4, you learned that a proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet. Item 4 is a proposal. You also learned that a decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice. The agenda says the committee makes a recommendation, and the full council decides.

A short comment can do four jobs. It names the agenda item, shares something the speaker saw, says why it matters and ends with a clear request. Gia’s version is short. Item 4. What she counted: twenty or thirty people on the courts between 8 and 9. Many of them work late. Her request: keep the lights on until 9 on weekdays this summer.

One more thing comes out. The draft mentions a friend’s private situation. A public record is information a government keeps that anyone can ask to see, such as meeting comments. Gia’s words and her name will be public. Her friend’s story is her friend’s to share.

Stop and think. Why does the bus question not belong in this comment?

Real students at real meetings

In Philadelphia, students testified at school board meetings about school closures, using the district’s own data (Chalkbeat Philadelphia, April 3, 2026). In Newark, a student coalition brought its own research and specific requests to the school board (Chalkbeat Newark, November 26, 2025).

Stop and think. Why does Gia leave her friend’s story out?

Sources

Real sourceChalkbeat PhiladelphiaApril 3, 2026

‘Not what democracy is all about’: Philly students slam school leaders’ approach to school closures

Real sourceChalkbeat NewarkNovember 26, 2025

How a Newark student coalition is using its own research to press for change in schools

324
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document and write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 10 minutes.

Evidence AMeeting agenda

Item 4 on the parks committee agenda

Item 4. Evening court hours. Proposal to turn off the court lights and close the lighted courts at 8:00 p.m. Background: complaints about evening noise from nearby residents. Action: committee recommendation to the full council.

Look closely: Circle the item number, the proposed time and the action.

What it shows

Item 4 would turn off the court lights at 8 p.m.

One question I still have

How many people complained about the noise?

Evidence BComment rules

How to comment at the meeting

Sign up to speak by 5:00 p.m. on the day of the meeting. Each speaker has 2 minutes. Written comments may be submitted before the meeting. Comments and speakers’ names become part of the public record.

Look closely: Underline the deadline, the time limit and what becomes public.

What it shows

Each speaker gets 2 minutes. People can also send a written comment.

One question I still have

Who can read the comments after the meeting?
325
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know how many people complained, or what court users who can’t come at 6 p.m. think.

Notes

326
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: remit

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 6 minutes.

A remit is the set of matters that a committee or other body is responsible for and can act on. The parks committee can make a recommendation about court hours. It cannot change bus routes. That is why Gia’s comment should ask for something the parks committee can do.

An agenda item is one topic listed on a meeting’s official schedule of business. Each committee, council or board sets its own rules for who can speak, when and for how long. Seattle City Council is one real example. Its public comment page describes speaking in person or by phone and signing up before the meeting. Each speaker gets up to two minutes, and written comments can be sent by email.

A short comment can do four jobs. It names the agenda item, shares something the speaker observed, says why it matters and ends with a clear request. Before adding personal details, check whether comments become public. A public record is information a government keeps that anyone can ask to see, such as meeting comments. At Gia’s meeting, comments and speakers’ names become part of the public record.

Professional standards

Real sourceAmerican Society for Public Administration (ASPA)

ASPA Code of Ethics: 3. Promote democratic participation

“Inform the public and encourage active engagement in governance. Be open, transparent and responsive, and respect and assist all persons in their dealings with public organizations.”

In plain words: ASPA's code asks people in public service to make it easy for every affected person to take part in decisions.

Question: The instructions allow written comments in advance. How does that help court users who cannot come at 6 p.m.?

Your answer

Written comments help because ___.

Written comments help because people who work late can still send their ideas before the meeting.
327
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceChalkbeat PhiladelphiaApril 3, 2026

‘Not what democracy is all about’: Philly students slam school leaders’ approach to school closures

Students testified at board meetings and used district data, real public comment with a clear destination.

Real sourceChalkbeat NewarkNovember 26, 2025

How a Newark student coalition is using its own research to press for change in schools

Teens brought evidence and specific requests to their school board, the formula this case teaches.

Notes

328
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownFollow a comment from the speaker to the final decision and fill in each box. About 6 minutes.

Follow a comment from the speaker to the final decision. Which body hears it, which body decides, and whose concerns reach the room?

Turn off the court lights at 8 p.m.?

Who decides

Full council: takes the final action

Under which rule
Who lives with it
Your way in

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

Court users who work late are missing. I would ask them what time they usually play.
329
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose the best opening sentence, explain why and fix the two marked phrases. About 6 minutes.

Gia has two minutes on item 4. Which opening sentence gives the committee the most to work with?

  • A “The park is really important to everyone, and closing it is a terrible idea.”

  • B “Good evening. I’m Gia, and I’m commenting on item 4, the proposal to turn off the court lights at 8 p.m.”

  • C “You guys never listen to young people, so I hope tonight is different.”

Why I chose it

B. It names item 4 and the lights at 8 p.m., so the committee knows right away what Gia is talking about.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Hi, my name is Gia and I have lived in this neighborhood my whole life. The park is really important to everyone and closing it is a terrible idea. I go there all the time with my friends and it’s one of the only free things to do around here. My friend works late and this is the only time she can play and 1 she’s been going through a lot at home. You guys never listen to young people. 2 Please don’t close the park.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

Many of us work late, so after 8 is the only time we can play.

Rewrite phrase 2

Please keep the court lights on until 9 p.m. on weekdays.
330
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft. About 8 minutes.

Write and practice a 60-second comment for the parks committee about the court hours.

Use: The agenda item summary and comment instructions.

You’ll make: 60-second comment (about 130 words)

Time: 45 minutes

Notes

331
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

  1. Read item 4 in Evidence A. Write the item number and what it proposes.
  2. Read the comment rules in Evidence B. Write the time limit.
  3. Write what Gia saw at the courts and why it matters.
  4. Write one request the parks committee can act on.
  5. Put the four parts together in a comment of about 130 words in the Your draft box.
  6. Read your comment aloud with a timer. Stop at 60 seconds.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Submit the comment in writing, about 130 words, using the four-box organizer.
  • Say it: Deliver your 60-second comment to a partner who plays a committee member and must repeat your request back.
  • Show it: Make a four-box cue card (item, what I saw, why it matters, what I ask) with a small drawing in each box, and speak from it.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

The item

I’m here about item ___.

Item 4, turning off the court lights at 8 p.m.

What I saw

I noticed ___.

Twenty to thirty people on the courts between 8 and 9.

Why it matters

Many people work late, so after 8 is when they can play.

What I ask

Keep the lights on until 9 p.m. on weekdays.
332
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

My time limit

60 seconds

Notes

333
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your draft

On your ownWrite your draft in the boxes, using your planner from the page before. About 12 minutes.

Your comment, about 130 words

Good evening. I’m here about item ___.

Good evening. My name is Gia, and I’m here about item 4, the plan to turn off the court lights at 8 p.m. I play on the courts after my café shifts. On weekday evenings, I counted twenty to thirty people on the courts between 8 and 9. Many of us work late, so after 8 is the only time we can play. I know some neighbors are worried about noise. Please keep the court lights on until 9 p.m. on weekdays this summer. Thank you.

Notes

334
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Does your first sentence name item 4?

    YesNo
  • Does your comment share one observation from Gia?

    YesNo
  • Does it make one clear request?

    YesNo
  • Does it fit in 60 seconds when you read it aloud?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceNo facts.General claim about importance.One specific observation tied to the item.Observation plus acknowledgment of another perspective.
ReasoningAttacks the body.States a feeling only.Explains why the change matters.Weighs the concern and offers a middle path.
Audience & purposeWrong body or no request.Request is vague.Names the item and a specific request.Request fits the body’s remit and includes a follow-up.
RevisionNo change.Shortens only.Removes private details and adds a request.Explains each cut in terms of time, privacy and purpose.
335
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work, continued

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed “don’t close the park” to “keep the lights on until 9” because item 4 is about the lights.

Notes

336
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete the sentence frames. About 8 minutes.

1 The parks committee cannot fix the bus problem. Who should get that question instead?

The office or board in charge of the buses. Gia could look up its meeting and its comment rules.

2 What does Gia get from speaking, even if the committee recommends turning off the lights?

Her comment goes on the record, so the committee knows people use the courts after 8.

3 Court users who work late may miss a 6 p.m. meeting. How could their views reach the committee?

They could send a written comment before the meeting. The rules allow that.

My take

I think Gia should ___ because ___.

I think Gia should ask for lights until 9 on weekdays because the committee can act on that.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The evidence that changed my first guess is the agenda. Item 4 is about the lights, not closing the park.
337
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

My take, continued

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is how many people complained about the noise.

Notes

338
Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 19: What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?

In this case, Gia gets two minutes at a parks committee meeting to speak about a plan to turn off the court lights. Your student helped cut her three-page draft into a short comment with one clear request.

Questions to talk about

  1. Who makes decisions about parks and other public spaces in a town or city?
  2. What makes a short request easy for a listener to remember?
  3. Why might someone leave a friend’s story out of a public comment?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

339

Lesson 20Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?

Content note

The real sources include AI-generated images from disasters such as Hurricane Helene. Preview them, and do not share images of real people in distress, even to debunk them.

Overview

Students read a short story in which a realistic image captioned “Courtyard flooded today, stay away” spreads through a campus group chat. They compare the image, Sami’s zoom-in, a secondhand reply, a detector score and the campus alerts page with NIST’s overview of detection. They then write the verification note Jordy posts instead of the image.

Before this case

Students should already be able to:

  • find a date and a time in a short document
  • tell what a picture shows from what a caption says
  • write a complete sentence that answers a question

Objectives

Students will be able to:

  • separate what an image shows from what its caption claims
  • name a better source to check

Objectives, continued

  • use “unverified” correctly when proof is missing
  • write 2 or 3 sentences that do not accuse the poster

Materials

  • This chapter, one copy per student
  • Evidence A and D on half-pages, one set per pair
  • An image-check card: claim, who posted first, date, other proof

The task in this edition

Task: With a partner, fill an image-check card and write two sentences telling friends whether to trust the courtyard picture.

Students make: Completed card plus 2–3 sentences

Pacing

Opener (page 340): 5 min. Short on time: 4 min. Read What happened aloud and go straight to the key terms.

Key terms (pages 341 and 342): 6 min. Short on time: 3 min. Read the key terms aloud. Skip Who is involved.

Look at the evidence (pages 345 and 346): 10 min. Short on time: 8 min. Read Evidence A and D aloud. Students fill in only the What it shows boxes.

Pacing, continued

Key idea (pages 347 and 348): 6 min. Short on time: 2 min. Read the first paragraph of the key idea aloud. Skip the code of ethics.

Sort the evidence (page 349): 6 min. Short on time: skip.

Practice (page 350): 6 min. Short on time: 4 min. Vote on the three options and skip the marked draft.

Your task (pages 351 and 352): 15 min. Short on time: 15 min.

Check your work (pages 353 and 354): 5 min. Short on time: 3 min. Students answer the Check your work questions only.

Questions to discuss (pages 355 and 356): 8 min. Short on time: 6 min. Use question 4 as an exit ticket.

Talk about this case at home (page 357): at home.

Periods: full chapter 67 minutes; one period 45 minutes.

Standards

RI.6.1 Use evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer from it.

W.6.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

Plan 20

Lesson 20Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 20 plan, continued

Standards, continued

W.6.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning, revising, editing or rewriting.

SL.6.1.c Ask and answer specific questions with details that add to the discussion.

SL.6.1.d Review the main ideas of a discussion and show you understand other views by reflecting and paraphrasing.

RI.7.1 Use several pieces of evidence from the text to support what it says directly and what you can infer.

W.7.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

W.7.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.7.1.c Ask questions that draw out more detail, and respond with relevant ideas that bring the discussion back on topic.

SL.7.1.d Take in new information from others and change your view when the evidence calls for it.

RI.8.1 Use the evidence that most strongly supports your analysis of what a text says and implies.

W.8.2 Write an informative text that explains a topic by choosing, organizing and analyzing relevant information.

Standards, continued

W.8.5 With help from peers and adults, strengthen writing by planning and revising, focusing on purpose and audience.

SL.8.1.c Ask questions that connect several speakers’ ideas, and respond with relevant evidence and observations.

SL.8.1.d Take in new information from others and qualify or defend your view based on the evidence.

D3.1.6-8 Gather information from several sources, using origin, authority, structure, context and corroboration to choose them. In this case: Students choose sources by origin and authority, like the campus facilities page.

Codes of ethics

  • RTDNA Code of Ethics: Truth and accuracy above all
  • SPJ Code of Ethics: Seek Truth and Report It
  • PRSA Code of Ethics: Disclosure of Information

Heat map

Opener (page 340): Low

Key terms (pages 341 and 342): Low

Look at the evidence (pages 345 and 346): Low

Key idea (pages 347 and 348): Low

Heat map, continued

Sort the evidence (page 349): Low

Practice (page 350): Low

Your task (pages 351 and 352): Low

Check your work (pages 353 and 354): Low

Try it at your school

Pause before you share an image as news.

  • Find where the image first appeared before reposting
  • Check an official or independent source for the event
  • If you can’t confirm it, say so or don’t share it
  • Suggest a “check before posting” rule for a club account you help run

Who to ask: School librarian or media specialist, journalism advisor, campus communications office

Safety: Don’t download or share images of real people that could embarrass or harm them, even to debunk them. Report harmful fakes to a trusted adult and the platform.

Sources

  • UC Berkeley School of Information, “Hany Farid breaks down the viral Helene image,” October 4, 2024
Plan 20b

Lesson 20Case planGrades 6–8 educator edition

Lesson 20 plan, continued

Sources, continued

  • National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), “Reducing Risks Posed by Synthetic Content: An Overview of Technical Approaches to Digital Content Transparency,” No date listed
Plan 20c
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?

A realistic image says the campus courtyard flooded today, and Jordy must decide what the six o’clock recap can say about it.

On your ownRead What happened and underline the caption’s claim. About 5 minutes.

Lupa holds a cropped photo of a courtyard next to the full photo pinned on a board. The full photo also shows a blue doorway.

Your role: You’re the one who writes the verification note Jordy posts at six. New skill: Confirm an image with independent sources.

What happened

It is Wednesday, 3:10 p.m. For twenty minutes, an image has been going around the group chat. It looks like a photo of the campus courtyard, with water over the paving and benches. The caption says, “Courtyard flooded today, stay away.” It showed up at 2:48 p.m. with no link, no date and no name.

Jordy is putting together the crew’s recap, which goes out at six. Sami has zoomed in on a hand in the picture, and the fingers seem to merge at the knuckles. Someone ran the image through a free online detector. It reported “12% likely AI-generated.”

A reply in the chat says the writer’s roommate’s friend saw water near the library. Jordy checks the campus facilities alerts page. It shows no active alerts, but its last update was Monday morning.

Your question: Did the courtyard flood today, and what should the recap say about the image?

340
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

On your ownRead each key term and its example, then write your first guess in the box. About 6 minutes.

Provenance Provenance is information about where an image or a document came from and how it has been handled.

En español: procedencia

In this case: The courtyard image arrived at 2:48 p.m. with no link, no date and no named poster. Its provenance is unknown.

Corroboration Corroboration is support for a claim from an independent source.

En español: corroboración

In this case: A campus alert or someone’s dated photo of the courtyard could corroborate the flood. A roommate’s friend’s report of water near the library cannot.

Verification note A verification note is a short record of what you checked, what you found and what is still unknown.

En español: nota de verificación

In this case: Instead of posting the image, the recap says what the crew checked, what it found and what is still unknown.

Who is involved

Sami

Checking where the image came from

“Everyone’s zooming in on the hand. I did too, and it’s weird. But I still don’t know who posted this.”

Jordy

Putting the six o’clock recap together

“The recap goes out at six. Right now I have an image with no source, a strange hand and an alerts page that hasn’t updated since Monday.”

341
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your first guess

Before you look at the evidence, do you think the courtyard flooded today?

I think the courtyard ___ because ___.

I think the courtyard flooded because the picture shows water everywhere.

Notes

342
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Reading passage

The flood nobody can confirm

On your ownRead the passage. At each Stop and think box, pause and answer the question in your head or with a partner. About 5 minutes.

Words to know

  • Provenance: Provenance is information about where an image or a document came from and how it has been handled.
  • Corroboration: Corroboration is support for a claim from an independent source.
  • Verification note: A verification note is a short record of what you checked, what you found and what is still unknown.
  • Claim: A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.
  • Holding statement: A holding statement is a short update that says what is known, what is still being checked and when people will hear more.
  • Correction: A correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information.

The story: An image with no source

It is Wednesday at 3:10 p.m. For twenty minutes, an image has been going around the group chat. It looks like a photo of the campus courtyard, with water over the paving and the benches. The caption says, “Courtyard flooded today, stay away.” It showed up at 2:48 p.m. with no link, no date and no name.

Jordy is putting together the crew’s recap, which goes out at six. Sami zooms in on a hand in the picture. The fingers seem to merge at the knuckles. Someone runs the image through a free online detector. It says “12% likely AI-generated.” Someone else says their roommate’s friend saw water near the library.

Jordy checks the campus facilities alerts page. It shows no active alerts, but its last update was Monday morning.

This is the last case in the casebook, and it uses almost every skill you have learned. Your role is to write the verification note Jordy posts at six.

Stop and think. Why does Sami care more about who posted the image first than about the hand?

343
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Where did it come from?

In Lesson 1, a real clip in a group chat seemed to cancel a screening. You learned to find the original source. That is the first move here too. Provenance is information about where an image or a document came from and how it has been handled. This image has no link, no date and no named poster, so its provenance is unknown.

The caption makes a claim, a statement that something is true that you can check with evidence. The hand is a clue, not proof. The detector score is a clue, not proof. As Sami asks, “Twelve percent of what?” And a roommate’s friend is not a source. Near the library is not the courtyard, either.

Corroboration is support for a claim from an independent source. A campus alert would count. So would someone’s dated photo of the courtyard. In Lesson 9, you learned to check an official source. The alerts page is official, but it has not been updated since Monday, so it cannot prove there was no flood.

Should Jordy post the image with a question mark? No. “A question mark still spreads the picture,” Jordy says. Instead, Jordy writes a verification note, a short record of what you checked, what you found and what is still unknown. It works like the holding statement from Lesson 1: it says what is known, what is being checked and when people will hear more. If better evidence appears, the crew will post an update. In Lesson 3, you learned that a correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information. If the note turns out to be wrong, the crew will post one where people saw it.

Stop and think. Why is the alerts page not enough to prove there was no flood?

Real fake images

After Hurricane Helene in October 2024, an image of a crying girl holding a puppy in a rescue boat spread fast. Fact-checkers found no original photographer or news source. A digital-forensics expert pointed to details that did not hold together (UC Berkeley School of Information, October 4, 2024).

Stop and think. Why is a verification note better than posting the image with a question mark?

Sources

Real sourceUC Berkeley School of InformationOctober 4, 2024

Hany Farid breaks down the viral Helene image

344
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence

On your ownRead each document and write what it shows and what it leaves out. About 10 minutes.

Evidence AGroup-chat post

The courtyard image and its caption

Image, described: a photo-like view of the campus courtyard with water over the paving and benches. A person in the foreground holds up a phone. Caption: “Courtyard flooded today, stay away.” Shared Wednesday at 2:48 p.m. with no link, no date on the image and no original poster named.

Look closely: Underline what the caption claims. Circle what the post is missing.

What it shows

Someone says the courtyard flooded today, and the picture shows water.

One question I still have

Who posted this picture first, and when?

Evidence DWeb page

The campus facilities alerts page, checked at 3:10 p.m.

“No active alerts. Last update: Monday, 9:15 a.m. Scheduled elevator maintenance in Science Hall, completed.”

Look closely: When was this page last updated? Compare that with the caption’s claim.

What it shows

On Wednesday at 3:10 p.m., the page had no alert about the courtyard.

One question I still have

Would this page show a flood on the same day?
345
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Look at the evidence, continued

What is still missing from the evidence?

We don’t know who posted the picture first, or if anyone has a dated photo of water in the courtyard.

Notes

346
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Key idea: provenance

On your ownRead the key idea and the code of ethics, then answer the question in the box. About 6 minutes.

Provenance is information about where an image or a document came from and how it has been handled. Check it first when an image claims to show a news event. An image can look polished and still be generated, edited, old or shared with the wrong caption. The courtyard image arrived with no link, no date and no named poster, so its provenance is unknown.

A detail or a tool can give a clue, but it cannot settle the question. An odd-looking hand is a reason to look closer. A natural-looking hand does not prove that an image is real, either. The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) describes several ways to track, label, watermark and detect synthetic content, such as AI-generated images. NIST explains that each approach has technical limits.

For a claim about a real event, look for the earliest post, its date and place, and corroboration. Corroboration is support for a claim from an independent source. Here, that could be a campus alert or someone’s dated photo of the courtyard. If you cannot confirm the claim, write a verification note. A verification note is a short record of what you checked, what you found and what is still unknown.

Professional standards

Real sourceRadio Television Digital News Association (RTDNA)

RTDNA Code of Ethics: Truth and accuracy above all

“Journalism verifies, provides relevant context, tells the rest of the story and acknowledges the absence of important additional information.”

In plain words: The RTDNA code asks news staff to say what they checked and to admit what they still do not know.

Question: The facilities page shows no active alerts but was last updated Monday. What should Jordy's note say is still unknown?

Your answer

The note should say we don’t know ___.

The note should say we don’t know if the courtyard flooded today, because the page has not changed since Monday.
347
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

In the news

Real sourceNPRMay 22, 2023

Fake viral images of an explosion at the Pentagon were probably created by AI

A realistic fake image spread fast and briefly moved markets before officials confirmed nothing happened.

Real sourceCNNMay 22, 2023

‘Verified’ Twitter accounts share fake image of ‘explosion’ near Pentagon, causing confusion

A blue check was not proof: accounts that looked trustworthy still shared an image with no real source.

Notes

348
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Sort the evidence

On your ownSort each piece of evidence under the claim it bears on and fill in each box. About 6 minutes.

Two claims are in play: the flood and the image. Sort each piece of evidence under the claim it actually bears on. What would settle either one?

EvidenceClaim 1The courtyard flooded today.Claim 2The image was generated by AI.
1 The image shows water in a courtyard, with no date or source
Supports
Neither
2 Facilities alerts page at 3:10 p.m.: no active alerts
Challenges
Neither
3 Secondhand report of water near the library
Supports
Neither
4 An odd hand and a 12% detector score
Neither
Leaves open

Still open

  • The image’s earliest source and date

Whose perspective is missing?

Whose view is missing from these documents? What would you ask them?

The view that is missing is ___. I would ask ___.

The person who posted the picture first is missing. I would ask where and when they got it.
349
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Practice: choose a response

On your ownChoose what Jordy should do, explain why and fix the two marked phrases. About 6 minutes.

The recap goes out at six. What should Jordy do about the courtyard image?

  • A Post the image with a question: “Is the courtyard flooded?”

  • B Say the image is fake, because the hand looks wrong.

  • C Leave the image out, report what the crew checked and say the flood is not confirmed.

Why I chose it

C. The crew does not know if the flood is real. So it should say what it checked and leave the picture out.

Improve a draft

A student’s first draft

Heads up everyone!! 1 The courtyard flooded today so don’t go over there. Some people are saying the picture is AI because the hand looks weird but I ran it through a detector and it said 12% AI so it’s basically real. My roommate also said her friend saw water near the library earlier, so that pretty much confirms it. Stay safe and 2 tell your friends, we don’t want anyone getting hurt or ruining their shoes lol. We’ll post more if we hear anything else about it.

Rewrite each marked phrase so it says only what the evidence supports.

Rewrite phrase 1

We can’t confirm that the courtyard flooded today.

Rewrite phrase 2

Please don’t share the picture until we know more.
350
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Grades 6–8

Your task

On your ownRead the steps and fill in the planner boxes before you start your draft.

With a partner, fill an image-check card and write two sentences telling friends whether to trust the courtyard picture.

Use: The image description, caption and campus facilities page only.

You’ll make: Completed card plus 2–3 sentences

Time: 45 minutes

  1. Read the caption in Evidence A. Write what it says happened, and when.
  2. Write who posted the picture first and when. Write “unknown” if you cannot find out.
  3. Check the alerts page in Evidence D. Write what it says about a flood.
  4. Decide with your partner: is the claim confirmed, false or unverified?
  5. Write 2 or 3 sentences in the Your draft box that tell friends whether to trust the picture.
  6. Check that your sentences do not blame the person who posted it.

Show it your way

  • Write it: Write 2–3 sentences with the frame “The picture shows __. It doesn’t show __.”
  • Say it: Tell a partner in 30 seconds whether you would share the picture and which proof you would want first.
  • Show it: Draw the image-check card as a four-box chart and circle the box that is still empty.

Prefer typing? Scan to open the online workspace.

351
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Your task, continued

The claim

The courtyard flooded today.

Who posted it first

Unknown. No link and no name.

Date on the image

None. It came into the chat at 2:48 p.m.

Other proof

The alerts page shows no flood alert.

Confirmed, false or unverified?

Unverified

Your draft

The picture shows ___. It doesn’t show ___.

The picture shows water in a courtyard. It doesn’t show who took it or when. The campus alerts page has no flood alert, so the flood is unverified. Please don’t share it yet.
352
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Check your work

On your ownAnswer the Check your work questions, mark your level in each rubric row and write one change you made. About 5 minutes.

  • Do your sentences say what the picture shows and what it doesn’t show?

    YesNo
  • Do they name a better source to check?

    YesNo
  • Do they use the word “unverified” correctly?

    YesNo
  • Do they avoid blaming the person who posted it?

    YesNo

How your work is scored

Mark one box in each row.

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
EvidenceTreats the image as proof.Cites a detector or a detail as a verdict.Checks the earliest source and an independent record.Checks several sources and names what each can’t show.
ReasoningDeclares real or fake with no basis.Hedges without explaining why.Matches confidence to evidence.Separates authenticity of the file from truth of the event.
Audience & purposeUrges spreading.Warns without guidance.Gives followers a safe next step.Gives a next step, a follow-up time and a way to contribute evidence.
353
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

How your work is scored, continued

SkillBeginningDevelopingProficientAdvanced
RevisionNo change.Softens words only.Replaces the verdict with a verification note.Explains how each change protects followers and credibility.

One change I made

I changed ___ because ___.

I changed “it’s fake” to “unverified” because we don’t know where the picture came from.

Notes

354
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Questions to discuss

On your ownWrite a short answer to each question, then complete the sentence frames. About 8 minutes.

1 What would you need beyond the image to support the caption’s claim?

Who posted it first and when, and another proof, like a campus alert or a photo with a date.

2 Do you agree with Jordy’s choice to leave the image out of the recap, and why?

Yes. If the crew posts the picture, people might believe it even if the note says it is not confirmed.

3 The alerts page shows nothing new since Monday. Does that prove the courtyard did not flood?

No. The page might not be updated yet. It shows no alert, but that is not proof.

My take

I think the crew should ___ because ___.

I think the crew should say the flood is not confirmed because nobody knows who posted the picture.

The evidence that changed my first guess is ___.

The evidence that changed my first guess is the alerts page. It shows no flood alert.
355
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

My take, continued

One question I still have is ___.

One question I still have is who took the picture first.

Notes

356
Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?Grades 6–8 student edition

Talk about this case at home

Lesson 20: Can the crew post this image as true?

In this case, a realistic image in a group chat claims that a campus courtyard flooded today. Your student checked where the image came from and wrote a short note that says what is known and what is not.

Questions to talk about

  1. What would you check before you share a picture of breaking news?
  2. Where does your town or school post official alerts?
  3. Why can saying you are not sure yet be better than guessing?

Nobody needs to share personal stories or private information to talk about this case.

See the case online.

357
Key termsGrades 6–8 student edition

Key terms

Academic credit Academic credit is credit toward a degree that a school gives for approved work, such as an internship.

En español: créditos académicos

Accountability Accountability is owning a mistake and doing what you said you would do to fix it.

En español: rendición de cuentas

ADA coordinator An ADA coordinator is the staff member a government names to handle disability access questions and complaints.

En español: coordinador de la ADA

Agenda item An agenda item is one topic listed on a meeting’s official schedule of business.

En español: punto del orden del día

Attribution Attribution is naming the person who made a work, such as a song, a photo or a video.

En español: atribución

Authority Authority is the power a person or group has to make or change a particular rule or decision.

En español: autoridad

Barrier A barrier is something that blocks or limits a person from taking part.

En español: barrera

Challenge A challenge is a formal request to remove or restrict a book or other library material.

En español: impugnación

Claim A claim is a statement that something is true. You can check a claim with evidence.

En español: afirmación

Compensation Compensation is all the pay and benefits a worker receives, including hourly rates, bonuses and overtime.

En español: compensación

Consent Consent is permission a person gives for something specific, such as sharing a record with a named person.

En español: consentimiento

Context Context is the information around an event or a quote that you need to understand what it means.

En español: contexto

Correction A correction is a public statement that replaces wrong information with accurate information.

En español: corrección

Corroboration Corroboration is support for a claim from an independent source.

En español: corroboración

Criteria Criteria are the standards or reasons a group uses to make a decision.

En español: criterios

Decision-maker A decision-maker is the person or group with the power to make a particular choice.

En español: quien toma la decisión

Disclosure A disclosure is a clear statement that tells people about a relationship or fact they would want to know.

En español: divulgación

358
Key termsGrades 6–8 student edition

Key terms, continued

Documentation Documentation is a record, such as a photo, a note or an email, that shows what was said or done and when.

En español: documentación

Education record An education record is a record directly about a student that a school or college keeps.

En español: expediente educativo

Eligibility Eligibility is meeting the requirements for a particular service or program.

En español: elegibilidad

Endorsement An endorsement is a message that shares someone's opinion or experience of a product to promote it.

En español: respaldo

Equal Pay Act The Equal Pay Act is a federal law from 1963 that requires equal pay for men and women who do equal work.

En español: Ley de Igualdad Salarial

Equity Equity is a way of sharing that adjusts for different needs so everyone gets a fair chance.

En español: equidad

Evaluation An evaluation is a school's formal process for learning about a student's needs, using more than one measure.

En español: evaluación

Expenditure An expenditure is money that a government or an organization spends.

En español: gasto

Fact pattern A fact pattern is the specific set of facts in a situation that a rule is applied to.

En español: conjunto de hechos

Fair Labor Standards Act The Fair Labor Standards Act is a federal law that sets minimum wage and overtime rules for most workers.

En español: Ley de Normas Justas de Trabajo

Fair use Fair use is a part of U.S. copyright law that allows some uses without permission, judged case by case with four factors.

En español: uso justo

FERPA FERPA, the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, is a federal law about who can see student education records.

En español: FERPA (Ley de Derechos Educativos y Privacidad de la Familia)

FICA FICA is the federal payroll tax that funds Social Security and Medicare.

En español: FICA (Seguro Social y Medicare)

Framing Framing is choosing which parts of a situation a message brings forward.

En español: encuadre

Gross pay Gross pay is the money you earn before any taxes or other deductions are taken out.

En español: salario bruto

Holding statement A holding statement is a short update that says what is known, what is still being checked and when people will hear more.

En español: comunicado provisional

Jurisdiction A jurisdiction is the place or area where a particular government or rule has authority.

En español: jurisdicción

359
Key termsGrades 6–8 student edition

Key terms, continued

Learning goal A learning goal is the knowledge or skill that a task is meant to show.

En español: meta de aprendizaje

License A license is permission from a rights holder to use a work under specific terms.

En español: licencia

Local acceptance Local acceptance is the list of materials that your own city's recycling or compost program actually takes.

En español: materiales aceptados en tu ciudad

Material connection A material connection is a relationship with a brand, like payment or a free product, that viewers might not expect.

En español: conexión material

Net pay Net pay is the money left after taxes and other deductions, often called take-home pay.

En español: salario neto

Per-pupil amount A per-pupil amount is a total divided by the number of students, so that districts of different sizes can be compared.

En español: monto por estudiante

Precedent A precedent is an earlier court decision that judges use as a guide in similar later cases.

En español: precedente

Primary beneficiary test The primary beneficiary test is how the U.S. Department of Labor decides whether an intern at a for-profit company is an employee.

En español: prueba del beneficiario principal

Program access Program access is an ADA rule that a city's services, taken as a whole, must be usable by people with disabilities.

En español: acceso a los programas

Proposal A proposal is a change that someone suggests and that has not been approved yet.

En español: propuesta

Provenance Provenance is information about where an image or a document came from and how it has been handled.

En español: procedencia

Public record A public record is information a government keeps that anyone can ask to see, such as meeting comments.

En español: registro público

Reasonable accommodation A reasonable accommodation is a change to a rule or practice that gives a person with a disability equal use of a place.

En español: acomodo razonable

Reconsideration policy A reconsideration policy is a library's written process for reviewing a challenge to a book.

En español: política de reconsideración

Registration Registration is signing up with your election office so that you are on the list of people who can vote.

En español: inscripción electoral

Remit A remit is the set of matters that a committee or other body is responsible for and can act on.

En español: competencia

360
Key termsGrades 6–8 student edition

Key terms, continued

Reuse Reuse is using an item again instead of throwing it away after one use.

En español: reutilización

Revenue Revenue is money that comes into a government or an organization, such as taxes and grants.

En español: ingresos

Sample ballot A sample ballot is a preview of the contests and measures that will appear on your ballot.

En español: boleta de muestra

Selection criteria Selection criteria are the written standards a library uses to decide which materials to include.

En español: criterios de selección

Source reduction Source reduction is preventing waste before it is created, for example by buying less packaging.

En español: reducción en la fuente

Substantial disruption Substantial disruption is the standard from Tinker v. Des Moines: a public school may limit speech that would seriously disrupt school activities.

En español: alteración sustancial

Title VII Title VII is part of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. It bans job discrimination based on race, color, religion, sex or national origin.

En español: Título VII

Trade-off A trade-off is a choice where getting one benefit means accepting a cost or giving something up.

En español: compensación entre opciones

Verification note A verification note is a short record of what you checked, what you found and what is still unknown.

En español: nota de verificación

Voter guide A voter guide is a document that explains or recommends choices in an election.

En español: guía para votantes

Withholding Withholding is money an employer takes out of each paycheck to pay taxes or other costs for the worker.

En español: retención

361
My progressGrades 6–8 student edition

My progress

After each case, write the date and your level for each skill: Beginning, Developing, Proficient or Advanced.

CaseDateEvidenceReasoningAudience and purposeRevision
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
362
My progressGrades 6–8 student edition

My progress, continued

CaseDateEvidenceReasoningAudience and purposeRevision
18
19
20
363

Track the work across the yearGrades 6–8 educator edition

Track the work across the year

Each case has the same four rubric rows, so growth is easy to see. Mark the level each student or group reached, case by case.

CaseEvidenceReasoningAudienceRevisionTook a civic step
1 Is the screening canceled?
2 Does the worksheet show what Dec knows?
3 What should a group do after a public mistake?
4 Who gets a say when a shared room changes?
5 Why is my deposit smaller than what I earned?
6 What can your family see in your college records?
7 Did one complaint get the novel banned?
8 Is it a recommendation or an ad?
9 What is on your ballot, and where do you check?
10 Whose job is it to fix the blocked route?
11 Why are Jordy and Gia paid different rates?
12 When can a school limit what students say?
13 Can the crew cut waste before it reaches the bin?
14 Does giving credit let the crew use the song?
15 Is Rafa’s unpaid internship really a job?
T19

Track the work across the year, continuedGrades 6–8 educator edition

Track the work across the year, continued

CaseEvidenceReasoningAudienceRevisionTook a civic step
16 Who wrote the new building rule?
17 How should the crew give out ten free seats?
18 Why is the theater curtain still falling apart?
19 What should Gia say in her two-minute comment?
20 Can the crew post this image as true?
T20

About course names and standardsGrades 6–8 educator edition

About course names and standards

AP, Pre-AP and IB activities are practice designed by No, Pero Why?. They are not official College Board or IB materials. Honors expectations are set by your school.

Framework sources

Common Core State Standards for English Language Arts and Literacy (grades 6–8) and the C3 Framework for Social Studies State Standards

  • Common Core State Standards: Reading Informational Text, grade 8: https://www.thecorestandards.org/ELA-Literacy/RI/8/
  • Common Core State Standards: Speaking and Listening, grade 8: https://www.thecorestandards.org/ELA-Literacy/SL/8/
  • Common Core State Standards: Writing, grade 8: https://www.thecorestandards.org/ELA-Literacy/W/8/
  • Common Core State Standards: Literacy in History/Social Studies, grades 6–8: https://www.thecorestandards.org/ELA-Literacy/RH/6-8/
  • National Council for the Social Studies: College, Career, and Civic Life (C3) Framework: https://www.socialstudies.org/standards/c3

Checked September 25, 2026.

T21